ViewStation® EX
User Guide
VS4000 User’s Guide
March
2003
JuneEdition
2003 Edition
March
March
3725-21086-001A
3725-21086-002
Trademark Information
Polycom®, the Polycom logo design, and ViewStation® are registered trademarks of Polycom Inc. ARENA™, Global
Management System™, PathNavigator™, Polycom OneDial™, and Visual Concert™ are trademarks of Polycom,
Inc. in the United States and various other countries.
Internet Explorer™, NetMeeting®, Windows®, and Windows NT® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Intel®, Pentium®, and Celeron® are registered trademarks and TeamStation™ is a trademark of Intel Corporation.
Adobe® Acrobat® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
ADTRAN® is a registered trademark of ADTRAN, Inc.
QuickTime™ is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
Netscape® Navigator® is a registered trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation.
IP/TV® is a registered trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Every effort has been made to ensure that the
information in this manual is accurate. Polycom, Inc. is not responsible for printing or clerical errors. Information in
this document is subject to change without notice.
Patent Information
The accompanying product is protected by one or more U.S. and foreign patents and patents pending held by
Polycom, Inc.
© 2003 Polycom, Inc. All rights reserved.
Polycom Inc.
4750 Willow Road
Pleasanton, CA 94588-2708
USA
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical,
for any purpose, without the express written permission of Polycom, Inc. Under the law, reproducing includes
translating into another language or format.
As between the parties, Polycom, Inc. retains title to, and ownership of, all proprietary rights with respect to the
software contained within its products. The software is protected by United States copyright laws and international
treaty provision. Therefore, you must treat the software like any other copyrighted material (e.g. a book or sound
recording).
Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Polycom, Inc. is not responsible
for printing or clerical errors. Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
Contents
Chapter 1 - Welcome to the ViewStation EX
Feature Highlights .....................................................................................................18
What is in the Box? ....................................................................................................20
ViewStation EX ....................................................................................................20
Network Interface Module .................................................................................20
Additional Information.......................................................................................21
Remote Control .............................................................................................21
Microphone Pod ...........................................................................................21
Power Supply ................................................................................................22
Help and Technical Support .....................................................................................23
Using Help ............................................................................................................23
Help Topics...........................................................................................................24
Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................24
General ...........................................................................................................24
Audio..............................................................................................................26
Video ..............................................................................................................27
How to Contact Technical Support ...................................................................27
By Phone ........................................................................................................27
By Internet .....................................................................................................28
Chapter 2 - Installing the ViewStation EX
What you Need to Install the ViewStation EX System..........................................30
Television Monitors.............................................................................................30
Network Interfaces ..............................................................................................30
Ethernet ..........................................................................................................30
ISDN ...............................................................................................................30
Power Source........................................................................................................31
Integrated Cameras .............................................................................................32
Sony EVI-10 Camera ....................................................................................32
NT-1 Device ..........................................................................................................32
Required Information..........................................................................................33
Equipment Installation...............................................................................................33
Setting up the ViewStation EX...........................................................................34
ISDN Network Interface Modules ....................................................................35
Setting up the V.35/RS-449/RS-530 Network Interface .........................35
Setting up the Quad BRI Network Interface.............................................38
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
i
ViewStation EX User Guide
Optional Equipment ........................................................................................... 41
Second Monitor ............................................................................................ 41
VCR ................................................................................................................ 41
Document Camera ....................................................................................... 42
Visual Concert DC ....................................................................................... 42
Visual Concert FX......................................................................................... 42
ShowStation IP.............................................................................................. 43
Upgrading Software .................................................................................................. 45
Upgrading Software over IP .............................................................................. 45
Upgrading Software over ISDN (H.320).......................................................... 47
Updating System Software From a PC on a LAN ................................... 48
Updating System Software Directly From a PC ...................................... 49
Updating a System Already Loaded With the Current System Software52
Updating System Software Remotely ....................................................... 54
Upgrading the System for Multipoint Calls ........................................................... 55
Chapter 3 - Initial System Setup
First System Screens .................................................................................................. 59
Selecting the Language....................................................................................... 59
Selecting Menu Items with the Remote Control ............................................. 60
Setting up System Name and Country............................................................. 61
System Name ................................................................................................ 61
Country.......................................................................................................... 62
Setting your Call Preferences............................................................................. 62
OneDial Preferences............................................................................................ 63
Initial Setup for IP (H.323) Calls .............................................................................. 64
Setup for IP (H.323) Calls ................................................................................... 64
Setting up a Gatekeeper ..................................................................................... 65
Initial Setup for ISDN (H.320) Calls ........................................................................ 68
Setup for the V.35/RS-449/RS-530 Network Interface.................................. 68
Setting Video Network Options................................................................. 69
Selecting Dialing Speeds ............................................................................. 70
Setting Broadcast Mode Options ............................................................... 70
Setting Advanced Dialing Preferences...................................................... 71
Entering V.35/RS-449/RS-530 Video Numbers ...................................... 73
Setup for the Quad BRI Network Interface ..................................................... 74
Entering ISDN Video Numbers ................................................................. 74
Entering Service Profile Ids Manually ...................................................... 75
Selecting the ISDN Switch Protocol........................................................... 76
Final Out-of-Box System Setup Screens ................................................................. 77
Configuring for Outside Line Calls .................................................................. 77
Adding a Telephone Number............................................................................ 78
ii
www.polycom.com
Contents
Setting the Administrator and Meeting Passwords........................................78
Setting up the Firewall ...............................................................................................79
Verifying Initial Setup ...............................................................................................80
Placing a Test Call................................................................................................80
Checking the Network Connectivity Indicators on the Main Screen...........80
Network Line Check Indicators .................................................................81
ISDN Line Check Indicators .......................................................................81
Gatekeeper Status Indicators ......................................................................82
Chapter 4 - Advanced Configuration for your Network
Environment
Configuration of the LAN Settings .........................................................................85
Configuring LAN and Intranet Settings...........................................................85
Selecting Advanced LAN Settings ....................................................................89
Configuring Firewall and LAN Connection Settings ....................................91
Configuration for IP (H.323) Calls ...........................................................................93
Configuring H.323 Name and Extension .........................................................94
Selecting Dialing Speeds.....................................................................................95
Configuring the Gateway and Gatekeeper ......................................................96
Overview .......................................................................................................96
About Polycom OneDial..............................................................................97
Setting the Gateway and Gatekeeper ........................................................98
Configuring the Gateway Number ............................................................100
Selecting your Gateway Prefix and Suffix ................................................101
Configuration for ISDN (H.320) Calls .....................................................................103
Advanced V.35/RS-449/RS-530 Network Interface Configuration.............103
Configuring the V.35/RS-449/RS-530 Serial Interface Control Signals104
Setting up Satellite (H.331) Broadcast Mode ............................................105
Selecting Dialing Speeds..............................................................................106
Setting the Calling Profile............................................................................108
Enabling Crypto Resync ..............................................................................110
Advanced Quad BRI Network Interface Configuration ...............................111
Entering ISDN Video Numbers..................................................................112
Entering or Detecting Service Profile Ids ..................................................113
Setting Audio Quality Preference ..............................................................114
Setting Channel Dialing Preferences .........................................................115
Selecting Dialing Speeds..............................................................................116
Modifying ISDN Video Network Information.........................................117
Configuration of the Global Address Book ...........................................................119
Overview...............................................................................................................119
About the Global Address Book........................................................................120
Configuring Settings for the Global Address Book Server............................120
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
iii
ViewStation EX User Guide
Setting the Global Address Book Preferences ................................................. 121
Selecting your Preferred Alias........................................................................... 123
Selecting the Call Type Order for OneDial Address Book Entries .............. 124
Entering the Private Network Number............................................................ 125
Establishing Dialing Rules ................................................................................. 125
Dialing Rules 1.............................................................................................. 125
Dialing Rules 2.............................................................................................. 128
Configuration for the Global Management System .............................................. 130
Overview .............................................................................................................. 130
About Global Management System.................................................................. 130
Setting Global Management Preferences ......................................................... 132
Accessing Global Management Server URLs.................................................. 133
Adding Global Management Technical Support Contact Information....... 134
Configuring Streaming Preferences ........................................................................ 136
Configuring SNMP Preferences ............................................................................... 138
Configuring Quality of Service ............................................................................... 140
Chapter 5 - Using the ViewStation EX
Remote Control ........................................................................................................... 144
Video Calls .................................................................................................................. 148
Placing a Call Manually...................................................................................... 148
Using One Number...................................................................................... 148
Using Two Numbers.................................................................................... 151
Placing a Call from the Address Book.............................................................. 153
Placing a Speed-Dial Call ................................................................................... 154
Placing a Call from the Web Interface.............................................................. 155
Placing a Call Using the Application Programming Interface ..................... 155
Answering a Video Call Manually ................................................................... 155
Answering a Video Call Automatically ........................................................... 156
Setting the System to Do Not Disturb .............................................................. 156
Ending a Video Call ............................................................................................ 157
Analog Telephone Calls ............................................................................................ 158
Placing a Telephone Call .................................................................................... 158
Adding a Telephone Call to a Video Call ........................................................ 159
Disconnecting a Telephone Call........................................................................ 159
Adding a Video Call to a Telephone Call ........................................................ 160
Address Book ............................................................................................................. 161
Adding an Entry to the Address Book ............................................................. 162
Editing an Existing Entry in the Address Book .............................................. 163
Deleting Entries in the Address Book .............................................................. 164
Transferring the Address Book ......................................................................... 164
Using the Global Address Book ........................................................................ 165
iv
www.polycom.com
Contents
Creating Multipoint Address Book Entries .....................................................166
Cameras and Sound ...................................................................................................167
Controlling Cameras ...........................................................................................167
Selecting a Near-Site Camera......................................................................167
Selecting a Far-Site Camera.........................................................................168
Controlling the Near-Site Camera..............................................................168
Controlling the Far-Site Camera.................................................................169
Adjusting Camera Settings..........................................................................170
Setting Camera Presets ................................................................................170
Enabling Automatic Voice Tracking..........................................................171
Enabling Automatic Tracking to Camera Presets....................................172
Controlling Sound ...............................................................................................173
Setting the Volume .......................................................................................173
Using the Mute Button.................................................................................173
Controlling Sound Effects Volume ............................................................174
Snapshots ....................................................................................................................175
Sending Snapshots...............................................................................................175
Snapshot Timeout ................................................................................................175
Picture-In-Picture (PIP) .............................................................................................177
Graphics Cursor .........................................................................................................178
General Information ............................................................................................178
Using the Graphics Cursor .................................................................................179
Chapter 6 - Using Advanced System Features
Multipoint Calls (Optional) .......................................................................................182
Before you Begin ..................................................................................................183
Multipoint Dialing Speed Table .................................................................183
Mixed Protocol Dialing Speed Table .........................................................183
Multipoint Downspeeding..........................................................................184
Downspeeding/Resynchronization Compatibility.................................185
Multipoint Calls and Firewall Information ..............................................186
Placing Multipoint Video Calls..........................................................................186
Using the Manual Dialer (Video Phone) ...................................................187
Using an Address Book Meeting Entry.....................................................189
Using the Address Book ..............................................................................191
Using the Manual Dialer and the Address Book .....................................191
Mixed Protocol Dialing .......................................................................................192
Different Ways to Place a Mixed Protocol Call ........................................192
Additional Information ...............................................................................193
Multipoint Viewing Modes ................................................................................194
Mode Description .........................................................................................195
Switching Modes ..........................................................................................197
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
v
ViewStation EX User Guide
Multipoint Conference Password ..................................................................... 197
Setting Up the Meeting Password ............................................................. 198
Using the Meeting Password...................................................................... 198
MCU Meeting Password Protection in Multipoint Dial-In Calls.......... 199
Multipoint Cascading Capabilities ................................................................... 201
Chair Control ....................................................................................................... 202
General Information .................................................................................... 202
Actions Available to All Sites ..................................................................... 203
Actions Only Available to the Chair Controller ...................................... 204
Dial-In Calling (Optional) ........................................................................................ 205
Dial-In Calling Scenarios.................................................................................... 205
With an Existing Point-to-Point Call ......................................................... 205
With no Existing Point-to-Point Call......................................................... 206
Auto Answer Multipoint Mode Configuration .............................................. 207
Setting the Auto Answer Multipoint Mode ............................................. 207
Conference on Demand (COD) ............................................................................... 209
Implementation of Conference on Demand .................................................... 209
COD User Interface Screens............................................................................... 210
Multipoint Call Screen................................................................................. 210
Video Phone Screen ..................................................................................... 210
Gatekeeper Screen........................................................................................ 211
Streaming Video ........................................................................................................ 212
Enabling Streaming............................................................................................. 212
Configuring Streaming Options........................................................................ 213
Configuring Streaming for Apple QuickTime ................................................ 214
Enabling and Starting Streaming on the ViewStation EX ...................... 214
Viewing Streaming with Apple QuickTime on the PC .......................... 214
Data Conferencing ..................................................................................................... 216
Enabling Data Conferencing on your System.......................................... 217
Using a ShowStation IP ............................................................................... 217
Using Microsoft NetMeeting ...................................................................... 217
People+Content .......................................................................................................... 218
Chapter 7 - Using the System with a PC
Before you Begin......................................................................................................... 220
PC Requirements ................................................................................................. 220
Connecting the PC and the ViewStation EX to the LAN............................... 220
Connecting the PC Directly to a ViewStation EX not on the LAN .............. 223
Configuring your Web Browser........................................................................ 225
Internet Explorer Configuration ................................................................ 225
Netscape Configuration .............................................................................. 226
Accessing the Web Interface .................................................................................... 228
vi
www.polycom.com
Contents
Features of the Web Interface ...................................................................................229
Placing a Call ........................................................................................................229
Placing a Call from the Address Book.......................................................231
Placing a Call from the Global Address Book ..........................................231
Placing a Call Using the Manual Dialer ....................................................231
Loading and Selecting a Slide Presentation .....................................................232
Loading a Slide Presentation on the PC ....................................................233
Selecting a Slide Presentation on the ViewStation EX ............................236
Slide Display Information ...........................................................................238
Viewing a Slide Presentation .............................................................................238
Viewing a Meeting...............................................................................................240
Closed Caption.....................................................................................................240
Accessing and Using Closed Caption........................................................241
Additional Information About Closed Caption.......................................241
PC-Resident Applications .........................................................................................243
PolycomSnap ........................................................................................................243
NetMeeting ...........................................................................................................245
Enabling NetMeeting on the ViewStation EX ..........................................246
Accessing NetMeeting .................................................................................246
Information About Placing an IP Video Calls with NetMeeting...........247
Polycom Management Access Control Wizard (PMAC) ...............................248
Installing a Logo ...........................................................................................249
Creating Custom Speed Dial and Custom Video Numbers Screens ....249
Creating the Management Password ........................................................250
Password-Protecting Individual Screens ..................................................251
Connecting to and Disconnecting from your System .............................252
Open and Save Profiles................................................................................252
System Setup and Remote Management ................................................................253
Admin Setup/General Setup .............................................................................254
System Diagnostics..............................................................................................255
System Diagnostics.......................................................................................255
Virtual Remote Control ...............................................................................256
Send a Message .............................................................................................257
Call Detail Report (CDR) .............................................................................258
Streaming ....................................................................................................................261
Chapter 8 - Troubleshooting
General .........................................................................................................................264
Audio ...........................................................................................................................265
Video ............................................................................................................................267
Network and Communications ...............................................................................269
IMUX ............................................................................................................................271
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
vii
ViewStation EX User Guide
LAN/Intranet ............................................................................................................. 272
Presentations .............................................................................................................. 273
Remote Control .......................................................................................................... 275
Appendix A - Screen Reference
System Information Reference.................................................................................. 278
Diagnostics Screen Reference .................................................................................. 280
Network Statistics................................................................................................ 280
Advanced Network Statistics ............................................................................ 281
About Polycom Video Error Concealment™ (PVEC)............................. 282
Call Status ............................................................................................................. 283
Color Bars ............................................................................................................. 283
Audio..................................................................................................................... 284
Generate Tone............................................................................................... 284
Audio Meter.................................................................................................. 285
Near End Loop..................................................................................................... 285
Far End Loop........................................................................................................ 286
Reset System......................................................................................................... 286
User Setup Screen Reference .................................................................................... 287
Admin Setup Screen Reference ............................................................................... 292
General Setup....................................................................................................... 293
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 Video Network Screens ................................................ 295
Multipoint Setup .......................................................................................... 295
Call Preferences ............................................................................................ 295
Video Network ............................................................................................. 296
Dialing Speeds .............................................................................................. 296
Broadcast Mode ............................................................................................ 296
Advanced Dialing ........................................................................................ 296
Video Numbers ............................................................................................ 296
Advanced V.35.............................................................................................. 296
BRI Video Network Screens............................................................................... 296
IMUX (Inverse Multiplexer) ....................................................................... 297
ISDN Video Numbers.................................................................................. 297
Auto Detect SPIDs........................................................................................ 297
Audio Quality ............................................................................................... 297
Advanced Dialing ........................................................................................ 297
Dialing Speeds .............................................................................................. 297
Call Preferences ............................................................................................ 297
Multipoint Setup .......................................................................................... 298
ISDN Video Network .................................................................................. 298
LAN Setup Screens.............................................................................................. 298
LAN & Intranet (main) ................................................................................ 298
viii
www.polycom.com
Contents
LAN & Intranet (Configuration) ................................................................298
Advanced LAN Settings ..............................................................................298
Firewall & LAN Connection .......................................................................298
H.323 Setup (main) .......................................................................................299
H.323 Setup (configuration) ........................................................................299
Dialing Speeds ..............................................................................................299
Gateway & Gatekeeper................................................................................299
Gateway Number .........................................................................................299
Gateway Setup ..............................................................................................299
Streaming .......................................................................................................299
SNMP Setup ..................................................................................................299
Global Address (Main) ................................................................................300
Global Address (Server) ..............................................................................300
Global Address Book Preferences ..............................................................300
Preferred Alias ..............................................................................................300
Advanced Address Book Preferences .......................................................300
Private Network ISDN Number.................................................................300
Dialing Rules 1 ..............................................................................................300
Dialing Rules 2 ..............................................................................................301
Global Management (Main) ........................................................................301
Global Management (Configuration) ........................................................301
Global Management URLs ..........................................................................301
Global Management Info.............................................................................301
Quality of Service .........................................................................................301
Data Conference...................................................................................................301
Telephone & Audio .............................................................................................304
Video and Cameras Screens ...............................................................................305
Monitors.........................................................................................................305
TV Monitors...................................................................................................306
Graphics Monitor..........................................................................................307
EX VGA Monitor ..........................................................................................308
Cameras..........................................................................................................308
VCR Setup......................................................................................................310
VGA Input Calibration ................................................................................311
Security..................................................................................................................312
Crypto Resync Pulse............................................................................................313
Software and Hardware Screens .......................................................................313
Software .........................................................................................................314
RS-232 .............................................................................................................314
Hardware Information.................................................................................314
Send Address Book ......................................................................................315
Far Site Software Update.............................................................................315
System Options .............................................................................................315
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
ix
ViewStation EX User Guide
Appendix A - Interoperability Information
H.320 Endpoint Interoperability .............................................................................. 317
H.323 Endpoint Interoperability .............................................................................. 318
MCU H.320 Interoperability ..................................................................................... 319
MCU H.323 Interoperability ..................................................................................... 319
Gateway/Gatekeeper/T120 Server Interoperability............................................. 320
Firewall/NAT Interoperability ................................................................................ 321
Appendix A - ViewStation EX Technical Specifications
ViewStation EX Technical Specifications ................................................................ 323
Appendix A - Security Features
Security Screens .......................................................................................................... 332
Admin and Meeting Password Screen ............................................................. 332
Security Screen..................................................................................................... 332
PMAC Security Features ........................................................................................... 333
Creating the Management Password ............................................................... 334
Password-Protecting Individual Screens ......................................................... 335
Security Features and Enhancements ...................................................................... 336
Password for pcPresent (PowerPoint slides)................................................... 336
Digest Implementation ....................................................................................... 336
Adtran 512 ............................................................................................................ 336
Disabling Mixed Protocols ................................................................................. 337
Telnet and FTP Timeout ..................................................................................... 337
x
www.polycom.com
List of Figures
Figure 1-1.Help Screen (Main)............................................................................................. 23
Figure 1-2.Help Screen (Topics) .......................................................................................... 24
Figure 2-1.ViewStation EX with Sony EVI-10 Camera .................................................... 32
Figure 2-2.V.35/RS-449/RS-530 Network Interface Module (P-LINK side) ................ 36
Figure 2-3.V.35/RS-449/RS-530 Network Interface Module (NETWORK side) ......... 37
Figure 2-4.Quad BRI Network Interface Module (P-LINK side).................................... 39
Figure 2-5.Quad BRI Network Interface Module (Network side).................................. 40
Figure 2-6.Softupdate Screen ............................................................................................... 46
Figure 2-7.Softupdate System Info Screen ......................................................................... 47
Figure 3-1.Welcome (Language) Screen............................................................................. 59
Figure 3-2.How to Select Menu Items Screen.................................................................... 60
Figure 3-3.System Name Screen.......................................................................................... 61
Figure 3-4.Country Screen.................................................................................................... 62
Figure 3-5.H.323 Setup Screen ............................................................................................. 64
Figure 3-6.Video Network Screen ....................................................................................... 69
Figure 3-7.Dialing Speeds Screen........................................................................................ 70
Figure 3-8.Advanced Dialing Screen .................................................................................. 71
Figure 3-9.Advanced Dialing Screen (Calling Profile List) ............................................. 72
Figure 3-10.Video Numbers Screen .................................................................................... 73
Figure 3-11.ISDN Video Numbers Screen ......................................................................... 75
Figure 3-12.Auto Detect SPIDs Screen ............................................................................... 75
Figure 3-13.ISDN Switch Protocol Screen.......................................................................... 76
Figure 3-14.Outside Line Calls Screen................................................................................ 77
Figure 3-15.Telephone Numbers Screen ............................................................................ 78
Figure 3-16.ViewStation EX Main Screen .......................................................................... 81
Figure 3-17.Main Screen (showing network conditions)................................................. 82
Figure 4-1.LAN & Intranet Screen ...................................................................................... 86
Figure 4-2.Advanced LAN Settings Screen ....................................................................... 89
Figure 4-3.Firewall & LAN Connection Screen................................................................. 91
Figure 4-4.H.323 Setup Screen (configuration) ................................................................. 94
Figure 4-5.Dialing Speeds Screen........................................................................................ 95
Figure 4-6.Gateway & Gatekeeper Screen ......................................................................... 98
Figure 4-7.Gateway Number Screen................................................................................. 100
Figure 4-8.Gateway Screen................................................................................................. 101
Figure 4-9.Advanced V.35 Screen ..................................................................................... 104
Figure 4-10.Video Network Screen and Broadcast Mode Screens ............................... 106
Figure 4-11.Dialing Speeds Screen.................................................................................... 107
Figure 4-12.Advanced Dialing Screen (Page 1)............................................................... 109
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
xi
ViewStation EX User Guide
Figure 4-13.Advanced Dialing Screen (Calling Profile List)..........................................109
Figure 4-14.Crypto Resync Pulse Screen ..........................................................................110
Figure 4-15.ISDN Video Numbers Screen ........................................................................112
Figure 4-16.Auto Detect SPIDs Screen ..............................................................................113
Figure 4-17.Audio Quality Preference Screen..................................................................115
Figure 4-18.Advanced Dialing Screen...............................................................................116
Figure 4-19.Dialing Speeds Screen ....................................................................................117
Figure 4-20.Global Address (Server) Screen ....................................................................121
Figure 4-21.Global Address Book Preferences Screen (for IP and ISDN Calls) ..........122
Figure 4-22.Dialing Rules 1 Screen ....................................................................................127
Figure 4-23.Dialing Rules 2 Screen ....................................................................................128
Figure 4-24.Global Management (Setup) Screen .............................................................132
Figure 4-25.Global Management URLs Screen ................................................................134
Figure 4-26.Global Management Info Screen...................................................................135
Figure 4-27.Streaming Screen.............................................................................................136
Figure 4-28.SNMP Setup Screen ........................................................................................138
Figure 4-29.Quality of Service Screen ...............................................................................140
Figure 5-1.Remote Control..................................................................................................145
Figure 5-2.Video Phone Screen ..........................................................................................148
Figure 5-3.Call Progress Indicators ...................................................................................150
Figure 5-4.Call Hangup Choices Screen ...........................................................................150
Figure 5-5.Address Book Screen ........................................................................................153
Figure 5-6.Speed Dial Screen..............................................................................................154
Figure 5-7.Telephone Screen ..............................................................................................158
Figure 5-8.Address Book Screen ........................................................................................161
Figure 5-9.Add/Change Entry Screen ..............................................................................162
Figure 5-10.............................................................................................................................167
Figure 5-11.Camera Control Button on Remote Control................................................169
Figure 6-1.Cascading 10 Sites in a Multipoint Call .........................................................201
Figure 6-2.Chair Control Screen.........................................................................................203
Figure 6-3.Gatekeeper Screen.............................................................................................211
Figure 6-4.Streaming Screen...............................................................................................212
Figure 6-5.Data Conference Screen....................................................................................216
Figure 7-1.LAN & Intranet Screen .....................................................................................221
Figure 7-2.Placing a Video Call Web Screen ....................................................................230
Figure 7-3.pcPresent Screen................................................................................................234
Figure 7-4.pcPresent: File Open Screen ............................................................................235
Figure 7-5.Available Presentations Screen .......................................................................236
Figure 7-6.Presentation Password Screen.........................................................................236
Figure 7-7.Presentation Directory (showing Loaded Slides) Screen ............................237
Figure 7-8.View a Meeting Web Screen ...........................................................................240
Figure 7-9.PolycomSnap Interface.....................................................................................244
Figure 7-10.General Setup Web Screen.............................................................................254
Figure 7-11.System Diagnostics Web Screen ...................................................................256
xii
www.polycom.com
Figure 7-12.Web Interface Call Detail Report screen (partial view) ............................ 258
Figure 7-13.Streaming Web Screen ................................................................................... 261
Figure A-1.User Setup Screen............................................................................................ 287
Figure A-2.Admin Setup Screen........................................................................................ 292
Figure A-3.Data Conference Screen.................................................................................. 302
Figure A-4.Telephone & Audio Screen ............................................................................ 304
Figure A-5.Graphics Monitor Screen................................................................................ 307
Figure A-6.VCR Setup Screen............................................................................................ 310
Figure A-7.VGA Input Calibration Screen....................................................................... 311
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
xiii
ViewStation EX User Guide
xiv
www.polycom.com
List of Tables
Table 1-1.Key features of the ViewStation EX system ..................................................... 18
Table 4-1.Dialing rules used by the Global Address Book............................................ 126
Table 5-1.Remote Control Functionality .......................................................................... 145
Table 5-2.Graphic cursor function and remote control.................................................. 179
Table 6-1.Multipoint Dialing Speeds ................................................................................ 183
Table 6-2.Mixed Protocol Dialing Speeds ........................................................................ 184
Table 6-3.Firewall TCP/UDP Ports in Multipoint Calls................................................ 186
Table 6-4.MCU Meeting Password Protection ................................................................ 199
Table 6-5.Dial-In Calling with an Existing Point-to-Point Call..................................... 206
Table 6-6.Dial-In Calling with no Existing Point-to-Point Call .................................... 206
Table 7-1.Password Usage with PMAC ........................................................................... 251
Table B-1.H.320 Endpoint Interoperability...................................................................... 317
Table B-2H.323 Endpoint Interoperability....................................................................... 318
Table B-3.MCU H.320 Interoperability............................................................................. 319
Table B-4.MCU H.323 Interoperability............................................................................. 319
Table B-5.Gateway/Gatekeeper/T120 Server Interoperability.................................... 320
Table B-6.Firewall/NAT Interoperability........................................................................ 321
Table C-1.ViewStation EX Technical Specifications ....................................................... 323
Table C-2. .............................................................................................................................. 329
Table D-1.Password Usage with PMAC .......................................................................... 334
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
xv
ViewStation EX User Guide
xvi
www.polycom.com
1
Welcome to the ViewStation EX
The ViewStation EX system is an easy-to-use, yet powerful set-top,
network appliance that provides the clearest audio and video in the
videoconferencing industry. The ViewStation EX system is a
mid-range conference room product that was designed to deliver
quality video and audio communications to mid-size conference
rooms, boardrooms, classrooms and custom conferencing facilities.
Note
Throughout this manual, the word “system” refers to the ViewStation
EX system.
Topics in This Chapter
The following topics are included in this chapter.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
Topic
Description
Page
Feature
Highlights
This is an overview of the ViewStation EX
system’s main features and benefits.
18
What is in the
Box?
This section lists the contents of the
ViewStation EX shipping container.
20
Help and
Technical
Support
This section describes how to use the
system Help screen and how to contact
Technical Support.
23
17
ViewStation EX User Guide
Feature Highlights
The following table provides a summary of the ViewStation EX
system’s main features and benefits. Refer also to the ViewStation
EX Technical Specifications in Appendix D for additional
information.
Table 1-1. Key features of the ViewStation EX system
Feature
Description
Video
The ViewStation EX system delivers TV quality
video for lifelike conferencing interaction while fully
supporting the H.263 video standard and the new 60
fields/ second ITU standard.
Audio
The system provides clear 360 degree, full-duplex,
digital audio with noise suppression, switchable
echo cancellation and automatic gain control, as well
as customized audio—extended audio flexibility via
dual microphone pods and line-level audio input for
custom microphones/mixers.
Camera Support
Supports a pan-tilt-zoom camera, a VCR and
document camera input, including support for the
Visual Concert™ DC.
Network Flexibility
The system supports the Quad BRI,
V.35/RS-449/RS-530, and Ethernet network
interfaces up to 768 Kbps.
Multipoint
Videoconferencing
The ViewStation EX can be upgraded using a
special key to support MultiPoint Plus as an option.
The system contains an embedded four-port MCU
for easy, on-demand, multipoint conferencing.
Up to four sites can participate (over IP and ISDN in
the same call) at 128 Kbps for ISDN and 256 Kbps
for IP for a continuous presence, voice activated, or
a chair control call using the one-button address
book dialing.
18
Mixed Protocol Dialing
Mixed Protocol Dialing enables up to four sites over
IP and ISDN in the same call.
Dial-In Calling
While in a video call, other endpoints (IP, ISDN, or
POTS) can dial into the call or easily be added by a
call from the host.
www.polycom.com
Chapter 1 - Welcome to the ViewStation EX
Table 1-1. Key features of the ViewStation EX system
Cascading
The Cascading feature allows you to add more video
and audio participants to a multipoint video call,
without the need for a bridge. Each of the
second-level system in a four-site multipoint
videoconference can call up two more video and one
audio site. Up to ten total video sites and four total
audio sites can participate in the call using the
built-in MCU.
Two-Monitor Support
Two-monitor support allows to simultaneously
display full-screen video from up to four endpoints,
plus PC content on a separate SGA projector.
People+Content™
The Polycom People+Content (P+C) standard,
implemented on the ViewStation EX, ViewStation
FX, VS4000, MGC 5.0, iPower 5.0, and
PathNavigator products, allows live video and live
graphics to be transmitted and received with all the
above-listed Polycom products.
Conference on Demand™
This feature allows you to bring multiple endpoints
together in a videoconference on an unscheduled
basis. With Conference on Demand, users can place
multipoint video calls to remote participants by only
using their names and/or the numbers that
correspond to those remote locations. Users donít
need to save the meeting name before making the
meeting call.
High-resolution Graphics
The system supports high-resolution XGA live
graphics with Visual Concert ™ FX.
Streaming
The streaming feature allows the system to multicast
the videoconference to viewers over IP.
Public and Private Networks
The system supports both public and private
networks through ISDN BRI, V.35/RS-449/RS-530,
and Ethernet networks.
Web Management
With embedded Web capabilities and remote
management, IT managers can perform diagnostics
and software upgrades.
Dual 10/100 Mbps Ethernet
Ports
Through the dual 10/100 Mbps Ethernet port you can
make IP calls, connect PCs, and allow Global
Management System™ access and management.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
19
ViewStation EX User Guide
What is in the Box?
The following section describes the contents of the ViewStation EX
shipping container.
ViewStation EX
The following items are included in the ViewStation EX box:
❑ ViewStation EX unit
❑ Documentation
•
Read Me First
•
ViewStation EX QuickStart
•
Documentation CD
❑ 1 microphone pod
❑ 1 power supply and cord
❑ 1 remote control
❑ Cable kit with:
•
1 RJ-9 microphone cords (brown)
•
1 S-video/triple RCA monitor cable (yellow, white, and
red)
•
1 RJ-45 keyed cable for connection to the network interface
module (light blue)
•
1 RJ-45 cable for connection to the LAN (orange)
•
1 DB-9 serial port cable for connection to a touch panel
Network Interface Module
The system may also include one of the following network interface
equipment(s) (as specified by the user):
20
www.polycom.com
Chapter 1 - Welcome to the ViewStation EX
❑ V.35/RS-449/RS-530 network interface:
•
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 module
❑ Quad BRI network interface:
•
Quad BRI Inverse Multiplexer (IMUX)
•
4 RJ-45 cables
•
1 RJ-45 cable with a keyed connector
Additional Information
The following provides important information about essential
components of the system: the remote control, the microphone
pods, and the power supply.
Remote Control
The remote control is an integral part of the system. You can use the
remote control to configure and operate your system. Once you
have the system set up and running, press the yellow INFO button
on the remote control for a basic description of the remote control
buttons.
For more information about the remote control, refer to Remote
Control on page 144.
Microphone Pod
The microphone pod provides digital audio input to the system.
The microphone pod has an audio range of approximately 30 feet
(9-meters) and provides automatic gain control, noise suppression,
and echo cancellation. You can press the MUTE button on the
microphone to silence your end of the call. When the MUTE button
is lighted, your end of the call is muted.
An optional microphone pod provides enhanced audio pickup.
Your system supports a maximum of two microphone pods
daisy-chained together.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
21
ViewStation EX User Guide
To connect the microphone pods to the system:
1.
Connect the 30-foot (9-meter) cable to the system and one of the
microphones pods.
2.
Connect the 10-foot (3-meter) cable between the two
microphone pods.
Note
Connecting and disconnecting the microphones does not require a
reboot of the system.
Power Supply
The ViewStation EX system has an external power supply. It
supports line voltages between 100V and 240V and line frequencies
from 47 Hz to 63 Hz.
Note
You void the warranty and may possibly damage your system if
you do not use the provided power supply.
22
www.polycom.com
Chapter 1 - Welcome to the ViewStation EX
Help and Technical Support
This section provides information about using the on-screen help,
basic troubleshooting, and contacting Polycom Technical support
Using Help
To access the Help screen:
Press the INFO button on the remote control. If your system is
registered with a Global Management System, the following Help
screen appears.
Figure 1-1. Help Screen (Main)
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
23
ViewStation EX User Guide
Help Topics
To access the Help screen:
Click the Help icon.
Figure 1-2. Help Screen (Topics)
Select the appropriate help topic from this screen. The topics
provide assistance with basic system usage.
Troubleshooting
This section contains basic troubleshooting information. For more
detailed information, refer to the Troubleshooting chapter.
General
Following are the most-often encountered problems and their
solutions.
Remote control is not working.
Make sure the batteries are installed. Make sure you are pointing the
remote control at the system’s IR detector. If battery power is low, a
low battery icon appears on the main screen.
24
www.polycom.com
Chapter 1 - Welcome to the ViewStation EX
Software Update appears when you power on the ViewStation
EX system.
The system software is corrupt or not loaded properly. Load system
software on the system from your PC. For instructions on how to do
this, refer to Upgrading Software, or consult your network
equipment provider.
A lightning bolt indicator appears on the left side of your far or
near-site screen.
The lightning bolt is only a visual indicator that informs you about
WAN or LAN network problems. It does not indicate performance
problems with your system.
If you are in an H.320 call, the lightning bolt most likely indicates
that the telephone company is experiencing bit errors on the line.
Contact and inform your telephone company of the existing
problem.
If you are in an H.323 call, the lightning bolt may signify that your
LAN network is experiencing packet loss, accompanied by video
and audio degradation. Contact your network manager.
The lightning bolt works differently in H.320 and H.323 calls for
software version 2.5 and above:
❑ In H.320 calls, the lightning bolt appears if there are 3 or more
CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) errors within a period of one
second, or if there are 10 or more FEC (Forward Error
Correction) errors in a period of one second.
❑ In H.323 calls, the lightning bolt appears if more than 100 audio
and video packets are lost. The display counter is reset each time
the lightning bolt appears.
The lightning bolt is triggered when your system detects a certain
level of packet loss on the network. The frequency of the packet loss
rate can be adjusted using the remote control shell (either via RS-232
or via Ethernet/Telnet). .Refer to the ViewStation EX, ViewStation
FX, and VS4000 ARENA API Programmer’s Guide.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
25
ViewStation EX User Guide
Audio
Following are the most-often encountered audio problems and their
solutions.
No audio in a call.
❑ The system is connected to the wrong audio input on the
monitor. Make sure the monitor cables are connected as shown
in the QuickStart color cable diagrams.
❑ Far site is muted. If the far site is muted, a far site Mute icon
appears in the lower left corner of the monitor. Ask the far site
to press the MUTE button on the remote control to check if it is
muted or is not connected properly.
❑ Use the Generate Tone test on the ViewStation EX system to
help diagnose the problem.
❑ Make sure that the microphone pod is positioned correctly for
the meeting configuration. If the microphone pod is behind the
meeting participants, you may not be able to hear them speak.
For the best audio, always position the microphone pod
between the monitor and the person closest to the monitor. As
most people face the monitor during a call, following this rule
ensures that the meeting participants are also facing the
microphone pod.
You can also daisy-chain microphone pods along the conference
table. Additional microphone pods can be purchased from the
Polycom Web store. Follow the same rule for multiple
microphone pods and do not position the pods behind the
meeting participants.
You hear echoes when speaking.
Echoes are always caused by the far site in a call. Have the far site
turn down the volume and make sure that their microphones are
placed away from the system and monitor speakers.
Not enough volume in a call.
The volume is set too low on either the system or the television
monitor. For best results, set the volume on the television monitor to
26
www.polycom.com
Chapter 1 - Welcome to the ViewStation EX
one-half its maximum volume and set the volume on the system to
a comfortable level.
Video
Following are the most-often encountered video problems and their
solutions.
No picture on the main monitor.
The system enters sleep mode after 3 minutes of inactivity. In sleep
mode, the system appears to be powered off. To “wake up” the
system, pick up the remote control, or press the button on the front
of the system.
Same picture on first and second monitors.
❑ You pressed the SNAPSHOT button. The second monitor is
previewing the video on the primary monitor for the snapshot.
Press SNAPSHOT to send a snapshot and then press
SNAPSHOT again to return to live video.
❑ You may have connected your second composite monitor to the
VCR out port on the back of the system.
How to Contact Technical Support
By Phone
Before calling Polycom technical support, have the following
information ready:
❑ Description of the issue
❑ The ViewStation’s 14-digit serial number on the label located on
the bottom of the unit.
Contact Polycom Technical Support at 1-800-POLYCOM. Listen for
the product support prompt.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
27
ViewStation EX User Guide
By Internet
To contact Polycom technical support, go to the Polycom Global
Services Web page at http://esupport1.polycom.com/cgi/top.asp.
This page allows you to enter your contact information as well as a
question or a description of the problem. Including the following
information will decrease the amount of time needed to assess your
situation:
❑ The ViewStation’s 14-digit serial number on the label located on
the bottom of the unit.
❑ Software revision of the product
❑ Network information
❑ Troubleshooting steps you tried to implement
Response time to technical support inquiries will not exceed two
business days. Response time on basic or technical information
requests about Polycom products and their capabilities may vary
with the complexity of the question.
28
www.polycom.com
2
Installing the ViewStation EX
This chapter provides all of the instructions you need to install the
ViewStation EX system successfully. It also covers the optional
network interface installation if you are using ISDN for your video
calls.
You should read this chapter in conjunction with the QuickStart
card. This card was shipped in the system box.
Topics in This Chapter
The following topics are included in this chapter.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
Topic
Description
Page
What you Need
to Install the
ViewStation EX
System
This section lists the additional items that
you need to install your ViewStation EX
system.
30
Equipment
Installation
This section gives step-by-step
instructions needed to install the system
and, if applicable, the appropriate network
interface.
33
Upgrading
Software
This section describes how to update
software over an IP or ISDN network.
45
Upgrading the
System for
Multipoint Calls
This section describes how to add the
multipoint key to enable multipoint calling
on the ViewStation EX system.
55
29
ViewStation EX User Guide
What you Need to Install the ViewStation EX
System
This section lists the additional items you need to install the
ViewStation EX system. It also provides a checklist of information
you should have on hand during the installation process.
For details about the system components, see the QuickStart card
provided with each system.
Television Monitors
You can use the ViewStation EX with two television monitors and a
VGA monitor that operates at 75 Hz or higher with a resolution of
800 x 600, 1024 x 768, or 1280 x 1024.
The ViewStation EX system can use any S-video or composite
television monitor as the primary monitor. The other monitor has to
be S-video.
The size of the monitor should be proportional to the size of the
room where video conferences take place.
Network Interfaces
Ethernet
A Local Area Network (LAN) Ethernet connection is needed if you
plan to use IP.
ISDN
If you are using one of the following ISDN network interfaces with
your system, you will need the appropriate network equipment and
access to services for the specified network interface:
30
www.polycom.com
Chapter 2 - Installing the ViewStation EX
❑ V.35/RS-449/RS-530 network interface:
•
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 module
•
Optional cables used to connect the V.35/RS-449/RS-530
module to the DCE:
–
(V.35 “Y” cable (HD-44M to DB-25M/RS-366 and M34
“Winchester” V.35 )
–
RS-449/422 “Y” cable (HD-44M to DB-25M/RS-366 and
DB-37M/RS-449/422)
–
Ascend cable (HD-44M to HD-44M)
Note
These cables are available from the Polycom Web store.
•
Access to your Data Communications Equipment (DCE) or
Data Service Unit (DSU).
❑ Quad BRI network interface:
•
Quad BRI Inverse Multiplexer (IMUX)
•
4 RJ-45 cables
–
1 RJ-45 cable with a keyed connector
–
BRI line ordered from your service provider
Power Source
The ViewStation EX system has an external power supply. It
supports line voltages between 100V and 240V and line frequencies
from 47 Hz to 63 Hz.
Warning
You void the warranty and may possibly damage your system if
you do not use the provided power supply.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
31
ViewStation EX User Guide
Integrated Cameras
Sony EVI-10 Camera
The ViewStation EX system supports the Sony EVI-10 camera. This
camera has a built-in wide-angle lens and has a new form factor.
Figure 2-1. ViewStation EX with Sony EVI-10 Camera
Caution
Attaching a third-party vendor wide-angle lens will cause damage
that is not covered by your product warranty. Third-party lenses
will rub against the system’s enclosure when the camera is reset.
Note
The camera is controlled with the remote control that is shipped
with the system. Manually adjusting the camera can damage the
unit.
NT-1 Device
An ISDN network termination (NT-1) device may be required
between your ISDN line and the system. If your system is not
connected to an internal switchboard, such as a PBX, it may require
an ISDN termination resistor to be installed.
32
www.polycom.com
Chapter 2 - Installing the ViewStation EX
Required Information
Before you start installing the equipment, obtain the following
information:
❑ IP address of the ViewStation EX system: to be provided by
your Internet Service Provider or system administrator.
❑ ISDN numbers: to be provided by your Network Service
Provider.
❑ SPIDs: to be provided by your Network Service Provider.
❑ Switch protocols: to be provided by your Network Service
Provider.
❑ Gatekeeper address: to be provided by your Network Service
Provider or system administrator.
❑ Firewall information: to be provided by your Network Service
Provider or system administrator.
❑ Telephone numbers: to be provided by your system
administrator.
Equipment Installation
This section describes how to set up the following equipment:
❑ ViewStation EX. See Setting up the ViewStation EX.
❑ Network interface modules (V.35/RS-449/RS-530, and BRI).
See ISDN Network Interface Modules.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
33
ViewStation EX User Guide
Setting up the ViewStation EX
To connect your cables and equipment to the back of the
ViewStation EX system:
1.
Place the system on top of the television monitor with the front
lip overhanging the top of the television monitor.
2.
Place the microphone pod on a flat surface between the meeting
participants and the television monitors. Do not place the
microphone pod near the television monitor speakers.
Note
Connecting and disconnecting the microphone off the system does
not require a reboot of the system.
3.
Connect the required equipment and cables to the back of your
system as shown in the QuickStart.
4.
Connect any optional equipment to the back of your system as
shown in the QuickStart. Optional equipment can include a PC,
VCR, telephone, audio mixer, document camera, XGA projector
or monitor, Visual Concert FX, or additional television
monitors.
Note
The colors on the cables match the colors on the back of the
system panel.
5.
To prevent cable entanglement, wrap the enclosed cable tie
around all of the cables.
6.
Put the batteries in the remote control.
You are now ready to set up your network interface. See ISDN
Network Interface Modules, on page 35 for additional information.
34
www.polycom.com
Chapter 2 - Installing the ViewStation EX
ISDN Network Interface Modules
This section explains how to install the following ISDN network
interfaces:
❑ V.35/RS-449/RS-530. See Setting up the V.35/RS-449/RS-530
Network Interface on page 35.
❑ BRI. See Setting up the Quad BRI Network Interface on page 38.
Setting up the V.35/RS-449/RS-530 Network Interface
This section explains how to install and connect the
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 network interface module so that you can
make calls over ISDN with the system.
The V.35/RS-449/RS-530 network interface supports the V.35,
RS-449, or RS-530 protocol depending on the cable you use to
connect your equipment.
Connecting a V.35/RS-449/RS-530 network interface module to
your system:
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
1.
Make sure your system is turned off.
2.
Insert one end of the light blue keyed cable into the light blue
port on the back of the system. The cable has special RJ-45
connectors that are not interchangeable with normal RJ-45
connectors.
3.
Insert the other end of the light blue RJ-45 cable into the input
port labeled
xon the network interface module.
35
ViewStation EX User Guide
Figure 2-2 shows the peripheral link (P-LINK) side of the network
interface module that connects to the EX system.
12 VDC Connector
(not used)
Port (not used)
Input Port
LEDs
Figure 2-2. V.35/RS-449/RS-530 Network Interface Module (P-LINK side)
To connect the V.35/RS-449/RS-530 network interface module
to the DCE:
The V.35/RS-449/RS-530 network interface module contains two
HD-44 female ports (labeled 1 and 2) that connect to the data
communications equipment (DCE).
36
1.
Connect the HD-44 male cable ends to ports 1 and 2 on the
network interface module. If you want to connect only one
cable, connect to port 1 on the interface module.
2.
Tighten the screws on the connectors.
3.
Connect the remaining cable ends to the DCE's
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 port and the DB-25 RS-366 dialing port, if
used. If you are connecting only one cable, connect to the lowest
ordered port on your DCE.
4.
Tighten the screws on the connectors.
5.
Power on the television monitor.
6.
Power on the system. Once you power up the system, there is a
20-second delay before you see the Polycom logo.
7.
Once your interface is properly connected, you are ready to
configure your system. Proceed to chapter 3.
www.polycom.com
Chapter 2 - Installing the ViewStation EX
Figure 2-3 shows the network side of the network interface module
that connects to the DCE.
LEDs
Figure 2-3. V.35/RS-449/RS-530 Network Interface Module (NETWORK
side)
Special Information
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 Module Interchangeability. This system only
operates with the V.35 module that is compatible with the
ViewStation FX. It is not compatible with the V.35 module that
operates with the ViewStation H.323 system. The new module uses
HD-44F connectors (ports 1 and 2), and uses a keyed RJ-45 connector
for the serial link to the back panel of the ViewStation EX system. An
HD-44M to DB-25F adapter cable is available as an option to connect
existing V.35/RS-449/RS-530 network cables, if necessary.
Cable Information. The following optional cables used to connect
the V.35/RS-449/RS-530 module to the DCE are available from the
Polycom Web store:
❑ V.35 “Y” cable—HD-44M to DB-25M/RS-366 and M34
“Winchester” V.35
❑ RS-449/422 “Y” cable—HD-44M to DB-25M/RS-366 and
DB-37M/RS-449/422
❑ Ascend cable—HD-44M to HD-44M
Cable drawings and pinout information is available in the “V.35
Technical Information” section of the Integrators’ Reference Manual
for ViewStation EX, ViewStation FX, and VS4000.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
37
ViewStation EX User Guide
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 Cable Adapter Kit. You can also purchase an
additional cable adapter kit (available through your reseller) to
extend the distance between your system and the
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 network interface module.
V.35/RS-44/RS-530 and RS-366 Connections. The
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 connection on the V.35 cable is used for data
and the RS-366 connection is used for dialing. If you plan to place 2
x 56 Kbps or 2 x 64 Kbps calls, use one cable for each port.
Note
If your DCE does not use dialing, do not use the RS-366 (DB-25M)
connector.
LED Information. Refer to the V.35/RS-449/RS-530 Technical
Information section of the Integrators’ Reference Manual for
ViewStation EX, ViewStation FX, and VS4000.
Setting up the Quad BRI Network Interface
This section explains how to install and connect the Quad BRI
network interface module so that you can make calls over ISDN
with the ViewStation EX system.
To connect the Quad BRI network interface module to the
system:
38
1.
Make sure your system is turned off.
2.
Find the cable with the light blue RJ-45 keyed connector on one
end and the green RJ-45 (non-keyed) connector on the other
end.
3.
Insert the light blue RJ-45 keyed connector into the light blue
RJ-45 keyed port on the back of the system.
4.
Insert the green (non-keyed) RJ-45 connector into the green
RJ-45 port labeled
xon the network interface module.
www.polycom.com
Chapter 2 - Installing the ViewStation EX
Figure 2-4 shows the peripheral link (P-LINK) side of the Quad BRI
network interface module that connects to the ViewStation EX
system.
Figure 2-4. Quad BRI Network Interface Module (P-LINK side)
To connect the Quad BRI network interface module to the BRI
network:
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
1.
Attach your RJ-45 network cable(s) from port 1 on your ISDN
BRI network to the connector labeled ISDN S/T on the Quad
BRI network interface module.
2.
Power on the television monitor.
3.
Power on the system. Once you power up the system, there is a
20-second delay before you see the Polycom logo.
4.
Once your interface is properly connected, you are ready to
configure your system. Proceed to chapter 3, Initial System
Setup.
39
ViewStation EX User Guide
Figure 2-5 shows the network side of the Quad BRI network
interface module that connects to the ISDN BRI network.
Figure 2-5. Quad BRI Network Interface Module (Network side)
Special Information
Quad BRI/IMUX. The Quad BRI is also called IMUX (for Inverse
Multiplexer). With the Quad BRI, you can connect up to four ISDN
lines to the video conferencing unit. The Quad BRI allows multi-line
ISDN connections to be “muxed” together to create a higher
bandwidth connection to the far-site device. Each ISDN line adds
128 Kbps to the possible operating line.
ISDN Lines. The system can use up to four ISDN lines. Note that the
system only require a single functioning ISDN line to operate, but
speeds greater than 128 Kbps require the use of additional ISDN
lines.
NT-1. If you are not connected to an internal phone system, called a
PBX, you will need to connect the ISDN cables from your system to
the Quad BRI module, to the network termination (NT-1) device,
which is connected to the ISDN wall jack.
For more information about ISDN, refer to the Integrators’ Reference
Manual for ViewStation EX, ViewStation FX, and VS4000.
LED Information. Refer to the BRI Technical Information section of
the Integrators’ Reference Manual for ViewStation EX, ViewStation FX,
and VS4000.
40
www.polycom.com
Chapter 2 - Installing the ViewStation EX
Optional Equipment
You can enhance your videoconferences by using optional
equipment. Refer to the ViewStation EX QuickStart for color cable
diagrams that show how to connect optional equipment to the
system.
Second Monitor
The second monitor displays what would otherwise be displayed in
the smaller picture-in-picture window of a single-monitor system.
To install a second monitor:
1.
Insert the monitor cable in the monitor 2 output jack.
2.
Connect the other end to the monitor 2 output jack.
a.
VCR
You can use a video cassette recorder (VCR) to record your
videoconference or to present recorded material as part of your
videoconference. The VCR records video from the near site’s main
television monitor and audio from both the near and far sites. When
playing tapes, the VCR provides audio and video to all participants
in a call.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
1.
To play a tape in the VCR, press the NEAR button on the remote
control twice.
2.
Use the ARROW buttons to highlight the VCR icon on the
screen. Press the SELECT button on the remote control.
3.
Use the VCR remote control to play the tape.
41
ViewStation EX User Guide
Document Camera
You can use a document camera to take pictures of an object or
document and send them to a far site.
1.
To use a document camera with your system, press the NEAR
button on the remote control twice.
2.
Then use the ARROW buttons to highlight the Document
Camera icon on the screen. Press the SELECT button on the
remote control.
Visual Concert DC
Visual Concert™ DC is part of the Visual Concert series of
collaboration products designed to maximize video conferencing.
This is a custom-integrated document camera that has the ability to
send images at SXGA (1280 x 1024) resolution with full motion
capture during a video call. It lets you save images from the glass
onto a PCMCIA card, annotate images with a virtual drawing pen,
view transparent material using backlighting or send a
high-resolution preview with the SNAPSHOT button.
For more information about installing Visual Concert DC, consult
Visual Concert DC User Guide and Visual Concert DC QuickStart.
Visual Concert FX
The ViewStation EX system supports the use of Visual Concert™
FX.Visual Concert™ FX is a collaborative product with the
capability of transmitting a high-resolution graphics stream with
high-quality audio in any conference, including multipoint calls. It
is transmitted to the other site in a conference in tandem with your
live video stream. It works with your laptop, desktop, or Macintosh
at resolutions up to and including 1280 x 1024.
The video and graphic images can be displayed at both the near and
far ends in dual stream mode, video on one monitor and the live
graphics on a second monitor (for example, the far site can see you
and your presentation live at the same time).
42
www.polycom.com
Chapter 2 - Installing the ViewStation EX
The live images can be from virtually any source on the laptop or
desktop such as PowerPoint, Excel, a Web page or proprietary
software applications. Visual Concert FX is designed to transmit
graphics at SXGA resolution (1280 x 1024), but will auto-sync to
match the resolution of the laptop and scale to match the best
resolution at the far end. A VGA-out port on the unit allows the
flexibility of connecting a high-resolution projection system or
monitor for in-room displays.
Dual Stream Compatibility
Visual Concert FX dual stream is compatible with the Polycom
Accord MCU version 3.01 in ISDN multipoint calls. All sites are able
to see the presenter and the PC at the same time.
Limitations
If the far site cannot support dual streams, the system reverts to
sending the live computer screen as the main video stream.
Note
For more information about installing Visual Concert FX, consult
the Visual Concert FX User Guide and Visual Concert FX QuickStart.
ShowStation IP
The ShowStation® IP allows you to project any type of document or
Microsoft Office file in big-screen format and share it with any
location instantly.
The ShowStation IP works best when you have two ViewStation EX
systems, two ShowStations with LAN cards, and an RJ-45 cable. For
information about installing ShowStation IP refer to the ShowStation
User Guide.
To connect and use the ShowStation IP:
1.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
Use the provided blue RJ-45 cable to connect the ShowStation
LAN card to the blue LAN port on the back of the system. You
43
ViewStation EX User Guide
can also connect the ShowStation and the system to the same
LAN.
2.
Find the LAN name of the ShowStation. Click the Toolbar icon
on the main menu of the ShowStation. The Site Name is under
the Preferences tab.
3.
Power on your system.
4.
Select System Info>Admin Setup>Data Conference and enter
the name of the ShowStation on the Data Conference screen.
5.
Place a video call between the two ViewStation EX systems.
When the systems connect, the ShowStations synchronize with
one another automatically.
Once the systems have connected, a whiteboard appears on the
ShowStations’ LCD displays. It takes approximately 30 seconds for
the whiteboard to appear once the video call is placed. You are now
ready to use your ShowStation.
44
www.polycom.com
Chapter 2 - Installing the ViewStation EX
Upgrading Software
The Softupdate application will update all versions of ViewStation
software. To update the software, your system must be on local area
network (LAN) or directly connected to a PC via Ethernet.
Before you begin, print the Read Me First file that is provided with
the system software. It contains updated information that may not
be included in this guide.
Caution
Do not power off your system during the software update process.
If you turn off your system during the download process, your
system reverts to its original software version.
Upgrading Software over IP
You can upgrade the software on your system with the Softupdate
application available from the Software Download Center on the
Polycom Web site at www.polycom.com.
If you do not have Internet access, your reseller can supply you with
the application on CD-ROM.
To upgrade your system software over IP:
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
1.
Double-click the software zip file and extract the files to a
directory on your PC.
2.
Double-click the Softupdate.exe file to open the Softupdate
application.
45
ViewStation EX User Guide
Figure 2-6. Softupdate Screen
3.
Click the Softupdate button, as shown in Figure 2-6.
4.
Enter the IP address of the system and the administrator
password, if required, then click OK.
5.
In the System Info screen, specify whether to delete the address
book and system files during the update.
6.
Determine whether you want to make your system a DHCP
server. Selecting the Allow System to be a DHCP Server option
will make the Server button visible on the LAN & Intranet
screen in the user interface (System Info>Admin
Setup>LAN/H.323>LAN/Intranet>LAN&Intranet).
Warning
Do not select the Server option if your system is on a LAN with
other computers. If you do, the system provides IP addresses to the
other computers on the LAN even though the LAN already has a
46
www.polycom.com
Chapter 2 - Installing the ViewStation EX
DHCP server. Your system administrators may have to repair any
network problems this causes.
Figure 2-7. Softupdate System Info Screen
7.
Click Continue to start the upgrade process.
8.
When the upgrade has finished, click OK to close the dialog
box.
Upgrading Software over ISDN (H.320)
The software on your ViewStation EX system can be upgraded
through an ISDN (H.320) video call from any other ViewStation EX
system.
You can perform a software update to the far site over your
V.35/RS-449/RS-530, or BRI line during a call. Updating works best
at speeds of 512 Kbps and below.
To upgrade your system over ISDN:
1.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
Place a video call to the system you want to upgrade.
47
ViewStation EX User Guide
2.
Select System Info > Admin Setup > Security and write down
the passwords that appear on the Security screen of the site you
want to upgrade.
3.
On the site sending the software, select System Info>Admin
Setup > Software/Hardware > Update to access the Far Site
Software Update screen.
4.
Highlight the Start icon and press the SELECT button on the
remote control.
5.
Enter the passwords, highlight the Start icon, and press the
SELECT button on the remote control to begin the upgrade
process.
Once the software upgrade process is complete, your system
automatically restarts.
Updating System Software From a PC on a LAN
To update your system software from a PC on the LAN:
1.
48
Access the Sofupdate.exe file, as follows:
•
From the Update CD: Insert the Update CD into your drive.
•
From the Polycom Web site: 1. Go to the software download
center at www.polycom.com. 2. Locate your product name
and provide the required information. 3. Run the
Softupdate application to download the latest software and
update your system. Note that you need to decompress the
file before you can run the Softupdate application.
2.
Double-click the Softupdate.exe icon to open the application.
3.
When the application opens, click the Softupdate button.
4.
Enter the IP address of your videoconferencing system in the
dialog box that appears. If the system has an administrator
password, enter it here and click OK. If it does not have a
password, leave it blank and click OK.
5.
Softupdate will locate your system and provide basic
information. To retain your existing address book and files,
www.polycom.com
Chapter 2 - Installing the ViewStation EX
select the appropriate options on the Softupdate screen. Then
click the Continue button.
6.
As the software is being upgraded, you will be informed of its
progress. When it is finished, click the OK button. Your system
will automatically reboot.
7.
If you have purchased an MP upgrade key for multipoint calls,
please refer to Upgrading the System for Multipoint Calls on
page 55 for instructions on entering the key.
Updating System Software Directly From a PC
Updating your System Software to a Higher Version
To update your system software to a higher version than the one
currently on the system, follow these steps:
1.
Connect one end of the blue-tipped RJ-45 cable to the blue LAN
connector on the back of your system. Connect the other end of
the blue-tipped RJ-45 cable to the Ethernet PC card of your
computer. Then turn on your system.
2.
To connect to your desktop or laptop computer, you need to set
your system as a DHCP server. To do so, follow these
instructions:
a.
Select System Info > Admin Setup > LAN/H.323 >
LAN/Intranet > LAN & Intranet.
Note
The Server button is visible on the LAN & Intranet screen only if the
option Allow System to be a DHCP Server has been previously
enabled in the System Info screen of the Softupdate application. For
more information about enabling the option Allow System to be a
DHCP Server, refer to Upgrading Software over IP.
b. In the DHCP field, select Server. The following message
will appear: “The system will now issue IP addresses to
other PCs on the LAN. Continue?”
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
49
ViewStation EX User Guide
Caution
Do not use this setting if your system is on a LAN with other
computers. If you do, your system will provide IP addresses to the
other computers even though the LAN already has a DHCP server.
Your IT personnel and system administrators will have to repair
any network problems this causes.
c.
Select Yes if you are absolutely certain you want to set your
system as a DHCP server.
d. Press Menu. The following message will appear: “Power
must be reset to save changes. Continue?” Select Yes.
e.
Your system will automatically restart. It will now act as a
DHCP server and will provide IP addresses to one or more
PCs.
3.
Go to the System Information screen. You should see the IP
address 1.1.1.2, which is the IP address of your system.
4.
Once you get an IP address, go to your PC and follow these
instructions:
For Windows 95 and 98:
a.
Right-click the Network Neighborhood icon, and then
right-click Properties.
b. When the Network box appears, select the Configuration
tab, then double-click TCP/IP.
c.
Select the IP Address tab. Make sure the Obtain an IP
Address Automatically button is selected. Then click OK.
For Windows NT 4.0:
a.
Right-click the Network Neighborhood icon, and then
right-click Properties.
b. When the Network screen appears, select the Protocols tab,
then double-click TCP/IP Protocol.
c.
50
Select the IP Address tab. Make sure the Obtain an IP
Address Automatically button is selected. Then click OK.
www.polycom.com
Chapter 2 - Installing the ViewStation EX
For Windows 2000:
a.
Right-click the My Network Places icon, and then
right-click Properties.
b. In the Network and Dial-up Connections window,
right-click Local Area Connection, and select Properties.
c.
In the Local Area Connection Properties window,
double-click Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
d. In the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window, make
sure the Obtain an IP Address Automatically button is
selected. Then click OK.
5.
Restart your PC and insert the update CD into your drive. Or
access the Softupdate.exe file from the Polycom Web site: 1. Go
to the software download center at www.polycom.com. 2.
Locate your product name and provide the required
information. 3. Run the Softupdate application to download the
latest software and update your system. Note that you need to
decompress the file before you can run the Softupdate
application.
6.
Double-click the Softupdate.exe icon to open the application.
7.
When the application opens, click the Softupdate button.
8.
Enter the IP address of your system in the dialog box that
appears. If you have an administrative password, enter it here
and click OK. If you don’t have a password, leave it blank and
click OK.
9.
Softupdate will locate your system and provide basic
configuration information. To delete your existing address book
and files, check the appropriate boxes.
10. Check the box Allow System to be a DHCP Server. Then click
the Continue button.
11. As the software is being upgraded, you will be informed of its
progress. When it is finished, click the OK button. The system
will automatically reboot. Your system software has been
loaded.
12. If you have purchased an MP upgrade key for multipoint calls,
please refer to Upgrading the System for Multipoint Calls on
page 55 for instructions on entering the key.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
51
ViewStation EX User Guide
Updating a System Already Loaded With the Current System Software
To update your system software from the most-current version to
the same current version or higher, follow these steps:
1.
Connect one end of the blue-tipped RJ-45 cable to the blue LAN
connector on the back of your system. Connect the other end of
the blue-tipped RJ-45 cable to the Ethernet PC card of your
computer. Then turn on the system.
2.
To connect to your desktop or laptop computer, you need to set
your system as follows:
a.
Select System Info > Admin Setup > LAN/H.323 >
LAN/Intranet > LAN & Intranet.
b. Press the Up arrow on the remote control to go to the DHCP
field and set it to Off.
c.
In the IP Address field, enter the IP address 1.1.1.2.
d. Press Menu. The following message will appear: “Power
must be reset to save changes. Continue?” Select Yes.
e.
Your system will automatically restart.
3.
Go to the System Information screen. You should see the IP
address 1.1.1.2, which is the IP address of your system.
4.
Go to your PC and follow these instructions:
For Windows 95/98:
a.
Right-click the Network Neighborhood icon, and then
right-click Properties.
b. When the Network box appears, select the Configuration
tab, then TCP/IP, and then select the IP Address tab. Make
sure the Specify an IP address button is selected.
c.
Enter the following information:
–
IP address = 1.1.1.3
–
Subnet mask = 255.255.255.0
d. Then click OK.
52
www.polycom.com
Chapter 2 - Installing the ViewStation EX
For Windows NT 4.0:
a.
Right-click the Network Neighborhood icon, and then
right-click Properties.
b. When the Network screen appears, select the Protocols tab,
then double-click TCP/IP Protocol.
c.
Select the IP Address tab. Make sure the Specify and IP
Address button is selected.
d. Enter the following information:
e.
–
IP address = 1.1.1.3
–
Subnet mask = 255.255.255.0
Then click OK.
For Windows 2000:
a.
Right-click the My Network Places icon, and then
right-click Properties.
b. In the Network and Dial-up Connections window,
right-click Local Area Connection, and select Properties.
c.
In the Local Area Connection Properties window,
double-click Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
d. In the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window, make
sure the Use the following IP address button is selected.
e.
f.
5.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
Enter the following information:
–
IP address = 1.1.1.3
–
Subnet mask = 255.255.255.0
Then click OK.
Restart your PC and insert the update CD into your drive.
Access the Sofupdate.exe file, as follows:
•
From the Update CD: Insert the update CD into your drive.
•
From the Polycom Web site: 1. Go to the software download
center at www.polycom.com. 2. Locate your product name
and provide the required information. 3. Run the
Softupdate application to download the latest software and
53
ViewStation EX User Guide
update your system. Note that you need to decompress the
file before you can run the Softupdate application.
6.
Double-click the Softupdate.exe icon to open the application.
7.
When the application opens, click the Softupdate button.
8.
Enter the IP address of your system in the dialog box that
appears. If you have an administrative password, enter it here
and click OK. If you don’t have a password, leave it blank and
click OK.
9.
Softupdate will locate your system and provide basic
configuration information. To delete your existing address book
and files, check the appropriate boxes.
10. Click the Continue button.
11. As the software is being upgraded, you will be informed of its
progress. When it is finished, click the OK button. The system
will automatically reboot. Your system software has been
loaded.
12. If you have purchased an MP upgrade key for multipoint calls,
please refer to Upgrading the System for Multipoint Calls on
page 55 for instructions on entering the key.
Updating System Software Remotely
Your reseller can update your system software remotely by calling
your system and downloading the new version to your system. The
process takes approximately 10 to 15 minutes in a 2 x 64 kbps call.
Follow these steps to remotely upgrade your system:
54
1.
Contact your reseller to have the software update transmitted to
your system.
2.
Give the reseller your Software Update Password and the
Admin Password (if entered) for your system. These passwords
can be found on the System Info > Admin Setup > Security
screen. They are implemented to prevent unauthorized access
to your system.
3.
The reseller will place a call to your system and download the
software to your system. You will see a Remote Software
Update screen on your system. This screen will keep you
www.polycom.com
Chapter 2 - Installing the ViewStation EX
informed of the progress of your update. Do not turn your
system off during this process.
Note
The software update application will terminate if there are too many
errors on the communication line. The system you are updating will
revert back to the previous software version. If your software does
not update, try using a lower data rate.
4.
Once the software upgrade process completes, your system will
automatically restart and the main calling screen will appear. If
you have purchased an MP upgrade key for multipoint calls,
please refer to Upgrading the System for Multipoint Calls on
page 55 for instructions on entering the key.
Upgrading the System for Multipoint Calls
If you have purchased an MP upgrade key from Polycom, you can
upgrade your ViewStation EX to support multipoint calls.
For more information about making multipoint calls, please refer to
Multipoint Calls (Optional).
To enter the MP key:
1.
From the main calling screen, go to System Info>Admin
Setup>Software/Hardware>System Options.
2.
Enter your multipoint key.
When MP is enabled, the Multipoint field changes from
Disabled to Enabled.
Note
Press Select on the remote to make the keyboard appear. Your
key will be 20 characters long. Enter five characters in each box.
The cursor will move automatically to the next box as you add
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
55
ViewStation EX User Guide
characters. When you are finished, select Save and then Menu
to return to the main calling screen.
3.
56
You are now ready to place a multipoint call with your
ViewStation EX system.
www.polycom.com
3
Initial System Setup
This chapter describes the initial system configuration screens that
you see when you power on your ViewStation EX for the first time.
Topics in This Chapter
The following topics are included in this chapter.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
Topic
Description
Page
First System
Screens
This section describes the first system
screens that are displayed during the initial
out-of-box configuration.
59
Initial Setup
for IP (H.323)
Calls
This section describes the initial
IP-specific screens needed to configure
basic network settings.
64
Initial Setup
for ISDN
(H.320) Calls
This sections describes the initial screens
used to configure your ISDN connection
(V.35/RS-449/RS-530 or BRI)
68
Final
Out-of-Box
System Setup
Screens
The screens that complete the initial
configuration sequence are covered in this
section.
77
Setting up the
Firewall
This section indicates where to find the
appropriate firewall configuration
information, if you need to set up a firewall.
79
Verifying
Initial Setup
This section provides information about
placing a test call and checking network
connectivity.
80
57
ViewStation EX User Guide
Once you have powered on the ViewStation EX system, a series of
setup screens appear on your television monitor, leading you
through the initial configuration process, which is described in the
following sections.
Note
All procedures detailed in these sections must be followed in order
to minimize system failures.
For the latest information about the software on your system, refer
to your system’s Read Me First and Release Notes.
58
www.polycom.com
Chapter 3 - Initial System Setup
First System Screens
The first system screens include the following:
❑ Welcome/Language. See Selecting the Language on page 59.
❑ How to Select Menu Items. See Selecting Menu Items with the
Remote Control on page 60.
❑ System Name. See Setting up System Name and Country on
page 61.
❑ Country. See Setting up System Name and Country on page 61.
❑ Call Preference. See Setting your Call Preferences on page 62.
Selecting the Language
The first setup screen to appear on your television monitor is the
Welcome screen.
Figure 3-1. Welcome (Language) Screen
To select the language you would like to see on the
ViewStation EX system:
1.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
Press the arrow buttons on the remote control to highlight a
language.
59
ViewStation EX User Guide
2.
Then press the SELECT button on the remote control to go to the
next screen.
Note
To make selections with the remote control, aim the remote
control at the remote control IR detector or at the Clarity by
Polycom logo on the front of the system.
Selecting Menu Items with the Remote Control
The following screen explains how to select ViewStation EX items
on your television monitor. Press the SELECT button on the remote
control to proceed to the next screen.
Figure 3-2. How to Select Menu Items Screen
Tip
To return to a previous screen, press the MENU button on the
remote control or use the arrow buttons on the remote control to
highlight the Menu icon and press the SELECT button on the remote
control.
60
www.polycom.com
Chapter 3 - Initial System Setup
Setting up System Name and Country
System Name
Use the System Name screen to name your system. Naming your
system makes it easy to find your ViewStation EX on the LAN when
it is connected.
System names can be up to 34 characters in length. The first
character has to be numeric or alphabetic, including foreign
language characters.
Figure 3-3. System Name Screen
To enter the System Name, you need to access the on-screen
keyboard.
To access the on-screen keyboard:
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
1.
Press the SELECT button on the remote control.
2.
Use the arrow buttons to move around the keyboard and press
the SELECT button to select a letter.
3.
When you have finished making your entries on this screen,
review the entries for accuracy, then select the key
on the
on-screen keyboard.
4.
Highlight the Save icon and press the SELECT button on the
remote control to save the system name.
61
ViewStation EX User Guide
Country
On the Country screen, select the country in which your system is
installed.
Figure 3-4. Country Screen
Setting your Call Preferences
On the Call Preferences screen, select the types of calls you can
place:
❑ V.35/RS-449/RS-530 Video Calls or ISDN Video Calls:
•
V.35 Video Calls—This option is available when your
system is connected to a V.35/RS-449/RS-530 network.
•
ISDN Video Calls (H.320)—This option is available when
your system is connected to a BRI network.
❑ LAN/Internet Calls (H.323)—Select this option if you plan to
place IP calls.
Note
If you enable this option later (after this initial system setup),
your system resets itself automatically and takes you through
the initial setup screens described in this section. Existing
system information is not erased during this process.
62
www.polycom.com
Chapter 3 - Initial System Setup
❑ Display IP Dialing Extension—This extension is needed when
you place a call through a Gateway. When this option is
selected, the Extension field is visible in the Video Call screen.
For more information about Gateway configuration, refer to the
section Configuring the Gateway and Gatekeeper on page 96.
If the ISDN Video Calls and LAN/Internet Calls options are both
enabled on the Call Preferences screen, the following option
becomes visible:
❑ Allow H.320 and H.323 Mixed Calls— This option allows the
administrator to disable the ability to place or received mixed
multipoint calls for security reasons. For more information
about Mixed Calls, refer to Mixed Protocol Dialing.
Note
A system with a V.35 network interface does not support mixed
calls at this time.
When you have finished, review your selection, then highlight the
Save icon and press the SELECT button on the remote control.
OneDial Preferences
This screen appears if the ISDN Video Calls and LAN/Internet Calls
options are both enabled on the Call Preferences screen. The
OneDial Preferences screen lets you decide how the system will
place the call.
Under Primary Call Type Choice, select the appropriate option for
your configuration. Three options are available:
❑
ISDN—It lets you place the call using the ISDN number.
❑
IP—It lets you place the call using the IP number.
❑
Manual—This options prompts the user.
When Primary Call Type Choice is set to Manual, the user is asked to
place the call using either IP or ISDN.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
63
ViewStation EX User Guide
Initial Setup for IP (H.323) Calls
The initial IP configuration screens include the following:
❑ H.323 Setup. See Setup for IP (H.323) Calls on page 64.
❑ Gatekeeper. See Setting up a Gatekeeper on page 65.
Setup for IP (H.323) Calls
The H.323 Setup screen appears if you have previously checked the
LAN/Internet Calls (H.323) option on the previous screen (Call
Preference).
The H.323 option allows you to place video calls using IP on your
local area network (LAN) or wide area network (WAN). The H.323
Setup screen allows you to configure the H.323 name and extension
that can be used to dial your system.
Figure 3-5. H.323 Setup Screen
❑ H.323 Name when calling this system—Your system name
(previously configured in the System Name screen) is used to
initialized your H.323 name. However, you can change it on this
screen. There are no format restrictions for the H.323 name.
❑ H.323 Extension (E.164)—You can also change the extension to
a number that is easy to remember. Your administrator might
have specific names and extensions. If you have a Gatekeeper
installed on your network, other parties can call you by using
64
www.polycom.com
Chapter 3 - Initial System Setup
the H.323 name or extension. The H.323 name and extension are
registered with your Gatekeeper. The Gatekeeper directs the call
to your system IP address.
❑ Auto H.323 Dialing—This option is enabled by default to let the
system auto-detect the type of call you are placing (IP or ISDN)
based on the video number format. If this option is enabled, the
ISDN and H.323 fields are not visible on the Video Phone
screen.
❑ Display IP Dialing Extension—This option was previously
configured in the Call Preference screen. For more information,
refer to Setting your Call Preferences, on page 62.
Note
For additional information about H.323, see Configuration for IP
(H.323) Calls on page 93.
When you have finished, review your entries for accuracy, then
highlight the Save icon and press the SELECT button on the remote
control.
Setting up a Gatekeeper
Use the Gatekeeper screen to configure an IP (H.323) Gatekeeper.
For more detailed information about the Gatekeeper, refer to
Configuring the Gateway and Gatekeeper on page 96.
Note
A Gatekeeper is not required to make an IP-to-IP LAN call. In these
situations, select the Off option.
❑ H.323 Name—If you are registered with the Gatekeeper, this is
the name that can be used to call your system.
❑ H.323 Extension (E.164)—H.323 extensions are needed for
inbound calls going through a Gateway. This extension number
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
65
ViewStation EX User Guide
is associated with a specific LAN device. Incoming callers are
prompted to enter the H.323 extension to access a specific LAN
device behind the Gateway. This number may be assigned by
the telephone company or by your network administrator.
❑ Use Gatekeeper. This option can be set to Off, Specify, or Auto.
•
Off—If you do not want to access a Gatekeeper, select this
option.
•
Specify—To specify a Gatekeeper, select this option and
enter the Gatekeeper’s IP address in the Gatekeeper IP
Address field. This information is available from your
network administrator.
•
Auto—To have your system automatically find an available
Gatekeeper, select the Auto option.
❑ Gatekeeper IP Address—This address is provided by your
network administrator.
❑ Preferred alias—This is a valid number that outside systems
can use to reach your system. Your preferred alias is generally
the same number as the H.323 extension.
❑ Outbound Call Route—The Outbound Call Route via ISDN or
Gateway only affects how a system dials an ISDN (H.320) call.
All IP (H.323) calls are not affected by this option. Currently, a
system can dial an ISDN call through ISDN or Gateway as long
as it has native ISDN capability and the system is registered
with a Gatekeeper. Select the appropriate option depending on
your network configuration:
•
Gateway: Select this option if your outbound call needs to
be handled by a Gateway. This information can be obtained
from your network administrator.
•
ISDN: Select this option if your system is connected to an
ISDN line. ISDN is the default. When you dial through
ISDN, the ISDN call is made by using ISDN natively. All the
prefix or suffix on the Gateway screen are irrelevant.
When you dial through Gateway, the ISDN call is made by
using Gateway, not ISDN natively. If there is prefix or suffix
on the Gateway screen for Gateway calls, it should be
included when a call is made.
66
www.polycom.com
Chapter 3 - Initial System Setup
When you have finished, review your entry for accuracy, then
highlight the Save icon and press the SELECT button on the remote
control.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
67
ViewStation EX User Guide
Initial Setup for ISDN (H.320) Calls
If you have an ISDN connection, you will need to configure the
appropriate interface (V.35/RS-449/RS-530, or BRI). Refer to the
appropriate ISDN network interface section:
❑ V.35/RS-449/RS-530. See Setup for the V.35/RS-449/RS-530
Network Interface on page 68.
❑ BRI. See Setup for the Quad BRI Network Interface on page 74.
Setup for the V.35/RS-449/RS-530 Network Interface
If you have a V.35/RS-449/RS-530 network interface module, the
following screens are designed to help you with your
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 network configuration:
❑ Video Network. See Setting Video Network Options on
page 69.
❑ Dialing Speeds. See Selecting Dialing Speeds on page 70.
❑ Broadcast Mode. See Setting Broadcast Mode Options on
page 70.
❑ Advanced Dialing. See Setting Advanced Dialing Preferences
on page 71.
❑ Video Numbers. See Entering V.35/RS-449/RS-530 Video
Numbers on page 73.
68
www.polycom.com
Chapter 3 - Initial System Setup
Setting Video Network Options
Use the Video Network screen to set the parameters for your
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 video network.
Figure 3-6. Video Network Screen
You can set the following options on this screen:
❑ RS-366 Dialing—Enable this option if you want to call from the
system through the DCE connection to the far-end
videoconferencing system. Disable this option if you are using
your DCE to dial the call or if you have a dedicated connection
to the far site.
Note
If the RS-366 Dialing option is enabled, you need to select
Dialing Speeds on this screen (see the following Selecting
Dialing Speeds section).
❑ V.35 Ports Used—Select 1 if you are placing only 1-channel calls.
Select 1+2 if you are placing 2 x 56 Kbps or 2 x 64 Kbps channel
calls.
❑ Dialing Protocol—RS-366 appears as the dialing protocol if the
RS-366 Dialing option is enabled. If the RS-366 Dialing option
is disabled, the Dialing Protocol does not appear.
❑ Broadcast Mode—Enable or disable H.331 Broadcast Mode if
the system is connected to the network via satellite.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
69
ViewStation EX User Guide
When you have finished, highlight the Save icon and press the
SELECT button on the remote control.
Selecting Dialing Speeds
If you enabled RS-366 Dialing, select the Dialing Speeds icon in the
Video Network screen.
1.
Select the dialing speeds on this screen. The default speeds are
2 x 64 Kbps, 256 Kbps, 384 Kbps, 512 Kbps, and 768 Kbps.
2.
To add or remove speeds, scroll through the data rates and press
the SELECT button on the remote control to select your
preferred dialing speeds; a red check appears when a dialing
speed is selected.
Figure 3-7. Dialing Speeds Screen
Note
The selected dialing speeds apply only to RS-366 calls. Nx56 and
Nx64 are for H.320 calls, while IPx56 and IPx64 are for H.323 calls.
For non-dialed calls, the call speed is determined by the DCE.
Setting Broadcast Mode Options
If you enabled the Broadcast Mode option on the Video Network
screen, the Broadcast Mode Setup icon appears. Selecting this icon
takes you to the Broadcast Mode screen. For more information on
70
www.polycom.com
Chapter 3 - Initial System Setup
the Broadcast Mode screen, refer to Setting up Satellite (H.331)
Broadcast Mode on page 105.
Setting Advanced Dialing Preferences
If you enabled RS-366 Dialing, the dialing prefixes and suffixes are
set for calls from the system on the Advanced Dialing screen.
The Advanced Dialing screen lets you select the Calling Profile
associated with dialing through a DCE.
Figure 3-8. Advanced Dialing Screen
Calling profiles for several manufacturers are included in your
system.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
71
ViewStation EX User Guide
To select and modify the calling profiles:
1.
Select the Calling Profile field. The following calling profile list
appears.
Figure 3-9. Advanced Dialing Screen (Calling Profile List)
2.
Select the appropriate equipment/manufacturer from the
drop-down list and press the SELECT button on the remote
control.
3.
When you have finished, review your entry. The Prefix or Suffix
information (depending on the equipment name that you
selected) is now visible on the Advanced Dialing screen.
4.
Highlight the Save icon and press the SELECT button on the
remote control.
Note
You have to enter the information only once on the Advanced
Dialing screen. When you place a call, there is no need to enter
the prefix again—simply select the preferred dialing speed, and
your system enters the proper prefix.
Dialing Prefix and Suffix Information. Dialing prefixes are
numbers and characters that are sent to your DCE equipment before
sending the number dialed.
Dialing suffixes define the dialing speed of the DCE equipment.
This provides the users with the ability to select the dialing speed
when placing a call.
72
www.polycom.com
Chapter 3 - Initial System Setup
Prefixes and suffixes are a function of your DCE. Please consult the
DCE user guide for additional information on setting dialing
profiles.
Entering V.35/RS-449/RS-530 Video Numbers
If you enabled RS-366 Dialing, the Video Numbers screen appears.
Figure 3-10. Video Numbers Screen
To enter video numbers:
1.
Enter the numbers that other sites can dial to call your system.
2.
When you have finished, review your entry, then highlight the
Save icon and press the SELECT button on the remote control.
For additional information about V.35/RS-449/RS-530
configuration, see Advanced V.35/RS-449/RS-530 Network
Interface Configuration on page 103.
The initial configuration process specific to the V.35/RS-449/RS-530
network interface is complete. To continue with the initial
configuration process, skip to Final Out-of-Box System Setup
Screens on page 77.
Note
If you disabled RS-366 Dialing, you are operating in direct connect
mode and the Video Numbers screen will not be displayed.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
73
ViewStation EX User Guide
The initial configuration process specific to the V.35/RS-449/RS-530
network interface is complete. To continue with the initial
configuration process, skip to Final Out-of-Box System Setup
Screens on page 77.
Setup for the Quad BRI Network Interface
If you have a Quad BRI network interface connected to your system,
the following initial BRI configuration screens are displayed:
❑ ISDN Video Numbers. See Entering ISDN Video Numbers on
page 74.
❑ Auto Detect SPIDs. See Entering Service Profile Ids Manually
on page 75.
❑ ISDN Switch Protocol. See Selecting the ISDN Switch Protocol
on page 76.
Entering ISDN Video Numbers
On the ISDN Video Numbers screen, enter the area code or the STD
code and ISDN number assigned to your system. Your service
provider should have given you this number when you purchased
your ISDN line.
74
www.polycom.com
Chapter 3 - Initial System Setup
When you are finished, highlight the Save icon and press the
SELECT button on the remote control.
Figure 3-11. ISDN Video Numbers Screen
Entering Service Profile Ids Manually
On the Auto-Detect SPIDs screen, enter the Service Profile ID
numbers for your system. If you are connected to an internal phone
system (PBX), you may not need to enter SPIDs.
If the system is unable to find your SPIDs, make sure you are
connected and that you entered your ISDN numbers correctly.
Figure 3-12. Auto Detect SPIDs Screen
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
75
ViewStation EX User Guide
Selecting the ISDN Switch Protocol
Select the ISDN switch protocol according to the ISDN switch type
used with the ISDN network.
Figure 3-13. ISDN Switch Protocol Screen
Note
For more information about advanced BRI setup, see Advanced
Quad BRI Network Interface Configuration on page 111.
The initial configuration process specific to the BRI network
interface is complete. To continue with the initial configuration
process, skip to Final Out-of-Box System Setup Screens on page 77.
76
www.polycom.com
Chapter 3 - Initial System Setup
Final Out-of-Box System Setup Screens
The following screens complete the initial system configuration of
your system.
❑ Outside Line Calls. See Configuring for Outside Line Calls on
page 77.
❑ Telephone Numbers. See Adding a Telephone Number on
page 78.
❑ Administrator Password. See Setting the Administrator and
Meeting Passwords on page 78.
Configuring for Outside Line Calls
If your system is on a PBX, enter the number to dial for outside line
access on the Outside Line Calls screen.
Figure 3-14. Outside Line Calls Screen
This number is usually 9 or 0. The system automatically dials this
number before your video numbers.
Leave this screen blank if you do not need to dial a number to access
an outside line. When you have finished, highlight the Save icon
and press the SELECT button on the remote control.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
77
ViewStation EX User Guide
Adding a Telephone Number
On the Telephone Numbers screen, enter the number of the analog
telephone line that is connected to your system.
Figure 3-15. Telephone Numbers Screen
You can enter the number of another telephone in the same room as
the ViewStation EX system. When you have finished, highlight the
Save icon and press the SELECT button on the remote control.
Setting the Administrator and Meeting Passwords
This screen contains an initial administrator password, which is
your system’s serial number. It also has a meeting password that is
randomly generated.
The administrator password allows access to all the Admin Setup
screens using the user interface or the Web interface.
You can change, remove, or keep the initial password.
To change the administrator password:
1.
Highlight the password field using the remote control.
2.
Backspace over the initial password (the system’s serial
number) using the left arrow key on the remote control.
3.
When the field is empty, start entering your new password as
follows:
Enter numbers using the remote control’s keypad.
78
www.polycom.com
Chapter 3 - Initial System Setup
Enter letters and characters as directed below:
a.
Press the SELECT button on the remote control: the
on-screen keyboard appears.
b. Highlight each letter and/or character from the keyboard
using the remote control arrow keys.
c.
Select the letter or character by pressing the SELECT button
on the remote control.
d. When you are done with your selection, select the Enter key
(bottom right-most key) on the on-screen keyboard using
the remote control.
4.
Select the on-screen Save icon to save your changes.
Setting up the Firewall
If your system is behind a firewall, please refer to the appropriate
section in the Integrators’ Reference Manual for ViewStation EX,
ViewStation FX, and VS4000 to find out how to configure your
system and your router.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
79
ViewStation EX User Guide
Verifying Initial Setup
After the initial system configuration is complete, the system
returns to the main menu.
The main screen is the starting point for everything you do on the
ViewStation EX. From the main screen you can access the Video
Phone screen (by selecting the Video Call icon), the Address Book,
all the System Info screens, and the Telephone.
The following information explains how to place a test call, and how
to interpret the main screen’s network connectivity indicators.
Placing a Test Call
Once you have configured your ViewStation EX, you can place a test
call to one of the numbers that have been pre-programmed into the
Address Book of your ViewStation EX.
To place a test call:
1.
Highlight the Address Book icon on the main screen and press
the SELECT button on the remote control.
2.
Highlight the Address Book icon again and press the SELECT
button on the remote control.
3.
Use the arrow buttons on the remote control to select a location
and press the SELECT button on the remote control to place the
call.
Checking the Network Connectivity Indicators on the Main
Screen
Network connectivity indicators are also displayed on the main
screen (see the following section for more information).
80
www.polycom.com
Chapter 3 - Initial System Setup
Note
IP Address and ISDN Number. If you press down the feet on the
remote control, the IP address and/or the ISDN number of the
system appear at the bottom of the main page. This is a fast and
convenient way to view your IP address or ISDN number.
Network Line Check Indicators
Every time you power on your system, a numbered yellow indicator
appears for every network line below the Video Call icon. If it is
yellow, it indicates that the system is checking to see if the network
lines are connected.
If the indicator changes to a green up arrow, system has found the
network line.
If the indicator changes to a red down arrow, the system was unable
to find the network line. In this case, check your network connection
and verify that you entered the numbers correctly.
Figure 3-16. ViewStation EX Main Screen
ISDN Line Check Indicators
The system checks the configuration of the ISDN lines every time
you power them on. As the system confirms each line, another line
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
81
ViewStation EX User Guide
indicator appears on the ISDN check icon. Once the first ISDN line
(line 1) connects, you can make a call.
Once the check is complete, and if the ISDN lines are properly
configured, the indicator disappears. If it does not disappear, you
should check the physical connections and the configuration of the
ISDN lines.
Figure 3-17. Main Screen (showing network conditions)
Gatekeeper Status Indicators
Depending on the option selected on the Gatekeeper screen, one of
the following status indicators will appear on the main screen every
time you power on your system:
❑ Yellow Icon—The system is currently looking for the
Gatekeeper, but has not found it yet.
❑ Red Icon—The system has detected the Gatekeeper, but it is not
allowed to register with the Gatekeeper.
❑ Green Icon—The system has found the Gatekeeper and it is
registered with the Gatekeeper.
❑ No Icon—No Gatekeeper was specified or set to Off in the
Gateway & Gatekeeper screen (System Info > Admin Setup >
LAN/H.323 > H.323 > Gateway & Gatekeeper).
82
www.polycom.com
4
Advanced Configuration for
your Network Environment
In this chapter, you will find advanced network configuration
information which can be used to enhance your videoconferencing
and network environment, or to change specific options set up
during the ViewStation EX system’s initial out-of-box configuration.
Topics in This Chapter
The following topics are included in this chapter.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
Topic
Description
Page
Configuration
of the LAN
Settings
This topic explains how to configure the
LAN and Intranet settings, how to set
advanced LAN options, and how to
configure the firewall and LAN connection.
85
Configuration
for IP (H.323)
Calls
This topic contains advanced
configuration information needed to set up
your ViewStation EX for IP calls. It
describes how to configure the Gateway
and Gatekeeper information within the
frame of OneDial.
93
Configuration
for ISDN
(H.320) Calls
The advanced configuration screens for
the V.35/RS-449/RS-530 and BRI network
interfaces are explained in this topic.
103
83
ViewStation EX User Guide
84
Topic
Description
Page
Configuration
of the Global
Address Book
This topic describes how to configure the
Global Address server, Global Address
Book preferences, ISDN private numbers,
and dialing rules.
119
Configuration
for the Global
Management
System
This topic describes how to set up your
system to be managed remotely by the
Global Management System.
130
Configuring
Streaming
Preferences
This topic covers the configuration options
needed to set up your system for
streaming.
136
Configuring
SNMP
Preferences
This section contains information about
the different SNMP options.
138
Configuring
Quality of
Service
This topic contains information about type
of service and dynamic bandwidth.
140
www.polycom.com
Chapter 4 - Advanced Configuration for your Network Environment
Configuration of the LAN Settings
This section contains advanced configuration information needed to
set up the LAN options of your ViewStation EX system.
The following LAN and Intranet configuration screens are
described in detail in this section:
❑ LAN & Intranet. See Configuring LAN and Intranet Settings.
❑ LAN Settings. See Selecting Advanced LAN Settings.
❑ Firewall & LAN Connection. See Configuring Firewall and
LAN Connection Settings.
Tip
When you have finished editing the information on a screen, you
can save your changes and return to the previous screen in one of
two ways: press the MENU button on the remote control or
highlight the Menu icon and press the SELECT button on the
remote control.
Configuring LAN and Intranet Settings
The LAN & Intranet screen allows you to view LAN settings
information and to enter or modify information needed to access
your LAN.
To access the LAN & Intranet screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > LAN/H.323 > LAN/Intranet >
LAN & Intranet.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
85
ViewStation EX User Guide
Figure 4-1. LAN & Intranet Screen
On this screen, you can configure the following options:
❑ LAN Host Name—The host name is the DNS name given to
your system by the network administrator. This name can be
used in place of an IP address when dialing IP calls.
A LAN host name is required. It cannot be deleted or left blank.
When the LAN host name is changed, the system prompts the
user for a reboot.
The LAN host name follows these format rules:
•
It starts and ends with an English letter (A-a to Z-z). It is not
case sensitive.
•
It ends with an English letter (A-a to Z-z) or a number (0 to
9).
•
The characters inside the LAN host name can be English
letters, numbers, and hyphen.
•
It cannot be longer than 63 characters.
The initial LAN host name is initialized as follows during the
out-of-box setup sequence:
86
•
If the system name is a valid LAN host name (meaning that
it follows the preceding format rules), then the LAN host
name is the same as the system name.
•
If the system name is not a valid LAN host name (meaning
that it does not follow the preceding format rules), the
invalid characters are removed from the system name to
www.polycom.com
Chapter 4 - Advanced Configuration for your Network Environment
obtain a valid LAN host name. If the resulting string is
empty, the default LAN host name is Admin.
❑ WINS Resolution—WINS resolution (Windows Internet Name
Service) allows a network device name (the name of your
ViewStation EX system) to be resolved to an IP address in a
routed environment.
When this option is selected, the system sends requests to the
WINS server for WINS name resolution.
❑ DHCP—The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol allows a
server to dynamically assign IP addresses to devices on a LAN.
You can set the DHCP option to Off, Client, or Server.
•
Off: When Off is selected, the IP address, DNS servers,
default gateway, subnet mask, and WINS server
information must be entered as static addresses. These
addresses are permanent until they are manually changed.
•
Client: If your system is connected to a LAN, enable the
Client option. When this option is selected, your company’s
DHCP server automatically assigns an IP address, a DNS
server address, a default gateway, a subnet mask, and a
WINS server address. When Client is enabled, the options
IP Address, DNS Servers, Default Gateway, Subnet
Mask, and WINS Server cannot be changed.
•
Server: If you are connecting the system directly to a PC
that is not connected to the network, enable the Server
option. When this option is selected, the system’s DHCP
server can assign up to 12 IP addresses ranging from 1.1.1.3
to 1.1.1.14 to network devices on your LAN.
The Server button is visible on the LAN & Intranet screen
only if the option Allow System to be a DHCP Server has
been previously enabled in the System Info screen of the
Softupdate application.
For more information about enabling the option Allow
System to be a DHCP Server, refer to Upgrading Software
on page 45.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
87
ViewStation EX User Guide
Warning
Do not select the Server option if your system is on a LAN with
other computers. If you do, the system provides IP addresses to the
other computers on the LAN even though the LAN already has a
DHCP server. Your system administrators may have to repair any
network problems this causes.
❑ IP Address—If the DHCP Client option is selected, an IP
address is automatically assigned to the system from your
network server and you cannot make any change to this field. If
the DHCP Off option is selected, you need to enter a static IP
address for your system. The IP address can be obtained from
your network administrator or your IT department.
❑ DNS Servers—DNS servers are computers which translate
domain names (example: www.polycom.com) into IP
addresses.
If the DHCP Client option is selected, the DNS server addresses
are automatically filled in and you cannot make any change to
this field. If the DHCP Off option is selected, you need to enter
the DNS server addresses manually. These addresses can be
obtained from your network administrator or your IT
department.
❑ Default Gateway—The default Gateway is a router on the local
network. Its main task it to act as an interpreter between two
systems that do not use the same communications protocol,
data formatting, and other network functions. Your system
must go through this router to access destinations outside of its
network.
If the DHCP Client option is selected, the Default Gateway
address is automatically filled in and you cannot make any
change to this field. If the DHCP Off option is selected, you
need to enter the address manually. This information can be
obtained from your network administrator or your IT
department.
❑ Subnet Mask—A subnet mask is a number that identifies a
subnetwork so that an IP address can be shared on a local
88
www.polycom.com
Chapter 4 - Advanced Configuration for your Network Environment
network. This is the subnet mask of the LAN to which your
system is connected.
If the DHCP Client option is selected, the subnet mask address
is automatically filled in and you cannot make any change to
this field. If the DHCP Off option is selected, you need to enter
the address manually. The subnet mask can be obtained from
your network administrator or your IT department.
❑ WINS Server—This is a Windows NT computer that resolves
computer names to IP addresses in a routed environment. Find
out from your network administrator or your IT department
whether you need a WINS Server IP address or not.
Selecting Advanced LAN Settings
You can select the LAN port on your system and set or change its
LAN speed and duplex mode on the Advanced LAN Settings
screen.
To access the Advanced LAN Settings screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > LAN/H.323 > LAN/Intranet >
Advanced LAN Settings.
Figure 4-2. Advanced LAN Settings Screen
On the Advanced LAN Settings screen, you can select a LAN port
and a LAN speed as described below:
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
89
ViewStation EX User Guide
Note
Before you select a LAN speed and duplex mode, find out from your
network administrator what speed and duplex mode are supported
by the switch to which your system is connected.
❑ Select LAN Port—The ViewStation supports a LAN port and a
PC port:
•
The LAN Port option represents the LAN port on the back
of your system. This port is used to directly connect your
system to your LAN network.
•
The other port, the PC Port, can be used to connect a device
to the LAN network through your system (which, in this
case, acts as a hub), or to directly connect a device such as a
PC to a system not on the LAN network.
❑ LAN Speed—This option can be set to Auto, 10 MBps, or 100
MBps (megabits per second).
•
Auto: When this option is selected, the network switch to
which the system is connected automatically negotiates the
LAN speed and duplex mode.
•
10 MBps or 100 MBps: When one of these LAN speeds is
selected, a duplex mode must be selected (see Duplex
Mode below).
❑ Duplex Mode—This option can be set to Auto, Full, or Half.
90
•
Auto: When this option is selected, the network switch to
which the system is connected automatically negotiates the
duplex mode.
•
Full: This duplex mode allows for bi-directional,
simultaneous, two-way communications.
•
Half: This duplex mode allows for bi-directional data
transmission, but not at the same time.
www.polycom.com
Chapter 4 - Advanced Configuration for your Network Environment
Configuring Firewall and LAN Connection Settings
The Firewall & LAN Connection screen allows the LAN manager
to configure firewall options.
To access the Firewall & LAN Connection screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > LAN/H.323 > LAN/Intranet >
Firewall/LAN Connection. The following screen appears:
Figure 4-3. Firewall & LAN Connection Screen
In this screen, you can configure the following options:
❑ Use Fixed Ports—Specify the fixed ports assigned to the system
when working with a firewall. For information on port
assignments in multipoint calls, refer to Multipoint Calls and
Firewall Information on page 186.
❑ System is Behind a NAT—This option instructs the system to
use the IP address that appears in the NAT Outside (WAN)
Address field as its external IP address. When using a Virtual
Private Network (VPN) for your network connection, make
sure that System is Behind a NAT is not selected.
If your system is behind a NAT device that is not H.323 aware,
then select this option. If your system is behind an H.323-aware
NAT device, make sure the option is not selected or your system
will not be able to make and receive calls.
❑ Auto Discover NAT—When this option is selected, the system
can get its IP address from the NAT device.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
91
ViewStation EX User Guide
❑ NAT Outside (WAN) Address—Specify the external IP address
used by your NAT. If the system is unable to discover your
external IP address automatically, you can enter it here.
Note
For more information about configuring your system to operate
behind a NAT (Network Address Translation) device, refer to the
Integrators’ Reference Manual for ViewStation EX, ViewStation FX, and
VS4000.
92
www.polycom.com
Chapter 4 - Advanced Configuration for your Network Environment
Configuration for IP (H.323) Calls
This section contains advanced configuration information needed to
set up your ViewStation EX system for IP calls.
The following IP configuration screens are described in detail in this
section:
❑ H.323 Setup. See Configuration for IP (H.323) Calls.
❑ Dialing Speed. See Selecting Dialing Speeds.
❑ Gateway & Gatekeeper. See Setting the Gateway and
Gatekeeper.
❑ Gateway Number. See Configuring the Gateway Number.
❑ Gateway. See Selecting your Gateway Prefix and Suffix.
To access the system’s IP (H.323) configuration screens:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > LAN/H.323.
Note
When your IP configuration is complete, you may want to place a
test call. For information about placing a call, refer to Video Calls on
page 148.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
93
ViewStation EX User Guide
Configuring H.323 Name and Extension
The H.323 name and extension that can be used to dial your system
are configured in the H.323 Setup screen.
To access the H.323 Setup configuration screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > LAN/H.323 > H.323 > Setup.
The H.323 Setup screen appears.
Figure 4-4. H.323 Setup Screen (configuration)
Following is a description of the options displayed on the screen:
❑ H.323 Name when calling this system—Your system name
appears as your H.323 name, but you can change it on this
screen.
❑ H.323 Extension (E.164)—This is the number that is needed to
access a specific LAN device for incoming calls. You can change
the extension to a number that is easy to remember. Your
administrator might have specific names and extensions. If you
have a Gatekeeper installed on your network, other parties can
call you by using the H.323 name or extension. The H.323 name
and extension are registered with your Gatekeeper.
❑ Auto H.323 Dialing—When this option is enabled, the system
is able to automatically detect the type of call you are placing (IP
or ISDN) based on the video number format. Consequently, the
ISDN (or V.35) and IP fields are not visible on the Video Phone
screen. This option is enabled by default.
94
www.polycom.com
Chapter 4 - Advanced Configuration for your Network Environment
❑ Display IP Dialing Extension—This extension is needed when
placing a call through a Gateway. When this option is selected,
the Extension field is visible in the Video Phone screen.
Note
It is a good idea to consult your network administrators before
changing your H.323 name and extension; they might have
specific names and extensions they want you to use.
Selecting Dialing Speeds
The Dialing Speeds lets you limit the choices that appear as speed
selections. Offering a minimum number of speeds is a way to lower
network traffic. The speeds that are selected in this screen will be
displayed as dialing speed selections in the Video Phone and in the
Address Book screens.
To access the Dialing Speeds screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > LAN/H.323 > H.323 > Dialing
Speeds. The Dialing Speeds screen appears.
Figure 4-5. Dialing Speeds Screen
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
95
ViewStation EX User Guide
To select dialing speeds:
1.
Choose the appropriate dialing speeds. The default dialing
speeds are 2 x 64 Kbps, 128 Kbps, 256 Kbps, 384 Kbps, 512 Kbps,
and 768 Kbps.
2.
To add or remove speeds, scroll through the data rates and
press the SELECT button on the remote control to select your
preferred dialing speeds; a red check appears when a dialing
speed is selected.
The Nx56 and Nx64 columns list the dialing speeds available for
ISDN calls.
The IPx56 and IPx64 columns list the dialing speeds available
for IP calls.
Configuring the Gateway and Gatekeeper
Overview
Gateway and Gatekeeper settings are configured in several screens:
❑ Gateway & Gatekeeper. See Setting the Gateway and
Gatekeeper.
❑ Gateway Number. See Configuring the Gateway Number.
❑ Gateway. See Selecting your Gateway Prefix and Suffix.
These screens let users enter advanced Gateway and Gatekeeper
information that is part of Polycom OneDial, a Polycom-proprietary
feature.
Note
The configuration screens described in this section require an
excellent understanding of Gateways and Gatekeepers. Configuring
these options should be best handled by knowledgeable network
administrators. Additionally, configuring settings in this screen has
no effect if you are not using a Gatekeeper or Gateway.
96
www.polycom.com
Chapter 4 - Advanced Configuration for your Network Environment
A Gatekeeper is a “network administrator” that supervises the
network traffic going through it. It manages functions such as
address resolution, bandwidth control, admission control, etc. If
your system is not registered with a Gatekeeper, it may not be
authorized to place IP calls. In particular, the Gatekeeper provides
address translation between aliases and IP addresses, allowing
users to maintain the same telephone numbers or alias addresses
regardless of changes to their network addresses.
A Gateway is a node on two networks that connects two otherwise
incompatible networks. It usually performs code and protocol
conversion processes. In short, it translates between IP and ISDN
protocols.
About Polycom OneDial
Polycom OneDial greatly simplifies videoconferencing dialing by
taking care of a number of dialing and network processes in the
background. All the user has to do is select a name in the Address
Book directory or enter the simplified phone number to initiate a
call. This name hides complex configuration information and
processes: for example, complicated numbers, prefixes, codes,
network choices (IP or ISDN) and gateway and gatekeeper
operations. OneDial also takes care of bandwidth renegotiation
(downspeeding), alternate routing (if IP routing does not work,
OneDial will attempt to do ISDN), and Conference on Demand™.
OneDial lets users from any video endpoint create instant
multipoint conferences without network administrator or IT
assistance by clicking a name in the Address Book. This service is
provided by a combination of Polycom’s products PathNavigator™
(a call processing server) and the MGC-110 or MGC-50 (multipoint
control unit).
OneDial is part of PathNavigator, a call processing server that
performs Gateway, Gatekeeper, and name resolution operations in
the background.
For more in-depth descriptions and configuration information
about OneDial and PathNavigator, refer to the Integrators’ Reference
Manual for ViewStation EX, ViewStation FX, and VS4000.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
97
ViewStation EX User Guide
Setting the Gateway and Gatekeeper
The Gateway & Gatekeeper screen allows you to enter advanced
H.323 information, a Gatekeeper IP address if needed, and select a
route for your outbound calls.
To access the Gateway & Gatekeeper screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > LAN/H.323 > H.323 >
Gateway & Gatekeeper.
Changes made in the Gateway & Gatekeeper screen will cause the
system to automatically reset itself in order to enable the new
configuration and properly register with the Gatekeeper.
Figure 4-6. Gateway & Gatekeeper Screen
On this screen, you can set the following options:
❑ H.323 Name—If you are registered with the Gatekeeper, this is
the name that can be used to call your system.
❑ H.323 Extension (E.164)—H.323 extensions are needed for
inbound calls going through a Gateway. This extension number
is associated with a specific LAN device. Incoming callers are
prompted to enter the H.323 extension to access a specific LAN
device behind the Gateway. This number may be assigned by
the telephone company or by your network administrator.
❑ Use Gatekeeper—The options are Off, Specify, and Auto.
•
98
Off: If you do not want to access a Gatekeeper, select the
Off option.
www.polycom.com
Chapter 4 - Advanced Configuration for your Network Environment
Note
A Gatekeeper is not required to make IP-to-IP LAN calls. In
these situations, select the Off option.
•
Specify: To specify a Gatekeeper, select the Specify option
and enter the Gatekeeper’s IP address or name (for
example, gatekeeper.companyname.usa.com) in the
Gatekeeper’s IP Address field. This information is
available from your network administrator.
•
Auto: To have system automatically find an available
Gatekeeper, select the Auto option.
❑ Gatekeeper IP Address—If you have selected Specify under
Use Gatekeeper, enter the Gatekeeper’s IP address or name in
this field.
❑ Outbound Call Route—The Outbound Call Route via ISDN or
Gateway only affects how a system dials an ISDN (H.320) call.
All IP (H.323) calls are not affected by this option.
Currently, a system can dial an ISDN call through ISDN or
Gateway as long as it has native ISDN capability and the system
is registered with a Gatekeeper. Select the appropriate option
depending on your network configuration:
•
Gateway: Select this option if your outbound call needs to
be handled by a Gateway. This information can be obtained
from your network administrator.
•
ISDN: Select this option if your system is connected to an
ISDN line. ISDN is the default.
When you dial through ISDN, the ISDN call is made by using
ISDN natively. All the prefix or suffix on the Gateway screen
are irrelevant.
When you dial through Gateway, the ISDN call is made by
using Gateway, not ISDN natively. If there is prefix or suffix on
the Gateway screen for Gateway calls, it should be included
when a call is made.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
99
ViewStation EX User Guide
Configuring the Gateway Number
The Gateway Number screen allows users to enter advanced IP
information that is part of Polycom OneDial. For more information
about OneDial, refer to About Polycom OneDial, on page 97.
To access the Gateway Number screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > LAN/H.323 > H.323 >
Gateway > Gateway Number. The Gateway Number screen
appears.
Figure 4-7. Gateway Number Screen
On this screen, you can configure the following options:
❑ Gateway Number Type
100
•
Direct Inward Dial (DID): DID allows a caller outside a
company to call an internal extension without having to go
through an operator. When using DID, the number of digits
in the DID is that portion of the full DID that the Gateway
will be given from the ISDN service provider as the Called
Party Line Identifier. This, in turn, will be passed to the
Gatekeeper for address resolution. The endpoint needs to
register this portion of the DID as an E.164 alias with the
Gatekeeper in order for this to work.
•
Number + Extension: If enabled, this option allows the call
to go through directly (it dials the Gateway number + ## +
Extension as one number).
www.polycom.com
Chapter 4 - Advanced Configuration for your Network Environment
❑ Gateway Number—This is the number that is used by the
outside world (WAN) to access your LAN. To access a specific
device on the LAN, the Gateway Number needs an H.323
extension (described in Setting the Gateway and Gatekeeper, on
page 98). Enter the Country Code, Area Code, and Number
information.
❑ Number of digits in DID number—This is determined by your
network administrator.
❑ Number of digits in extension—This is determined by your
network administrator.
Selecting your Gateway Prefix and Suffix
The Gateway screen allows users to enter advanced Gateway
information that is part of the Polycom OneDial feature. For more
information about OneDial, refer to About Polycom OneDial, on
page 97.
To access the Gateway screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > LAN/H.323 > H.323 >
Gateway (page 2). The Gateway screen appears:
Figure 4-8. Gateway Screen
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
101
ViewStation EX User Guide
You can configure the prefix or suffix that is sent to the Gatekeeper.
The prefix identifies which Gateway is used to dial a call at a
particular data rate. The Gatekeeper then directs the call to the
Gateway that is identified with a prefix.
For example, the system inserts the prefix “90” before the number
when dialing a 256 Kbps Gateway call. The prefix tells the
Gatekeeper which Gateway to use to dial the 256 Kbps call.
To determine the appropriate codes for the call speeds, consult your
Gateway instruction manual. These codes are programmed into the
Gateway and Gatekeeper.
Note
This information should be configured by a knowledgeable network
administrator.
102
www.polycom.com
Chapter 4 - Advanced Configuration for your Network Environment
Configuration for ISDN (H.320) Calls
This section contains advanced ISDN configuration information for
the V.35/RS-449/RS-530 and BRI network interfaces. The
information displayed on the various ISDN configuration screens
varies according to the network interface that is attached to your
ViewStation EX system.
The configuration information is divided into:
❑ Advanced V.35/RS-449/RS-530 Network Interface
Configuration
❑ Advanced Quad BRI Network Interface Configuration
Once your ISDN configuration is complete, you may want to place
a test call. For information about placing a call, refer to Video Calls
on page 148.
Advanced V.35/RS-449/RS-530 Network Interface
Configuration
This section describes information and settings for the following
advanced V.35/RS-449/RS-530 configuration screensR:
❑ Advanced V.35 (Setup). See Configuring the
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 Serial Interface Control Signals, on page
104.
❑ Broadcast Mode. See Setting up Satellite (H.331) Broadcast
Mode, on page 105.
❑ Dialing Speeds. See Selecting Dialing Speeds, on page 106.
❑ Advanced Dialing (Calling Profile, Prefix, Suffix). See Setting
the Calling Profile, on page 108.
❑ Crypto Resync Pulse. See Enabling Crypto Resync on page 110.
Notes
The V.35/RS-449/RS-530 network interface supports the V.35,
RS-449, or RS-530 protocol depending on the cable you use to
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
103
ViewStation EX User Guide
connect your equipment to the network interface.
For information about the initial V.35/RS-449/RS-530
configuration screens, see Setup for the V.35/RS-449/RS-530
Network Interface on page 68.
Configuring the V.35/RS-449/RS-530 Serial Interface Control Signals
The ViewStation EX is designed to be compatible with the tested
network equipment without any modification needed. However, if
your network equipment varies from the conventional
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 video implementations, use the Advanced
V.35 screen to adjust the operation of many of the signals.
To access this screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > Video Network > Advanced
V.35.
Figure 4-9. Advanced V.35 Screen
The default setting for these signals is Normal. To invert these
signals, select Inverted.
Note
For more detailed information about serial interface control signals,
to the Integrators’ Reference Manual for ViewStation EX, ViewStation
FX, and VS4000.
104
www.polycom.com
Chapter 4 - Advanced Configuration for your Network Environment
Direct Connect
The following information applies only to V.35 Direct Connect
setups.
Direct Connect users can choose to have the local system answer a
video call when it detects data from a remote site, or hang up when
it detects lack of data from the remote site. This Direct Connect
signal lead would be in addition to existing V.35 signal leads that
control answer/hang up call states. A description of the use of these
signals can be found in the Integrators’ Reference Manual for
ViewStation EX, ViewStation FX, and VS4000.
Setting up Satellite (H.331) Broadcast Mode
The ViewStation EX with a V.35/RS-449/RS-530 network interface
support H.331 broadcast mode for broadcast transmissions via
satellite. In this mode, your system sends and receives audio and
video without handshaking with the far-site system or
H.331-compatible systems.
One system can send video and audio to many systems or other
H.331-compatible systems, such as large satellite network.
Broadcast configuration parameters should be set to accommodate
the lowest common denominator of the systems which are receiving
the broadcast. For example, if one system in the conference supports
H.261 only, broadcast should be set to H.261 to ensure all systems
participate in the conference.
To access the Broadcast Mode screen:
1.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
Enable Broadcast Mode Setup in the Video Network screen
(System Info > Admin Setup > Video Network > Video
Network). The Broadcast Mode Setup satellite icon appears.
105
ViewStation EX User Guide
2.
Select the Broadcast Mode Setup icon to access the Broadcast
Mode configuration screen.
Figure 4-10. Video Network Screen and Broadcast Mode Screens
On the Broadcast Mode screen, you can set the following video
and audio preferences:
❑ Video Format—Select QCIF to transmit Quarter Common
Interchange Format (176 x 144 resolution). Select FCIF to
transmit FCIF (Full CIF 352 x 288 resolution)
❑ Video Protocol—Select H.261 to transmit video using the H.261
video standard. Select H.263 to transmit video using the H.263
enhanced video algorithm. Far-end systems that support H.263
receive H.263.
❑ Audio Mode—Select the preferred audio protocol to transmit
audio: G.728, G.711u, G.711A, G.722-56, G.722-48, or Off.
❑ Frame Rate—Select the preferred video frame rate for the
broadcast transmission: 30 fps, 15 fps, 10 fps, or 7.5 fps.
Selecting Dialing Speeds
This screen lets you limit the choices that appear as speed selections.
Offering a minimum number of speeds is a way to lower network
traffic. The speeds that are selected in this screen will be displayed
as dialing speed selections in the Video Phone and in the Address
Book screens.
106
www.polycom.com
Chapter 4 - Advanced Configuration for your Network Environment
To select dialing speeds:
1.
Enable RS-366 Dialing on the Video Network screen (System
Info > Admin Setup > Video Network > Video Network).
2.
Select Dialing Speeds. Choose the appropriate dialing speeds
on the Dialing Speeds screen.
The default dialing speeds are 2 x 64 Kbps, 128 Kbps, 256 Kbps,
384 Kbps, 512 Kbps, and 768 Kbps.
3.
To add or remove speeds, scroll through the data rates and
press the SELECT button on the remote control to select your
preferred dialing speeds; a red check appears when a dialing
speed is selected.
The selected dialing speeds apply only to RS-366 calls.
The Nx56 and Nx64 columns list the dialing speeds available for
ISDN calls.
The IPx56 and IPx64 columns list the dialing speeds available
for IP calls.
For non-dialed calls, the call speed is determined by the DCE.
Figure 4-11. Dialing Speeds Screen
Note
A V.35/RS-449/RS-530 system cannot receive an inbound call from
a non-V.35/RS-449/RS-530 system at an n x 56 k common speed.
Common speeds are speeds that are divisible by both 56 and 64.
These include 8 x 56k (448 or 7 x 64), 16 x 56k (896 or 14 x 64), and 24
x 56k (1344 or 21 x 64). Because a V.35/RS-449/RS-530 system
cannot determine how bandwidth is allocated–it only receives the
total clock speed–it does not know how these “common speed”
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
107
ViewStation EX User Guide
connections are supposed to be established. This causes problems
when a non-V.35/RS-449/RS-530 system calls a
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 system at one of these n x 56k common speeds
(the connection is not established correctly).
Setting the Calling Profile
The Advanced Dialing screen lets you set or modify your calling
profile. Calling profiles for several manufacturers are included in
the ViewStation EX system.
If you enabled RS-366 Dialing, you need to set the dialing prefixes
and suffixes associated with dialing through your particular DCE
equipment and your system.
Dialing prefixes are numbers and characters that are sent to your
DCE equipment before sending the number dialed.
Dialing suffixes are numbers and characters that are sent to your
DCE equipment after the number is dialed.
Prefixes and suffixes are used to tell your DCE equipment at what
speed to dial the call. Users have only to select the dialing speed
when they place a call.
Note
Prefixes and suffixes are a function of your DCE. Please consult the
DCE user guide for additional information on setting dialing
profiles.
To set or modify the calling profile:
108
1.
Make sure that RS-366 Dialing is enabled on the Video
Network screen (System Info > Admin Setup > Video
Network).
2.
On the Video Network screen, select Advanced Dialing.
The Advanced Dialing screen appears. This screen lets you
www.polycom.com
Chapter 4 - Advanced Configuration for your Network Environment
select or modify the Calling Profile associated with dialing
through a DCE.
Figure 4-12. Advanced Dialing Screen (Page 1)
3.
Select the Calling Profile field if you select or modify your
Calling Profile associated with dialing through your DCE. The
following calling profile list appears.
Figure 4-13. Advanced Dialing Screen (Calling Profile List)
4.
Select the appropriate equipment/manufacturer from the
drop-down list and press the SELECT button on the remote
control.
5.
When you have finished, review your entry. The Prefix or Suffix
information (depending on the equipment name that you
selected) is now visible on the Advanced Dialing screen.
Note
You have to enter this information only once on the Advanced
Dialing screen. When you place a call, there is no need to enter the
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
109
ViewStation EX User Guide
prefix again; simply select the preferred dialing speed and the
system enters the proper prefix.
Enabling Crypto Resync
If a cryptographic encoder/decoder is connected between the
ViewStation EX system and the network, it may require a
resynchronization signal from the ViewStation EX system. This is a
signal indicating that the ViewStation EX system has lost video
synchronization due to a network problem and requires that the
cryptographic encoder/decoder resync with the equipment at the
other end of the connection.
To access the Crypto Resync Pulse screen:
1.
Select System Info > Admin Setup > Security.
2.
In the Security screen, select the Crypto Resync option.The
Crypto Resync Pulse screen appears.
Figure 4-14. Crypto Resync Pulse Screen
You can configure the following options on this screen:
❑ Crypto Resync—This option is Off by default. To enable
Crypto Resync, select On.
❑ Time Between Pulses (sec)—This option lets you set the time
between pulses (in seconds).
110
www.polycom.com
Chapter 4 - Advanced Configuration for your Network Environment
❑ Pulse Width (millisec)—This option lets you set the pulse
width (in milliseconds).
If the system is in a call, and it loses H.320 synchronization, it
continuously sends the resynchronization pulses at the specified
rate with the specified pulse width until H.320 regains
synchronization.
The resync pulse is output on the RTS signal. If this feature is
enabled, the RTS signal no longer functions as the Ready-To-Send
signal.
Most installations that use encryption equipment require a custom
cable. The cable should be designed to route the RTS signal from the
system to the appropriate resync input on the encryption
equipment. The encryption equipment can get its RTS input from
the system’s DTR output or by wiring this input to an always-high
tie-off. In this non-dialed mode, the DTR output and RTS output act
exactly the same.
Note
Refer to Integrators’ Reference Manual for ViewStation EX, ViewStation
FX, and VS4000 for more information on these signals.
Advanced Quad BRI Network Interface Configuration
This section describes information and settings for a series of BRI
advanced configuration screens. These BRI configuration screens
are:
❑ ISDN Video Numbers. See Entering ISDN Video Numbers, on
page 112.
❑ Auto Detect Speed. See Entering or Detecting Service Profile
Ids, on page 113.
❑ Audio Quality Preference. See Setting Audio Quality
Preference, on page 114.
❑ Advanced Dialing. See Setting Channel Dialing Preferences, on
page 115.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
111
ViewStation EX User Guide
❑ Dialing Speeds. See Selecting Dialing Speeds, on page 116.
❑ ISDN Video Network. See Modifying ISDN Video Network
Information, on page 117.
Note
For information about the initial BRI configuration screen, see Setup
for the Quad BRI Network Interface on page 74.
Entering ISDN Video Numbers
Use the ISDN Video Number screen if you need to change the area
code and ISDN (BRI) video numbers that you previously set up
during the out-of-box configuration.
To access the ISDN Video Numbers screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > Video Network > IMUX >
Numbers. The ISDN Video Numbers screen appears.
Figure 4-15. ISDN Video Numbers Screen
Your service provider should have given you these numbers when
you purchased the ISDN line.
112
www.polycom.com
Chapter 4 - Advanced Configuration for your Network Environment
To enter information on this screen:
1.
Press the arrow buttons on the remote control to move between
fields on the screen.
2.
Use the numeric keypad on the remote control to enter numbers
in a highlighted field. To enter a dot, press the right arrow
button on the remote control.
3.
Highlight the Save icon and press the SELECT button on the
remote control.
Entering or Detecting Service Profile Ids
The Service Profile Ids (SPIDs) can be configured manually or
automatically detected by the system using the Auto Detect SPIDs
screen.
To access the Auto Detect SPIDs screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > Video Network > IMUX >
SPIDS. The Auto Detect SPIDs screen appears.
Figure 4-16. Auto Detect SPIDs Screen
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
113
ViewStation EX User Guide
Note
This screen appears only if you selected United States or Canada as
your country on the country screen.
Entering the SPIDs manually. The SPIDs obtained from your
network service provider can be entered manually on the Auto
Detect SPIDs screen. If you are behind an internal phone system
(PBX), you may not need to enter SPIDs.
Automatically detecting the SPIDs. If you do not have any SPID
numbers, highlight the Start icon to have your system try to detect
them automatically. This initiates a process that automatically
detects the SPID numbers associated with your ISDN line. This
process can take as long as ten minutes, but will usually require
three minutes or less. If you are behind a PBX, select the PBX icon.
Your system will try to locate the SPID numbers within the PBX.
If your system is unable to find your SPIDs, make sure that you are
properly connected and that you have entered your ISDN numbers
correctly.
Setting Audio Quality Preference
In most cases, the default setting identified during the initial system
setup will be adequate for quality audio. However, the settings can
be changed based on specific bandwidth requirement in the Audio
Quality Preference screen.
The Audio Quality Preference screen lets you set the call speed
threshold that determines which audio protocol is used. At the
selected speed or lower, the system uses the G.728 audio protocol.
Above the selected speed, the system uses the G.722 audio protocol.
G.722 audio delivers higher quality audio, but uses 48 Kbps of the
video bandwidth. G.728 delivers telephone quality audio and uses
only 16 Kbps of the video bandwidth.
114
www.polycom.com
Chapter 4 - Advanced Configuration for your Network Environment
Note
For more information about the G.728, G.722, and G.722.1 audio
protocols, refer to Video and Audio Information in the Integrators’
Reference Manual for ViewStation EX, ViewStation FX, and VS4000.
To access the Audio Quality Preference screen:
Select System Admin > Admin Setup > Video Network > IMUX >
Audio Quality.
To set your Audio Quality Preference:
Use the + and - buttons on the remote control to move the slider.
Changing the audio bars has no effect during an H.320 call. Note
that this screen is not accessible during an IP (H.323) call.
Figure 4-17. Audio Quality Preference Screen
Setting Channel Dialing Preferences
On this screen, you can choose how the ViewStation EX system will
dial its channels. Channels can be dialed in parallel or one at a time.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
115
ViewStation EX User Guide
To access the Advanced Dialing screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > Video Network > IMUX >
Advanced Dialing.
Figure 4-18. Advanced Dialing Screen
Select one of the following two options:
❑ Dial channels in parallel—All ISDN channels are dialed
simultaneously. This is the default setting.
❑ Dial channels one a a time—Each ISDN channel is dialed after
the previous channels has connected. Use this option if your
network has problems dialing all the channels in parallel.
Selecting Dialing Speeds
The Dialing Speeds lets you limit the choices that appear as speed
selections. Offering a minimum number of speeds is a way to lower
network traffic. The speeds that are selected in this screen will be
displayed as dialing speed selections in the Video Phone and in the
Address Book.
116
www.polycom.com
Chapter 4 - Advanced Configuration for your Network Environment
To access the Dialing Speeds screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > Video Network > IMUX >
Dialing Speeds.
Figure 4-19. Dialing Speeds Screen
The Nx56 and Nx64 columns list the dialing speeds available for
ISDN calls.
The IPx56 and IPx64 columns list the dialing speeds available for IP
calls.
To select dialing speeds:
1.
Choose the appropriate dialing speeds.The default dialing
speeds are 2 x 64 Kbps, 128 Kbps, 256 Kbps, 384 Kbps, 512 Kbps,
and 768 Kbps.
2.
To add or remove speeds, scroll through the data rates and
press the SELECT button on the remote control to select your
preferred dialing speeds; a red check appears when a dialing
speed is selected.
Modifying ISDN Video Network Information
This screen allows you to modify the basic ISDN (BRI) options that
were configured during the initial setup (see Setup for the Quad BRI
Network Interface on page 74). These options are:
❑ Country Code—The Country Code is associated with the
country where the ViewStation EX is used.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
117
ViewStation EX User Guide
❑ Area Code—This is the area code or STD code used in the area
where the system is located.
❑ Number A—This is the primary ISDN number assigned to the
system.
❑ Number B—This is the secondary ISDN number assigned to the
system.
❑ ISDN Switch Protocol—Select the appropriate ISDN switch
protocols. Contact the ISDN provider to determine the ISDN
switch protocol.
❑ ISDN Number Prefix—This prefix is used to access an outside
line if the system is behind a PBX.
118
www.polycom.com
Chapter 4 - Advanced Configuration for your Network Environment
Configuration of the Global Address Book
Overview
This section describes how to configure the Global Address Book
(GAB) on the ViewStation EX system.
Note
To use the GAB features, your organization must use Polycom
Global Management System (GMS) software.
The Global Address Book configuration screens are accessible from
the Global Address Book screen (System Info > Admin Setup >
LAN/H.323 > Global Address). These screens are:
❑ Global Address (Server). See Configuring Settings for the
Global Address Book Server, on page 120.
❑ Global Address Book Preferences and Advanced Address
Book Preferences. See Setting the Global Address Book
Preferences, on page 121 and Selecting the Call Type Order for
OneDial Address Book Entries, on page 124.
The following screens are also available if you have a
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 or BRI network interface attached to your the
system.
❑ Dialing Rules 1. See Establishing Dialing Rules, on page 125.
❑ Dialing Rules 2. See Establishing Dialing Rules, on page 125.
The following screen is specific to a system with a Quad BRI
network interface:
❑ Private Network Number. See Entering the Private Network
Number, on page 125.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
119
ViewStation EX User Guide
About the Global Address Book
The Global Address Book provides real-time directory services to let
your system dial other ViewStation systems on your network, and
other videoconferencing systems. The Global Address Book
performs the following:
❑ Register systems automatically to the GAB server when they are
powered up.
❑ Manage Address Book entries (dynamic and static addresses).
❑ Manage multiple Address Books.
❑ Support in-country and international dialing rules.
❑ Support ISDN and IP dialing.
The Global Address Book is part of the Global Management System
(GMS). The GMS enables widespread deployment of conferencing
systems by providing easy-to-use, centralized management,
monitoring, and directory services to geographically distributed
Polycom conferencing systems. For more information about the
GMS, refer to the Integrators’ Reference Manual for ViewStation EX,
ViewStation FX, and VS4000.
Configuring Settings for the Global Address Book Server
The Global Address screen allows you to enter the Global Address
Book Server’s IP address and its password. It also lets you
determine whether of not you want to use Global Addresses or
register the system each time it is powered on.
To access the Global Address (Server) screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > LAN/H.323 > Global Address
> Server.
120
www.polycom.com
Chapter 4 - Advanced Configuration for your Network Environment
Figure 4-20. Global Address (Server) Screen
You can configure the following GAB server options on this screen:
❑ Server IP Address—Enter the IP address of the GAB server.
❑ Server Password—Enter the GAB server password, if there is
one.
❑ Global Directory Server Version—This displays the current
version of the Global Directory.
❑ Display Global Addresses—When you enable this option,
global addresses appear in the system’s Address Book.
❑ Register this System When Powered On—When you enable
this option, the system's IP address appears in the GAB when
the system registers with it. If you do not enable this option, the
system has access to the GAB, but does not appear in the Global
Address Books of other systems.
Setting the Global Address Book Preferences
The GAB display and dialing options available on this screen are
determined by the call type options and the Use Gatekeeper option
that you have previously enabled on the Call Preference and
Gateway & Gatekeeper screens respectively.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
121
ViewStation EX User Guide
To access the Global Address Book Preferences screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > LAN/H.323 > Global Address
> Preferences.
Figure 4-21. Global Address Book Preferences Screen (for IP and ISDN Calls)
❑ Show Addresses in Address Book—This option lets you enable
the types of video numbers you want to see in your Global
Address Book. Only call type options that you enabled on the
Call Preference screen (ISDN Video Calls, LAN/Internet
Calls) appear on this screen.
This screen will also display the Gateway Calls option if you
have previously enabled the Use Gatekeeper option in the
Gateway & Gatekeeper screen.
When you enable the LAN/Internet Calls (H.323) option, IP
addresses appear in the system’s Address Book.
❑ Maximum Line Speed for Global Addresses—You can set the
line speed for each type of call you enabled in the Call
Preference screen. Depending on your selection in the Call
Preference screen, some or all of the following options are
displayed on this screen:
•
ISDN Video Calls
•
International ISDN Calls
•
LAN/Internet Calls
Gateway Calls is also displayed if you have previously enabled
the Use Gatekeeper option in the Gateway & Gatekeeper
screen.
122
www.polycom.com
Chapter 4 - Advanced Configuration for your Network Environment
The speeds you select affect only Global Address Book entries
in the system’s Address Book.
❑ Preferred Alias (E.164)—This option is only available if you
have registered your system with a Gatekeeper and the Global
Address Book server. Select this field to access the Preferred
Alias screen. See Selecting your Preferred Alias below.
Selecting your Preferred Alias
All the available options on this screen are valid numbers that
outside systems can use to reach your ViewStation EX system. Select
the number that you would like to register with the Global Directory
Service.
To access the Preferred Alias screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > LAN/H.323 > Global Address
> Preferences > Preferred Alias (E.164).
The options visible on the screen depend on the Gateway Number
Type that you have previously selected on the Gateway Number
screen.
❑ If DID is the Gateway Number Type that you selected on the
Gateway Number screen, then the possible Preferred Alias
options are:
•
ISDN Number (if the system has ISDN natively)
•
Full DID Number
•
DID Number Provided by Switch
•
DID Extension
•
H.323 Extension
Note
For more information about DID, refer to Configuring the Gateway
Number, on page 100.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
123
ViewStation EX User Guide
❑ If Number + Extension is the Gateway Number Type that you
selected on the Gateway Number screen, then the possible
Preferred Alias options are:
•
ISDN Number (if the system has ISDN natively)
•
H.323 Extension
Selecting the Call Type Order for OneDial Address Book
Entries
The Advanced Address Book Preferences screen lets you select the
order of the call types (IP or ISDN) to use when you dial OneDial
Address Book entries which contain both IP and ISDN numbers. For
more information about OneDial, refer to Configuring the Gateway
and Gatekeeper, on page 96.
To access the Advanced Address Book Preferences screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > LAN/H.323 > Global Address
> Preferences> Advanced Preferences.
Two choices are available:
❑ Primary Call Type Choice—This option sets which call type the
system will try first when dialing a site (which can be reached
via IP and ISDN) from the Address Book. The choice can be
ISDN or IP.
It is automatically reset to Manual if the setting matches that of
the Secondary Call Type Choice. If both ISDN and
LAN/Intranet are enabled, ISDN is the default.
If a call cannot be established using the primary call type, the
system will use the secondary call type to automatically attempt
to reconnect.
❑ Secondary Call Type Choice—This option sets which call type
the system will try second when dialing a site (which can be
reached via IP and ISDN) from the Address Book. The choice
can be ISDN, IP, or None. It is automatically reset to None if the
setting matches that of the Primary Call Type Choice. If both
ISDN and LAN/Intranet are enabled, IP is the default.
124
www.polycom.com
Chapter 4 - Advanced Configuration for your Network Environment
Entering the Private Network Number
The Private Network ISDN (or PRI) Number provides a second
number that can be used to call the ViewStation EX system (for
example, the company’s PBX has two different lines coming from
different network providers). It provides the correct numbers to the
caller for the additional lines needed after the connection of the first
line.
The Private Network Number can also be used to tell the PBX that
additional calls should be routed internally within the PBX instead
of going outside the PBX through the trunk line. In other words, the
Private Network Number can be used as a “fake” number which the
PBX handles as an internal number.
To access the Private Network ISDN (or PRI) Number screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > LAN/H.323 > Global Address
> Private Net.
This screen is only accessible if a BRI network interface is attached
to the system. The private number is generally obtained from the IT
manager or the network administrator.
Note
Some PBXs always signal the same called number independent of
which number was used to call an endpoint. The private number
method might fail in this situation.
Establishing Dialing Rules
Dialing Rules 1
ViewStation EX numbers are automatically normalized for the
address books of other ViewStation EX systems: Global Dial takes
into account the numbers, area codes (or city codes), country codes,
and international dialing access codes for systems that are placing
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
125
ViewStation EX User Guide
and receiving calls. For example, if you live in Paris, your system’s
number appears correctly in the address books of a system in Paris,
a system in Sydney, a system in New York, and a system in Cape
Town.
However, if your system is on your organization’s private network
as well as a public network, you might have to add additional
information that can help the Global Address Book (GAB) decide
how you call other systems on or off your private network. If your
system uses only a public network, you do not need to enter
anything in this screen.
The Global Address Book uses the following dialing rules when
calling a public network or a private network.
Table 4-1. Dialing rules used by the Global Address Book
Call From
Call To
Type of Call Placed
Public Network
Public Network
Public Network
Public Network
Private Network
Public Network
Private Network
Public Network
Public Network
Private Network
Private Network
Private Network
These rules will be used by your Global Address Book server to
provide your Address Book with the correct numbers to dial any
site that is registered with your GAB. They are configured on the
Dialing Rules 1 screen.
To access the Dialing Rules 1 screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > LAN/H.323 > Global Address
> Dialing Rules 1.
126
www.polycom.com
Chapter 4 - Advanced Configuration for your Network Environment
Figure 4-22. Dialing Rules 1 Screen
You can configure the following network dialing rules:
❑ Number of digits in Extension—Set the number of digits in
your dialing extension. This usually applies to systems that are
on a PBX. Sites that dial your system with the same area code (or
city code) and prefix dial use only your extension number. For
example, if your system’s number is 1 512 555 1212 and you set
5 as the number of digits in your extension, a system with the
number 1 512 555 1212 will use 51212 to dial your system.
❑ International Dialing Prefix—Enter the prefix that must be
used to place international calls. This prefix is automatically
appended to any international calls made from the GAB. This
overrides the international dialing prefix that is normally
transparently set in the system Country screen.
❑ Public Network Access—Enable this option if your system can
dial outside of your private network.
❑ Public Network Dialing Prefix—Enter a dialing prefix as
required by your PBX to dial out to the public network. This
prefix is automatically inserted before the dialing numbers to
the public network from the GAB.
❑ Public Network (same area code) Prefix—Enter a prefix if one
is required to call within the same area code.
❑ Private Network Access—Enable this option if your
organization uses a private network for calls.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
127
ViewStation EX User Guide
If both the caller and the called party are on your Private
Network, as indicated by enabling the Private Network Access
option, then the Address Book of the calling site (through the
Global Directory Server) will show the private numbers of the
site being called if they are entered in the Private Network
ISDN Number screen (System Info > Admin Setup >
LAN/H.323 > Global Address > Private Net). In other words, if
both sites have the Private Network Access enabled, then their
address books will show the other parties’ private numbers
instead of the normal ISDN number.
For more information about Private Network ISDN Number,
refer to Entering the Private Network Number, on page 125.
❑ Private Network Dialing Prefix—Enter the dialing prefix
required to dial within your private network. This prefix is used
if your system and the system you are calling have access to
your organization’s private network.
Dialing Rules 2
If your private network requires you to dial prefixes to access
certain area codes (or city codes), you can set those prefixes in the
Dialing Rules 2 screen.
To access the Dialing Rules 2 screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > LAN/H.323 > Global Address
> Dialing Rules 2. The following screen appears:
Figure 4-23. Dialing Rules 2 Screen
128
www.polycom.com
Chapter 4 - Advanced Configuration for your Network Environment
The prefix is dialed before the area code. For example, some sites
require you to dial a 9 before dialing a 1-800-xxx-xxxx number.
Enable the Always Dial Area Code option if you must dial the area
code to sites that have the same area code as your system. This is
sometimes necessary for 10-digit dialing.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
129
ViewStation EX User Guide
Configuration for the Global Management
System
Overview
This section describes how to set up the ViewStation EX system to
be centrally configured, managed, and monitored by the Global
Management System (GMS) server.
Note
To use the Global Management System (GMS) features, your
organization must use Polycom Global Management System (GMS)
software.
To access the Global Management screens:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > LAN/H.323 > Global
Management. These screens are:
❑ Global Management. See Configuring Settings for the Global
Address Book Server, on page 120.
❑ Global Management URLs. See Accessing Global Management
Server URLs, on page 133
❑ Global Management Info. See Adding Global Management
Technical Support Contact Information, on page 134
About Global Management System
The Polycom Global Management System (GMS) is a Web-based
client/server software tool designed to enable and support
centralized management of enterprise-wide video communications
networks. GMS is used to:
130
www.polycom.com
Chapter 4 - Advanced Configuration for your Network Environment
❑ Manage and update a network of Polycom endpoints from your
local desktop and minimize time spent maintaining video
conferencing infrastructure.
❑ Obtain a global view of ViewStation systems connected to your
network.
❑ Proactively and remotely identify when network errors and
problems with ISDN lines or IP connections occur.
The GMS main features are:
❑ Centralized Video Network Management with Web-based
Architecture—This tool allows you to maintain and manage the
entire video communications network from any where in the
world with your Web browser.
❑ Zero-Administration Directory Services—The enterprise-wide
Global Directory enables users to dial any video system by
name.
❑ Multiple Remote Alert Notification—The GMS’ proactive and
reactive monitoring system automatically sends e-mail to
multiple network administrators’ pagers with critical
information enabling remote troubleshooting.
❑ Call Detail Record—Details of every video endpoint call is
recorded into a database to be used later for customer bill-back
or system expansion evaluation.
❑ Provisioning—GMS lets you create profiles of systems’ settings
that can be sent to new installed systems.
❑ Multiple Security Permissions—You can create individual and
group permission levels and access.
Note
For more information about GMS, refer to the Integrators’ Reference
Manual for ViewStation EX, ViewStation FX, and VS4000. You can also
find information on GMS on the Polycom Web site at
www.polycom.com.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
131
ViewStation EX User Guide
Setting Global Management Preferences
Global Management must be manually set on the ViewStation EX
system to be active.
To access the Global Management setup screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > LAN/H.323 > Global
Management > Setup. The Global Management setup screen
appears.
Figure 4-24. Global Management (Setup) Screen
You can set the following options on this screen:
❑ Allow Remote Monitoring—Enable this option to allow the
GMS system administrator to view a call or view the room
where the ViewStation EX camera is installed.
For privacy reasons, you can enable this option only from the
near-site system. Also, if you want to protect your office
privacy, disable this option.
❑ Time Difference from GMT—Enter the time difference from
where the system is installed and Greenwich Mean Time
(GMT). This allows the GMS to view the local time of the
managed system.
❑ Daylight Savings Time—Enable this option if the area where
the system is installed participates in Daylight Savings Time.
❑ Require Account Number to Dial—You must use GMS 2.0 or
later to use this option. This feature is used to log calls to a
132
www.polycom.com
Chapter 4 - Advanced Configuration for your Network Environment
specific account so that they can be tracked and billed to the
appropriate departments. When this option is selected, you
cannot make a call without first entering an account number.
This account number is saved in the GMS server database along
with information specific to the call. Typically, the GMS
administrator assigns the account number.
❑ Validate Account Number—This option is visible if the
Require Account Number to Dial option is enabled. The
account number is validated before the first call is attempted.
The entry of a valid account number allows calls to be made for
the next five minutes. After that, an account number must be
re-entered. If you enter an account number, make a call, and
then try to add a call more than five minutes later, you will
again be prompted for an account number. If this account
number is not valid, the pending call is not made and the call
you had been in for the last five minutes is hung up. Account
numbers are validated by the system whose IP address is the
first entry in the GMS monitoring URLs list. If that IP address is
incorrect or that system fails to respond, no calls can be made.
❑ Global Managers URLs (Select Server URLs)—Select this
option to access the Global Managers URLs screen.
Accessing Global Management Server URLs
The Global Management URLs screen lists the GMS servers that
remotely manage your system. When you are registered with the
GMS, this information is automatically displayed on this screen. In
some instances, you may add GMS server IP addresses manually.
This information is provided by your network manager.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
133
ViewStation EX User Guide
To access the Global Management URLs screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > LAN/H.323 > Global
Management > Setup > Select Server URLs....The Global
Management setup screen appears.
Figure 4-25. Global Management URLs Screen
The first field contains the address of the primary GMS server that
performs account validation (see Validate Account Number on
page 133).
The first entry in the GMS URLs list is used for account number
validation. If you enter an incorrect IP address for the first entry,
you will get "no response from GMS" if there is an attempt to
validate an account number and you cannot make calls.
Adding Global Management Technical Support Contact
Information
The Global Management Info screen allows you to enter the
contact information of the person who administers GMS in the event
assistance is requested by the user.
134
www.polycom.com
Chapter 4 - Advanced Configuration for your Network Environment
To access the Global Management Info screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > LAN/H.323 > Info 1. The
following screen appears:
Figure 4-26. Global Management Info Screen
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
135
ViewStation EX User Guide
Configuring Streaming Preferences
Streaming is the process of sending audio and video over a local
area network from one source to many viewers. A stream is sent out
over IP multicast.
IP multicast is very efficient for this type of broadcasts by enabling
the Viewstation EX to send a single copy of the media to multiple
recipients. By using IP multicast, there is no restriction in the
number of viewers.
The Streaming screen allows you to set up the streaming
parameters.
To access the Streaming screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > LAN/H.323 > Streaming. The
Streaming screen appears:
Figure 4-27. Streaming Screen
You can configure or modify the following options:
❑ Speed—Select the speed (192, 256, 384, 512 Kbps) you are
allowing for streaming. Consult your network manager, as this
may affect the network bandwidth.
❑ IP Multicast Address—A default address is entered for you
based on your serial number. This ensures that you do not have
the same multicast address as another system. You can change
136
www.polycom.com
Chapter 4 - Advanced Configuration for your Network Environment
this address. This is the address of a relay server that unicasts
the stream to multiple endpoints.
❑ Number of Router Hops—The number of router hops is
officially called Time to Live or TTL. This value represents the
number of routers the data can traverse before it is no longer
passed on. A value of 1 specifies the multicast data stays within
the subnet. A value of 2 means that a computer on a subnet
which only has one router between it and the system will be able
to play the stream.
❑ Audio Port—This is a fixed port. This may be changed by your
network manager if a user needs to go through the firewall.
❑ Video Port—This is a fixed port. This may be changed by your
network manager if a user needs to go through the firewall.
❑ Allow Streaming—When this option is enabled, the icon on the
main screen of the user interface changes from Telephone to
Call Type. Click Call Type to access the Streaming Call screen.
In the Streaming Call screen, you can set a Meeting Password.
Click the Start icon to start streaming.
❑ Enable Streaming Announcement—When this option is
enabled, the names of users logged on to your system are
displayed on screen.
❑ Restore Defaults—Selecting this option restores the Speed, IP
Multicast Address, Number of Router Hops, Audio Port, and
Video Port defaults.
To start streaming:
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
1.
Go back to the main screen and select Call Type.
2.
Select Streaming Call.
3.
Enter a Meeting Password, if needed
4.
Select Start.
137
ViewStation EX User Guide
Configuring SNMP Preferences
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is a set of protocols
used to manage complex networks. SNMP tells the network if a
device or operation is functioning properly. The ViewStation EX
sends SNMP reports on the following:
❑ Low battery power in the remote control.
❑ System is being powered on after a long time powered off.
❑ Authentication failure—someone is attempting to log in as an
administrator with the wrong password.
❑ Authentication success—someone has logged on successfully as
an administrator.
❑ Call failed for reason other than a busy line.
❑ A user has asked for help from the Technical Assistance Center.
❑ A system is in a telephone or video call.
❑ A telephone or video call has disconnected.
To access the SNMP Setup screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > LAN/H.323 > SNMP. The
SNMP Setup screen appears.
Figure 4-28. SNMP Setup Screen
138
www.polycom.com
Chapter 4 - Advanced Configuration for your Network Environment
You can enter the following information on the SNMP Setup screen:
❑ Enable SNMP—Enable or disable SNMP in this field.
❑ Administrator Contact Name—Enter the name of the person
responsible for remote management of this system. The default
setting for this field is “IT Administrator.”
❑ SNMP Console IP Address—Enter the IP address of the SNMP
traps sent by the system. Enter 0.0.0.0 in this field if any SNMP
management console is capable of receiving information from
this agent.
❑ Location Name—Enter the location of the system. This field
defaults to your system’s name@your country name.
❑ Community Name—Enter the SNMP management community
in which you want to enable this agent. The default setting for
this field is “Public.”
❑ System Description—This field displays the type of
videoconferencing device. You cannot edit this field.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
139
ViewStation EX User Guide
Configuring Quality of Service
The Quality of Service screen lets you select the type of service for
your videoconferencing packets on your network and whether or
not you would like to enable the Dynamic Bandwidth feature.
To access the Quality of Service and Firewalls screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > LAN/H.323 > QOS. The
Quality of Service screen appears.
Figure 4-29. Quality of Service Screen
In this screen, you can configure the following options:
❑ Type of Service Field—Select one of the following two options:
•
IP Precedence: This is a number that represents the level of
priority given to IP packages sent to the ViewStation EX
system. The value can be between 0 and 5. If this option is
selected, enter the value in the Type of Service Value field.
•
DiffServ: This is a number that also represents a priority
level. The value can be between 0 and 63. If this option is
selected, enter the value in the Type of Service Value field.
❑ Type of Service Value—Enter the value of the Type of Service
Field option you have selected above (IP Precedence or
Diffserv).
140
www.polycom.com
Chapter 4 - Advanced Configuration for your Network Environment
❑ Dynamic Bandwidth—Specify use of dynamic bandwidth
allocation. The ViewStation EX system dynamic bandwidth
function automatically finds the optimum line speed for a call.
If you experience excessive packet loss while in a call, the
Dynamic Bandwidth function decreases the line speed until
there is no packet loss. After some time with no packet loss, the
dynamic bandwidth function incrementally increases line
speed until packet loss occurs. At this point, the Dynamic
Bandwidth function lowers the line speed one increment to
ensure minimal packet loss with maximum throughput. This is
supported in calls with end points that also support Dynamic
Bandwidth.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
141
ViewStation EX User Guide
142
www.polycom.com
5
Using the ViewStation EX
This chapter explains how to perform all the basic system
operations listed in the following Topics table.
Topics in This Chapter
The following topics are included in this chapter.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
Topic
Description
Page
Remote
Control
The remote control functions are
explained in this section.
144
Video Calls
This section explains how to place,
answer, and end video calls.
148
Analog
Telephone
Calls
This section contains instructions on how
to place a telephone call, add a telephone
call to a video call and vice versa, and
disconnect a telephone call.
158
Address Book
This section describes how to add, edit,
and delete Address Book entries. It
explains how to transfer the Address Book
from one system to another, how to use
the Global Address Book, and how to
create multipoint Address Book entries.
161
Cameras and
Sound
This section describes how to control
cameras and sound. It contains detailed
information on camera settings, presets,
and automatic tracking.
167
143
ViewStation EX User Guide
Topic
Description
Page
Snapshots
This section explains how to send
snapshots. It also contains information on
the Snapshot Timeout option.
175
Picture-In-Pict
ure (PIP)
This section describes the PIP feature (the
picture from the local camera being
displayed as a small picture on screen
during an active video call).
177
Graphics
Cursor
This section describes the graphics cursor
and how to use it.
178
Remote Control
Most ViewStation EX functions are performed using the remote
control. The remote control is an integral part of your system. It
works very much like the remote control that you use at home for
your television.
The remote control is an “intelligent” device: it becomes active as
soon as you pick it up, and becomes inactive as soon as you set it
down again.
You will use it to highlight and select icons that appear on the
monitor connected to your system, configure your Address Book,
adjust your camera, adjust the sound, place video calls, etc.
144
www.polycom.com
Chapter 5 - Using the ViewStation EX
Figure 5-1. Remote Control
The remote control functionality is described in Table 5-1.
Table 5-1. Remote Control Functionality
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
Function
Description
1. Call-Hangup
Allows users to make calls or hang up call. It
takes you to the dialing screen (Video Phone). It
is used to place a call, to manually answer a call,
to add in another video or audio endpoint call to a
multipoint call.
2. Auto
Activates, deactivates, and cycles through the
auto-tracking functions.
145
ViewStation EX User Guide
146
Function
Description
3. Near
Activates camera control of the near side of the
call (your system). You know the near side
function is activated when you see the camera
icon in the top right corner of the screen pointing
at you.
4. Far
Activates camera control of the far side of the call
(remote system), and also sets presets. You
know the far side function is activated when the
camera icon in the top right corner of the screen
is facing away from you.
5. Slides
Allows you to access preloaded slides or to start
or stop a dual stream.
6. Arrow Buttons
Allows you to navigate through the menu
screens. The right arrow button is also used to
enter a period (.) as in IP addresses.
7. Select
The universal “enter” button. In most screens,
you can press the SELECT button to select an
icon, or to perform the function that you have
highlighted.
8. Zoom
Allows to zoom in and out of near and far PTZ
(pan-tilt-zoom) cameras.
9. Snapshot
Allows you to capture an image from the camera
source of your choice and send it to the far side
as a still image.
10. Mute
Allows you to activate or deactivate the
microphones on the near side using the remote
control, as opposed to pressing the mute button
on the microphone pod.
11. Volume
Controls the volume of the sound through the
amplifier in the system.
12. Keypad
Used to enter dialing or screen configuration
numbers. Also used to go to camera presets.
www.polycom.com
Chapter 5 - Using the ViewStation EX
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
Function
Description
13. Menu
Takes you to the menu screens from either the
near or far camera view. The Menu button will
back you out one screen at a time when you are
inside the menu screens.
14. Info
Takes you to basic system tutorials. Also used to
request help from the system administrator if the
unit is registered with Global Management
System. It can also take you to Network Status
screen if you are in the near screen while in a call.
147
ViewStation EX User Guide
Video Calls
There are five ways to place a video call:
❑ Using manual dialing. See Placing a Call Manually.
❑ From the Address Book. See Placing a Call from the Address
Book.
❑ Using speed dialing. See Placing a Speed-Dial Call.
❑ Dialing from the Web interface. See Placing a Call from the
Web Interface.
❑ Dialing using the Application Programming Interface (API).
See Placing a Call Using the Application Programming
Interface.
Placing a Call Manually
Using One Number
To place a call manually using one number:
1.
On the main screen, highlight the Video Call icon and press the
SELECT button on the remote control. The following screen
appears.
Figure 5-2. Video Phone Screen
148
www.polycom.com
Chapter 5 - Using the ViewStation EX
2.
Use the numeric keypad on the remote control to enter the
number you want to dial.
If you need to enter alpha characters, press the AUTO button on
the remote control to bring up the keyboard.
Note
When you enter a number using the remote control, you can
hear a voice confirmation of that number from the ViewStation
EX system. This feature, Keypad Audio Confirmation, supports
English, French, German, Portuguese, Spanish, and Chinese. It
can be enabled on the General Setup screen by selecting the
Keypad Audio Confirmation option.
3.
Use the arrow buttons on the remote control to highlight the
Speed icon on the screen and select the speed of your call from
the list that appears.
4.
Use the arrow buttons to navigate down to select the call type
(AUTO, ISDN, or IP) and the desired call speed. If you select
AUTO, the system will figure out automatically which call type
to choose based on the format of the number you have entered.
5.
Press the green CALL•HANG-UP button on the remote control
to place your call. The number and the speed that you are
dialing appear at the top of the screen.
The call progress indicators on the lower left side of the screen
indicate that the call is going through.They change
progressively to blue, yellow, orange, and green as your call
completes.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
149
ViewStation EX User Guide
Figure 5-3. Call Progress Indicators
6.
When the call completes, the party you called appears on the
screen, and you appear in the picture-in-picture (PIP) window
at the lower right. If you have a two-monitor system, the party
you are calling appears on the main monitor, and you appear on
the second monitor.
If the call does not complete, an error message is displayed. If
you receive an error message, press the INFO button on the
remote control for an explanation. For V.35/RS-449/RS-530
systems, consult your DCE interface for error messages.
7.
To end your call, press the CALL•HANG-UP button on the
remote control. The following screen appears.
Figure 5-4. Call Hangup Choices Screen
8.
150
Highlight the Disconnect Video Call icon and press the
SELECT button on the remote control. If the call was made with
www.polycom.com
Chapter 5 - Using the ViewStation EX
a number that is not in your Address Book, a dialog box gives
you the opportunity to add the number. If you select Yes, the
system takes you to the address book where you can enter the
information. If you select No, the main screen appears on your
monitor.
Notes
If you stay in this screen for 60 seconds without pressing the
SELECT button on the remote control to stay in the call or hang
up, the call is disconnected.
The Add Video Call option is only visible if you have enabled
your system to support multipoint calls. For more information,
refer to Upgrading the System for Multipoint Calls.
You can also place a video call using the Address Book or Speed
Dial. For more information, see Address Book.
Using Two Numbers
In some instances, you need to dial ISDN numbers separately when
the party that you are calling can only handle 2 x 56 Kbps or 2 x 64
Kbps speeds.
To manually place a video call using two numbers, complete
the following:
1.
Select the Video Call icon. If the speed that you selected is for a
2 x 56 Kbps or 2 x 64 Kbps call, a second number field becomes
visible. If the Auto H.323 option is enabled, the system knows
which call type to use when dialing out based on the format of
the number. If this option is not enabled, then the IP and ISDN
options are visible on the Video Call screen and you need to
select the appropriate option.
2.
To enter the first ISDN number of the party you are calling, use
the numeric keypad on the remote control.
To clear an entry, use the arrow buttons on the remote control
to move the highlight box to the Clear icon on the screen, and
press the SELECT button (or the CALL•HANG-UP button).
To clear part of an entry from the right, press the LEFT ARROW
button once for each character you wish to delete.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
151
ViewStation EX User Guide
3.
To enter the second number:
•
For an ISDN number one digit greater than the first, press
the RIGHT ARROW button to enter that number, then skip
to step 5.
•
For an ISDN number which is the same as the first, press the
DOWN ARROW button, then skip to step 4.
•
Otherwise, press the DOWN ARROW button to move the
orange highlight box to the second line of the screen. Use
the LEFT ARROW button on the remote control to delete
numbers to the left and the numeric keypad to enter the
second ISDN number of the party you are calling.
4.
Press the SELECT button (or the CALL•HANG-UP button) to
place the call.
5.
As the call connection approaches completion, the call progress
indicators on the lower left of the screen change from blue to
green. Two call progress indicators appear for each available
line.
If the call cannot connect, an error box appears at the top center
of the screen. You can re-dial from the Video Phone screen,
where the number you entered will remain until it is replaced or
the system is turned off.
When the call connects, the party you are calling appears in the
main window and near-site video appears in a smaller screen at
the lower right. If you are using a dual-monitor configuration,
the party you are calling appears on the main monitor and you
appear on the second monitor.
6.
To end the call, press the CALL•HANG-UP button on the
remote control, which takes you to the Call Hangup Choices
screen.
7.
Use the arrow keys to highlight the Disconnect Video Call icon
and press the SELECT button on the remote control. If you
highlight the icon but do not press SELECT, the call disconnects
automatically after 60 seconds.
If the call was manually dialed with a number that does not
appear in the Address Book, you are given an opportunity to
enter the name and number from the call into the Address Book.
If you answer Yes, you will go to the screen used for adding a
new entry to the Address Book. The number from that call is
152
www.polycom.com
Chapter 5 - Using the ViewStation EX
already entered, and you can finish filling out the entry. If you
answer No, the system returns to the main calling screen.
Placing a Call from the Address Book
You can place calls directly from your Address Book. For
information on how to enter numbers into your Address Book, refer
to Address Book.
You can place a call from the Address Book as follows:
1.
Highlight the Address Book icon on the main screen and press
the SELECT button. The Speed Dial screen appears.
Note
If the Display Speed Dial option has been disabled on the General
Setup screen (page 2), you will access the Address Book directly.
2.
Highlight the Address Book icon again and press the SELECT
button.The Address Book screen appears. For each entry, the
number is displayed along with icons showing dialing speed
and if it is an H.320 (ISDN) or H.323 (IP) call.
Figure 5-5. Address Book Screen
3.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
Use the arrow buttons on the remote control to scroll through
the list of names. Press the SELECT button when you find the
entry you want. The system automatically begins to dial the
video number.
153
ViewStation EX User Guide
Placing a Speed-Dial Call
Speed Dial stores the last six numbers dialed from the ViewStation
EX system if the numbers are in your Address Book.
Note
If the Display Speed Dial option has been disabled on the General
Setup screen (page 2), you will not have access to the Speed Dial
screen, but you will be taken directly to the Address Book..
Figure 5-6. Speed Dial Screen
To place a Speed Dial call:
1.
Highlight the Address Book icon on the main screen and press
the SELECT button. The Speed Dial screen appears.
2.
Highlight the speed dial entry you want to dial and press the
SELECT button. The system automatically begins to dial the
video number. You can also press the number of the speed dial
entry you want to dial on your remote control. For example, to
call speed dial entry 1, press 1 on the remote control.
To lock a Speed Dial entry:
You can lock a speed dial entry so that it always appears on the
Speed Dial screen. This is useful for numbers you dial frequently.
154
www.polycom.com
Chapter 5 - Using the ViewStation EX
1.
To lock the number, highlight the entry on the Speed Dial
screen.
2.
Press the # button on the remote control. A Lock icon appears
next to Speed Dial entries that are locked.
To unlock a Speed Dial entry:
1.
To unlock a number, highlight the entry.
2.
Press the * button on the remote control.
Placing a Call from the Web Interface
For instructions about how to place a video call from the Web
interface, refer to Features of the Web Interface on page 229.
Placing a Call Using the Application Programming Interface
For instructions about how to place a call using the API, refer to the
ViewStation EX, ViewStation FX, and VS4000 ARENA API
Programmer’s Guide.
Answering a Video Call Manually
The ViewStation EX is set by default to automatically answer
incoming calls.
To set your system to answer video calls manually:
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
1.
From the main screen, select System Info > Admin Setup >
General Setup or select System Info > User Setup.
2.
Highlight the field next to Auto Answer Point to Point, and
select the No option from the drop-down menu.
3.
When there is an incoming call, the user will be prompted with
a message “You have a video call. Would you like to answer?”
This message is followed by a video number and a far-site name
155
ViewStation EX User Guide
if they are available. If the user selects Yes, the call will be
connected. If the user selects No, the call will be rejected.
Answering a Video Call Automatically
The ViewStation EX is set by default to automatically answer
incoming calls. If the default settings are changed, you can reset the
system to answer calls automatically.
To set your system to answer video calls automatically:
1.
From the main screen, select System Info > Admin Setup >
General Setup or select System Info > User Setup.
2.
Highlight the field next to Auto Answer Point to Point, and
select the Yes option from the drop-down menu. Yes is the
default.
3.
Press the MENU button on the remote control until you return
to the main screen.
If the Auto Answer Point to Point option is set to No, all video calls
need to be answered manually. Refer to the preceding section for
more information.
Setting the System to Do Not Disturb
To set your system to Do Not Disturb Mode:
156
1.
From the main screen, select System Info > Admin Setup >
General Setup or select System Info > User Setup.
2.
Highlight the field next to Auto Answer Point to Point, and
select the Do Not Disturb option from the drop-down menu.
3.
With the Auto Answer mode set to Do Not Disturb, you will
not be notified of any incoming call. The site which placed the
call will receive either a “call rejected” or “dialed site busy”
message.
www.polycom.com
Chapter 5 - Using the ViewStation EX
Ending a Video Call
To end a video call:
1.
To end your call, press the CALL•HANG-UP button on the
remote control. The Call Hangup Choices screen appears.
2.
Highlight the Disconnect Video Call icon and press the
SELECT button or press the CALL•HANG-UP button on the
remote control twice. If the call was made with a number that is
not in your Address Book, a dialog box gives you the
opportunity to add the number.
•
If you select Yes the system takes you to the Address Book
where you can enter the information.
•
If you select No, the main calling screen appears on your
monitor.
•
To stay in the call, select the Stay in Call icon and press the
SELECT button.
Note
If you stay in this screen for 60 seconds without pressing the
SELECT button, the call automatically disconnects.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
157
ViewStation EX User Guide
Analog Telephone Calls
In countries where it is approved, you can connect an analog telephone
line to your ViewStation EX system. This lets you make telephone
calls through the ViewStation EX system and include audio third
parties in your video calls.
Placing a Telephone Call
You can use your system as a standard speakerphone.
To place a telephone call from your system:
1.
From the main calling screen, select Telephone and press the
SELECT button. The Telephone screen appears.
Figure 5-7. Telephone Screen
2.
Use the numeric keypad on the remote control to enter the
number you want to dial.
If you are dialing within your PBX system, you only have to dial
the last four digits of the number.
If you want to delete a digit, press the LEFT ARROW button on
the remote control.
To delete an entire phone number, highlight the Clear icon on
the screen and press the SELECT button on the remote control.
3.
158
Press the CALL•HANG-UP button on the remote control to
place the call.
www.polycom.com
Chapter 5 - Using the ViewStation EX
4.
To end the call, press the CALL•HANG-UP button on the
remote control.
Adding a Telephone Call to a Video Call
To add a telephone call once your video call is connected:
1.
Press the CALL•HANG-UP button on the remote control. The
Call Hang-up Choices screen appears.
2.
Select the Add Speakerphone icon and press the SELECT
button. The Telephone screen appears.
3.
Enter the phone number of the third party using the numeric
keypad on the remote control and press the SELECT button. The
system begins dialing the third party.
4.
Once the third party connects, press the NEAR or FAR button
on the remote control to return to the videoconference.
Note
Three-way calling is only supported if you have enabled three-way
calling from your local telephone company. Select the FLASH
button on the telephone screen to obtain another line.
Disconnecting a Telephone Call
To disconnect a telephone call:
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
1.
Press the CALL•HANG-UP button on the remote control. The
Call Hang-up Choices screen appears.
2.
Select the Disconnect Speakerphone Call icon and press the
SELECT button on the remote control. The third party
disconnects.
159
ViewStation EX User Guide
Adding a Video Call to a Telephone Call
To add a video call once your telephone call is connected:
1.
Press the MENU button on the remote control until you reach
the main calling screen.
2.
Highlight the Video Call icon and press the SELECT button on
the remote control. The Video Phone screen appears.
3.
Use the numeric keypad on the remote control to enter the
number you want to dial.
If you are dialing within your PBX system, you only have to dial
the last four digits of the number.
To delete a digit, press the left arrow button on the remote
control.
To delete an entire phone number, highlight the Clear icon on
the screen and press the SELECT button on the remote control.
160
4.
Press the CALL•HANG-UP button on the remote control to
place the call.
5.
To end the call, press the CALL•HANG-UP button on the
remote control.
www.polycom.com
Chapter 5 - Using the ViewStation EX
Address Book
The Address Book saves you time by allowing you to place video
calls by name. You can pre-program up to 1,000 entries in the
Address Book. The Address Book supports both single site or
multi-site calls, depending upon system configuration.
If your organization uses Polycom's Global Management System™
software, you can configure your Address Book to automatically
show all of the addresses used in your organization.
For information on how to place a call from the Address Book, refer
to Placing a Call from the Address Book in this chapter.
To access the Address Book:
1.
Select the Address Book icon on the main screen. The Speed
Dial screen appears.
2.
Highlight the Address Book icon again and press the SELECT
button on the remote control. The main Address Book screen
appears as follows.
Figure 5-8. Address Book Screen
From this screen, you can perform all Address Book tasks.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
161
ViewStation EX User Guide
Note
The New, Edit, and Delete icons are only visible if the Allow
Address Book Changes option has been enabled in the General
Setup screen (System Info > Admin Setup > General Setup).
Adding an Entry to the Address Book
To add an entry to the Address Book:
1.
Select the Address Book icon on the main screen. The Speed
Dial screen appears.
2.
Highlight the Address Book icon again and press the SELECT
button on the remote control. The main Address Book screen
appears.
3.
Highlight the New icon and press the SELECT button on the
remote control. The New Address Book Entry screen appears.
4.
Highlight the One Site icon and press the SELECT button on the
remote control. The Add/Change Entry screen appears.
Figure 5-9. Add/Change Entry Screen
5.
162
Use the on-screen keyboard and the remote control to enter the
necessary information on this screen.
www.polycom.com
Chapter 5 - Using the ViewStation EX
Tip
Enter a dot. To enter a dot, press the right button on the remote
control.
Shift key settings. The on-screen keyboard’s Shift key has three
settings:
- lower case: using the remote control, select the Shift key until
it turns into a greyish down arrow.
- upper case: using the remote control, select the Shift key until
it turns into a green up arrow (as shown on Figure 5-9). Only the
next letter you enter is capitalized.
- caps lock: select the Shift key twice. A lock symbol appears on
the key. All the letters are capitalized while the lock is visible.
6.
If you are using OneDial, enter both the ISDN VIdeo Number
and the IP Video Number. OneDial is a Polycom proprietary
feature that greatly simplifies videoconferencing dialing
through taking care of a number of dialing and network
processes in the background. For more information about
OneDial, refer to About Polycom OneDial.
7.
Highlight the Save icon and press the SELECT button on the
remote control. You then return to the main Address Book
screen.
Note
To create a multi-site entry, refer to Creating Multipoint Address
Book Entries.
Editing an Existing Entry in the Address Book
To edit an existing Address Book entry:
1.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
Use the UP and DOWN arrow buttons on the remote control to
highlight an Address Book entry.
163
ViewStation EX User Guide
2.
Highlight the Edit icon and press the SELECT button on the
remote control. The Add/Change Entry screen and the
on-screen keyboard appear.
3.
Use the on-screen keyboard and the remote control to change
the information on this screen as needed.
In the name field, use the backspace key on the on-screen
keyboard to delete letters.
In the number field, use the LEFT ARROW button to delete
numbers.
4.
Highlight the Save icon and press the SELECT button on the
remote control. Your changes are saved and you return to the
main Address Book screen.
Note
You cannot edit Global Address Book entries. They are dynamically
obtained from the ViewStation EX that connected into the Global
Address Book (GAB) server.
Deleting Entries in the Address Book
To delete entries in the Address Book:
1.
Highlight the entry you want to delete.
2.
Use the left arrow button to highlight the Delete icon.
3.
Press the SELECT button on the remote control. The entry you
selected is now deleted from the Address Book.
Transferring the Address Book
You can transfer the contents of your ViewStation EX system’s
Address Book to a far-site ViewStation while in an ISDN call
(Address Book transfers can occur between all ViewStation models).
164
www.polycom.com
Chapter 5 - Using the ViewStation EX
To transfer the contents of your Address Book:
1.
From the main calling screen, go to System Info > Admin Setup
> Software/Hardware.
2.
Click the Send Address Book icon.
3.
Enter the Administrator Password and Software Update
Security Password of the far-site ViewStation system.
4.
Click the Start icon to begin the transfer.
Note
This feature is only available when the system is in an ISDN call to
a single endpoint.
Using the Global Address Book
If your organization uses Polycom's Global Management System
software and your ViewStation EX system is set to subscribe to the
Global Address Book server, you can access global addresses.
The Global Address Book provides users with easy, one-button
dialing to anywhere in the world. The Global Address Book
automatically captures and updates your system’s dialing
information, country codes, and preferred line speeds. The user
simply selects a name from the list to place a call.
When you access the Address Book on a system that subscribes to
the Global Address Book server, you see addresses that have been
entered manually and global addresses from various address books.
The following icons on the Address Book screen indicate Global
Address Book status and individual address status.
The presence of this icon in the upper right corner indicates that
the system is connected to the Global Address Book server.
When this icon rotates, it indicates that the system is actively
accessing the Global Address Book server for addresses. Notice
the icon rotating as you scroll through the address list.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
165
ViewStation EX User Guide
This icon indicates that the selected address is an address from
the Global Address Book. You cannot edit or delete global
addresses from your system. You can perform these tasks only
from the Global Address Book console.
This icon allows you to save a global entry to your local Address
Book.
This icon indicates that the selected address is an address that
was entered manually. These addresses are local to your system
and are not reported to the GAB server. You can edit and delete
these addresses from your system.
For more information about Global Management System software,
go to our Web site at www.polycom.com or see About Global
Management System on page 130.
Creating Multipoint Address Book Entries
You can make it easier to place multipoint video calls by creating
multipoint entries in your Address Book. Multipoint entries are
made with the single-site entries that are already listed in your
Address Book or Global Address Book. When you use multipoint
entries, you can call all the selected sites from one Address Book
entry.
For information about creating a multipoint entry and placing a
multipoint call, refer to Using an Address Book Meeting Entry on
page 189.
To be able to use this feature, your system must be connected to an
MGC system, configured for Conference and Demand, and use
PathNavigator.
166
www.polycom.com
Chapter 5 - Using the ViewStation EX
Cameras and Sound
The following sections describe how to control the cameras and
sound on your ViewStation EX system.
Controlling Cameras
Your system has a built-in, auto-focusing, pan-tilt-zoom (PTZ)
camera which you can control manually or set to auto-tracking
where the camera aims at the person who is speaking in the
videoconference. Manual control mode and auto-tracking mode are
available for the near and far cameras.
Selecting a Near-Site Camera
To select a near-site camera:
1.
Press the remote control’s NEAR button twice. Numbered local
video sources appear at the bottom of the screen, where:
1 = main camera
2 = document camera
3 = VCR
Figure 5-10.
2.
Use the left or right arrow keys on the remote control to
highlight a video source. Then press the SELECT button on the
remote control.
-orAfter pressing the NEAR button twice on the remote cont rol,
press button 1, 2, or 3 to jump to a specific camera.
Note
Make sure that the camera icons are displayed on screen.
Otherwise, when you press the number button, a camera preset
will be selected instead of a different camera source.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
167
ViewStation EX User Guide
3.
The system displays full screen the camera’s current view on the
television monitor. A Camera icon appears in the upper right
corner pointing towards you.
Selecting a Far-Site Camera
To select a far-site camera source during a call:
1.
Press the FAR button twice on the remote control. A series of
cameras pointing away from you (towards the far site) appears.
2.
Press the left or right arrow key on the remote control to
highlight a video source. Then press the SELECT button on the
remote control.
-orAfter pressing the FAR button twice, press button 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5
to jump to a specific camera.
3.
Press the SELECT button on the remote control.
4.
The system displays full screen the far-site camera’s current
view on the television monitor. A Camera icon appears in the
upper right corner pointing away from you.
Note
If there is no camera connected to the selected video source, you will
see either a blue screen or frozen video from the last video source.
Controlling the Near-Site Camera
Camera Control Mode—To control or adjust the camera on your
system, press the NEAR button on the remote control. A camera
icon appears in the upper right corner pointing towards you.
Tilt, Pan—Use the arrow buttons on the remote control to tilt the
camera up and down and to pan from side to side.
Zoom—Use the ZOOM buttons to zoom in and out.
168
www.polycom.com
Chapter 5 - Using the ViewStation EX
The following picture shows the buttons that are used on the remote
control to control the camera.
Figure 5-11. Camera Control Button on Remote Control
Controlling the Far-Site Camera
You can also adjust the camera on the far site in a call if that site has
its Far Control of Near Camera option enabled. Other sites can
control the camera on system if you have this option enabled.
To enable the Far Control of Near Camera option on your
system:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > Video/Camera > Cameras.
To put the camera in control mode:
To control or adjust the system’s camera on the far site, press the
FAR button on the remote control. The far site camera's view
appears full screen on the television monitor. A Camera icon
appears in the upper right corner pointing away from you. Use the
remote control to adjust the far-site camera the same way you would
adjust your camera.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
169
ViewStation EX User Guide
To tilt or pan the camera:
Use the arrow buttons on the remote control to tilt the camera up
and down and to pan from side to side.
To zoom:
Use the ZOOM buttons on the remote control to zoom in and out.
To go to a menu screen while in a call:
While in a call, if you have to go to a menu screen to make some
adjustments, pressing the NEAR or FAR button on the remote
control returns you to your call view.
Adjusting Camera Settings
You can adjust the settings of your cameras from the Cameras
screen.
To access this screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > Video/Camera > Cameras.
The options available on the Cameras screen are described in the
section Video and Cameras Screens on page 305.
Setting Camera Presets
You can set and store up to ten preset camera positions. These ten
camera presets can be distributed across the far camera and up to
four near-site cameras.
To set a camera preset:
1.
170
Press the NEAR or FAR button on the remote control to select
the near or far camera.
www.polycom.com
Chapter 5 - Using the ViewStation EX
2.
If you pressed the NEAR button, press it again to select the
near-site camera.
3.
Position the camera using the arrow buttons and ZOOM
buttons on the remote control.
4.
Press the SELECT button on the remote control. The camera
preset circles are now displayed. A “Press 0-9 to store a preset”
message appears on the main monitor.
Notes
If the circle is transparent, the preset is empty.
If the circle is solid yellow, the preset is assigned.
To clear all the presets, press the pound (#) key on the remote.
5.
Press a number button on the remote control to assign that
button to the preset.
6.
To select a camera preset, press the NEAR or FAR button for the
desired camera and press the number button on the remote
control for the preset you want.
Enabling Automatic Voice Tracking
The main camera on your ViewStation EX can automatically move
to whomever is speaking in the meeting. The first time the camera
moves to a person, it might take several seconds of continuous
speech to locate the person speaking.
The camera picks out the position quickly the next time the person
speaks. Automatic voice tracking mode uses the built-in
hypercardiod microphones in the set-top unit (instead of using the
microphone pods) to triangulate the location of the current speaker
and aim the camera at that person. If the person moves or another
person speaks, the camera will retriangulate and re-aim the camera.
Note
The speed and the accuracy of automatic voice tracking largely
relies on the quality of the acoustics and the amount of ambient
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
171
ViewStation EX User Guide
noise in the room. In some situations, triangulation of the speaker
may take longer than expected.
To enable automatic voice tracking:
Press the AUTO button once on the remote control. A Camera icon
with a motor attached appears in the upper right corner of the main
monitor.
To turn off automatic voice tracking:
Pan, tilt, or zoom the camera. Any of these actions returns the
camera to manual mode.
Enabling Automatic Tracking to Camera Presets
Automatic tracking to camera presets also triangulates the location
of the speaker, but aims the camera at the closest camera preset to
the location of the speaker. This is effective if the meeting
participants are sitting or are otherwise stationary.
Note
The system senses the frequency range of the human voice.
Therefore, the camera will not aim at noises outside of that
frequency range, such as pencil tapping, coughing, or whistling.
To enable automatic tracking to camera presets:
172
1.
Select the far or near camera and press the AUTO button twice
to enable automatic tracking to preset positions.
2.
The camera moves to the preset nearest to the person speaking.
www.polycom.com
Chapter 5 - Using the ViewStation EX
To disable automatic tracking to camera presets:
Move the selected camera using the ARROW buttons on the remote
control.
Automatic camera tracking is temporarily disabled under the
following conditions:
❑ When your site is on MUTE.
❑ When there are loud noises coming from the far site or when the
far site is speaking.
❑ When the near site moves the camera.
Controlling Sound
Setting the Volume
The volume of the ViewStation EX system is related to the volume
on the television monitor.
To set the volume:
1.
Set the volume on the television monitor to one-half its
maximum volume.
2.
Set the system’s volume at a comfortable hearing level.
3.
To adjust the volume on the system, press the VOL (Volume)
buttons on the remote control.
Using the Mute Button
The mute button on the microphone pod is used to prevent far-site
participants from hearing your conversation.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
173
ViewStation EX User Guide
To activate the MUTE function:
Press the MUTE button on the remote control or on the microphone
pod. Notice that the red light on top of the microphone pod is
illuminated.
The Mute icon appears in the bottom left corner of the television
monitor indicating to the near and far sites that mute is turned on.
This mute indicator feature is supported in ISDN and IP calls.
However, the mute indicator for IP calls is only supported by
Polycom endpoints.
Controlling Sound Effects Volume
There is a separate volume control for the sound effects on the
ViewStation EX system.
To adjust this volume setting:
174
1.
Select System Info > Admin Setup > Phone/Audio.
2.
Select the Sound Effects Volume field.
3.
Adjust the volume setting by using the volume control buttons
on the remote control.
www.polycom.com
Chapter 5 - Using the ViewStation EX
Snapshots
This section explains how to send snapshots to the far site and how
to use the Snapshot Timeout feature.
Sending Snapshots
You can send a snapshot from any local camera to the participants
in a videoconference by using the snapshot feature on the
ViewStation EX system.
To send a snapshot to meeting participants:
1.
Press the SNAPSHOT button on the remote control.
2.
Select a camera. Refer to Controlling Cameras for more
information about selecting cameras.
3.
Position the camera as necessary.
4.
Press the SNAPSHOT button on the remote control again. The
image is seen by all of the far sites in a call.
5.
To preview your snapshot before sending it, press the
SNAPSHOT button once and press 1, 2, or 3 for your desired
camera source. You see a live preview from the selected camera
while the far site still sees you.
6.
To send the image, press the SNAPSHOT button again.
Snapshot Timeout
By default, all slides and snapshots are displayed for a period of four
minutes. When the display times out after four minutes, the system
automatically returns to live video. However, when this option is
disabled, the snapshot or slide stays on screen indefinitely until the
user presses the SNAPSHOT button on the remote control to return
to live video.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
175
ViewStation EX User Guide
To disable the Timeout feature:
1.
Select System Info > Admin Setup > Video/Camera > TV
Monitors.
2.
In the TV Monitors screen, disable Snapshot Timeout.
Note
Both sites must have disabled the Snapshot Timeout option for this
feature to work. If one side has not disabled Snapshot Timeout, the
system reverts to its default settings.
176
www.polycom.com
Chapter 5 - Using the ViewStation EX
Picture-In-Picture (PIP)
On a single monitor system, the picture from the local camera is
always displayed as a small picture (a PIP) in the lower right corner
of the screen during an active video call.
To swap the main and PIP images on a single monitor system:
1.
Press the NEAR and SELECT buttons on the remote control.
2.
Use the icon button on the screen to swap the main and PIP
images.
On a dual monitor system, the second monitor always has the
picture from the local camera, except when viewing a snapshot or
presentation. After 15 seconds, the local video appears in a PIP
window.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
177
ViewStation EX User Guide
Graphics Cursor
The Graphics Cursor is an arrow (pointer) that you can display and
move around on a slide. The cursor is a convenient way to point to
a specific item or area of the slide while you are talking about the
item or area.
General Information
The graphics cursor is available only in slide/snapshot viewing
mode and works on any slide that has been received from:
❑ Someone pressing the SNAPSHOT button on the remote control
❑ A Microsoft PowerPoint presentation
❑ PolycomSnap
Note
The cursor is not available in preview mode.
The graphics cursor is displayed only for the current slide; that is,
the slide that is displayed when you activate the cursor. If you go to
another slide, the cursor is not displayed. You must display the
cursor again.
You can use the graphics cursor on a graphics monitor or VGA
monitor. The cursor is available only on a dual-monitor or
multi-monitor system, not a single-monitor system using your main
monitor only.
Any party in the video call that is viewing the slide can manipulate
the graphics cursor. In addition, all parties can see the cursor as long
as one site has displayed the cursor.
178
www.polycom.com
Chapter 5 - Using the ViewStation EX
Using the Graphics Cursor
Displaying the graphics cursor. Press one of the numbers (1-9) on
the remote control. The graphics cursor appears as a yellow arrow.
The cursor is displayed for 30 seconds and then disappears from the
screen.
To redisplay the cursor, press the number 5, which allows you to
turn the graphics cursor on and off.
Moving the graphics cursor. You can move the graphics cursor
around the screen and point to any specific object. You can move the
cursor left and right, up and down, and diagonally.
Table 5-2 summarizes each graphics cursor function associated with
a specific numeric button on the remote control.
Table 5-2. Graphic cursor function and remote control
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
Number on the
Remote
Control
Graphic Cursor Function
1
Moves the cursor diagonally up and to the left.
2
Moves the cursor up.
3
Moves the cursor diagonally up and to the right.
4
Moves the cursor to the left.
5
Toggles to display and not display the cursor.
6
Moves the cursor to the right.
7
Moves the cursor diagonally down and to the left.
8
Moves the cursor down.
9
Moves the cursor diagonally down and to the right.
179
ViewStation EX User Guide
180
www.polycom.com
6
Using Advanced System
Features
This chapter describes how to configure and use advanced
ViewStation EX features.
Topics in This Chapter
The following topics are included in this chapter.
Topic
Description
Page
Multipoint Calls
(Optional)
This section contains detailed information
on the following multipoint features:
182
Dial-In Calling
(Optional)
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
•
multipoint dialing speed and firewall
•
the different methods that can be used
to place multipoint video calls
•
Mixed Protocol Dialing feature
•
viewing modes
•
passwords
•
cascading capabilities
•
chair control
The Dial-In Calling feature lets users who
are already in a videoconference answer
and add an incoming video call. This
section covers information about the
number of calls combinations, and also
explains how to set the Auto Answer mode
for a multipoint call.
205
181
ViewStation EX User Guide
Topic
Description
Page
Conference on
Demand (COD)
This feature allows you to bring multiple
endpoints together in a videoconference
on an unscheduled basis. Its
implementation is covered in this section.
209
Streaming
Video
This section contains instructions about
how to enable streaming and view streams
using Apple QuickTime.
212
Data
Conferencing
This section explains how to enable data
conferencing on the ViewStation EX
system and how to use the ShowStation®
IP, StreamStation™, and Microsoft
NetMeeting.
216
People+Content
This section gives an overview of this dual
streaming feature.
218
Multipoint Calls (Optional)
Your ViewStation EX system can be upgraded to support all of the
multipoint call features described in this section. In order to
upgrade your system to support multipoint calls, you will need to
purchase a multipoint key from Polycom. For detailed instructions
on how to upgrade your system to support multipoint calls, refer to
Upgrading the System for Multipoint Calls in chapter 2.
When there are more than two parties participating in a video call,
it is called a multipoint call. You can have up to four parties
participating in a call with the ViewStation EX system.
If you have a BRI network interface, you can place multipoint calls
over a BRI line or over IP (H.323) on the LAN. If you have a
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 network interface, you can place multipoint
calls only over IP on the LAN.
182
www.polycom.com
Chapter 6 - Using Advanced System Features
Before you Begin
Multipoint Dialing Speed Table
The following table shows the maximum allowable dialing speeds
according to the number of sites in a call. All parties in a multipoint
call must be connected at the same speed.
Table 6-1. Multipoint Dialing Speeds
Network
Interface
Number of Sites in
a Call
V.35/RS-449/RS530
BRI
Maximum Speed For Each
Party in the Call
(in Kbps)
ISDN(H.320)
IP (H.323)
2
3
4
768
768
384
256
2 with 2 lines
2 with 3 lines
2 with 4 lines
256
384
512
768
768
768
3 with 2 lines
3 with 3 lines
3 with 4 lines
128
192
256
384
384
384
4 with 2 lines
4 with 3 lines
4 with 4 lines
64
128
128
256
256
256
IP (H.323) Only
Refer to H.323 speeds in this
table.
Mixed Protocol Dialing Speed Table
The following table shows the maximum allowable dialing speeds
according to the number of calls and the type of calls (ISDN and IP)
in a multipoint videoconference.
All parties in a multipoint call must be connected at the same speed.
A multipoint videoconference can mix both IP and ISDN calls. For
more information, see Mixed Protocol Dialing, on page 192.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
183
ViewStation EX User Guide
Table 6-2. Mixed Protocol Dialing Speeds
Network
Interface
BRI with Mixed
Protocols (ISDN
and IP)
Number of
Endpoints and
Type of Calls
Maximum Speed For Each
Party in the Call
(in Kbps)
ISDN(H.320)
IP (H.323)
1 ISDN + 1 IP
2 ISDN + 1 IP
2 IP + 1 ISDN
256
128
256
256
128
256
3 lines with:
1 ISDN + 1 IP
2 ISDN + 1 IP
2 IP + 1 ISDN
384
192
256
384
192
256
4 lines with:
1 ISDN + 1 IP
2 ISDN + 1 IP
2 IP + 1 ISDN
384
256
256
384
256
256
2 lines with:
Multipoint Downspeeding
When necessary, the ViewStation EX system is able to downspeed
calls, meaning that it can dynamically reduce the data rate of the call
to accommodate incoming calls. For example, if there is an existing
point-to-point conference at 384 Kbps and an endpoint calls into the
conference at 128 Kbps, the conference systems will downspeed the
384 Kbps call to 128 Kbps so that all the sites are connected at 128
Kbps. Conversely, incoming IP and ISDN calls dialed at speeds
greater than the current conference speed are negotiated down to
the current conference speed and admitted into the conference (rate
matching).
However, if one of the systems cannot downspeed, the conference is
kept at the original data rate, while the incoming call keeps its own
data rate. The system with the lower data rate can send and receive
audio. It can also send video, but cannot receive video. For example,
if a system that is not capable of downspeeding connects at 384
kbps, the conference proceeds at 384 Kbps and admits the new
184
www.polycom.com
Chapter 6 - Using Advanced System Features
endpoint at 128 Kbps. The 128 Kbps endpoint will be able send and
receive audio. It can also send video, but it cannot receive video. It
can only see its own video instead.
Note
To indicate that a particular endpoint which cannot downspeed at
the correct data rate is admitted to the multipoint call as an audio
call only, the ViewStation EX MCU displays a picture of a telephone
in the screen area corresponding to that endpoint call.
Downspeeding calls, either IP or ISDN, to allow another endpoint to
be added to an existing call (Dial-In Calling) is supported for mixed
protocol calls with systems that are capable of downspeeding. For
more information about inbound calls, refer to Dial-In Calling
(Optional), on page 205. For mixed protocol calls, see Mixed
Protocol Dialing, on page 192.
For a 2 or 3-way conference, the maximum allowable downspeeding
rate is 256 Kbps for ISDN and 384 Kbps for IP. For a 4-way
conference, the maximum allowable downspeeding rate is 256 Kbps
for IP, and 128 Kbps if all calls are made using ISDN.
Downspeeding/Resynchronization Compatibility
Downspeeding or Resynchronizing with iPower
Your system has the ability to downspeed or resynchronize correctly
in an H.320 call with an iPower system and vice versa. The two
systems resynchronize the call if an ISDN line is lost during the call.
The call downspeeds in the event of a lower-speed, incoming call or
when necessary to add another outbound call to create a multipoint
conference.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
185
ViewStation EX User Guide
Downspeeding or Resynchronizing with RadVision via IP
Gateway
Your system has the ability to downspeed and resynchronize
correctly in an H.320 call with a RadVision system and vice versa.
The two systems resynchronize the call if an ISDN line is lost during
the call, if H.320 framing is lost, or if CRC errors are encountered
continuously. The call also downspeeds in the event of a
lower-speed, incoming call or when necessary to add another
outbound call to create a multipoint conference.
Multipoint Calls and Firewall Information
The following information specifies how many TCP and UDP ports
need to be opened through a firewall for multipoint calls.
The port assignment is defined in the Firewall & LAN Connection
screen, under Use Fixed Ports.
To define ports:
1.
Access the Firewall & LAN Connection screen by selecting
System Info > Admin Setup > LAN/H.323 > LAN/Intranet >
Firewall/LAN Connection.
2.
Select the option Use Fixed Ports.
3.
Assign the correct number of fixed ports for your multipoint
call. To obtain this information, refer to the table below.
Table 6-3. Firewall TCP/UDP Ports in Multipoint Calls
Number of Sites in
Call
TCP Ports
UDP Ports
2
3230-3231
3230-3235
3
3230-3233
3230-3241
4
3230-3235
3230-3247
Placing Multipoint Video Calls
There are several ways to place multipoint video calls:
186
www.polycom.com
Chapter 6 - Using Advanced System Features
❑ Using the user interface’s Manual Dialer (Video Phone). See
Using the Manual Dialer (Video Phone).
❑ Using a multi-site local Address Book Meeting entry. See Using
an Address Book Meeting Entry.
❑ Adding existing Address Book entries one at a time. See Using
the Address Book.
❑ Using a combination of Manual Dialer and Address Book
entries. See Using the Manual Dialer and the Address Book.
Note
In order to place multipoint calls and enable all multipoint-related
capabilities, you must upgrade your system to support multipoint
calls. For more information, refer to Upgrading the System for
Multipoint Calls in chapter 2.
Using the Manual Dialer (Video Phone)
The following explains how to place a multipoint call manually by
adding sites to your videoconference.
To place the first call:
a.
On the main screen, highlight the Video Call icon and press
the SELECT button on the remote control.
b. Use the numeric keypad on the remote control to enter the
number you want to dial in the highlighted field.
Note
When you enter a number using the remote control, you can
hear a voice confirmation of that number from your system.
This feature can be enabled on the General Setup screen by
selecting the Keypad Audio Confirmation option.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
187
ViewStation EX User Guide
If you need to enter alpha characters, press the AUTO
button on the remote control to bring up the on-screen
keyboard.
Tip
Enter a dot. To enter a dot, press the right button on the remote
control.
Shift key settings. The on-screen keyboard’s Shift key has three
settings:
- lower case: using the remote control, select the Shift key until
it turns into a greyish down arrow.
- upper case: using the remote control, select the Shift key until
it turns into a green up arrow. Only the next letter you enter is
capitalized.
- caps lock: select the Shift key twice. A lock symbol appears on
the key. All the letters are capitalized while the lock is visible.
c.
Use the arrow buttons on the remote control to highlight the
Speed icon on the screen and select the speed of your call
from the list that appears.
d. Use the arrow buttons on the remote control to highlight the
call type field (ISDN, IP, or AUTO). Press the SELECT
button on the remote control to toggle and select the proper
call type. If you select AUTO, the system will figure out
automatically which call type to choose based on the format
of the number you have entered.
e.
Press the green CALL•HANG-UP button on the remote
control to place your call. The number and the speed that
you are dialing appear at the top of the screen.
The call progress indicators on the lower left side of the
screen indicate that the call is going through.They change
progressively from gray to blue, yellow, orange, and green
as your call completes.
f.
188
When the call completes, the party you called appears on
the screen, and you appear in the picture-in-picture (PIP)
window at the lower right. If you have a two-monitor
www.polycom.com
Chapter 6 - Using Advanced System Features
system, the party you are calling appears on the main
monitor, and you appear on the second monitor.
To add sites to your video call:
a.
Press the CALL•HANG-UP button on the remote control.
The Call Hang-up Choices screen appears.
b. Highlight the Add a Video Call icon and press the SELECT
button on the remote control. The Video Phone screen
appears.
c.
Enter the number you want to dial or use Speed Dial in the
Address Book or Address Book entry. Press the
CALL•HANG-UP button on the remote control to place the
call. The video call connects.
d. Repeat steps a through c until all of the sites are connected.
Using an Address Book Meeting Entry
The following explains how to create a multipoint Address Book
meeting entry and place a multipoint call using that entry.
If you delete one of the single-site entries that make up one of your
multipoint meeting entries, the single-site (multipoint) entry is
automatically removed from your Address Book meeting entry.
To create a multipoint Address Book meeting entry:
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
1.
Highlight the New icon in the Address Book and press the
SELECT button on the remote control. The New Address Book
Entry screen appears.
2.
Highlight the Multi-Site icon and press the SELECT button on
the remote control. The Multi-Site Meeting screen appears
3.
Use the on-screen keyboard to enter a name for the meeting.
4.
Highlight the Add icon to add parties to your call from the
Address Book. The Adding To Meeting screen appears.
189
ViewStation EX User Guide
5.
Highlight the entry you want to add and press the SELECT
button on the remote control. The multipoint Address Book
entry screen appears with that entry added.
6.
Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until you have entered all of the sites for
the call.
7.
If the site being added is a OneDial number (meaning that it has
both IP and ISDN numbers displayed as one entry), the user can
change the call type of the individual entry by selecting the
appropriate type in the Type field.
8.
Select a dialing speed for the call in the Speed field. All of the
sites in the call will be dialed at this speed regardless of the
dialing speeds set for the individual Address Book entries.
9.
Highlight the Save icon and press the SELECT button on the
remote control to return to the main Address Book screen.
To place a multipoint meeting call from the Address Book:
190
1.
Select the multipoint meeting entry you created in the Address
Book.
2.
Press the CALL•HANG-UP button. All of the sites are called
automatically.
www.polycom.com
Chapter 6 - Using Advanced System Features
Using the Address Book
The following explains how to place a multipoint call by adding
existing local or Global Address Book sites one at a time.
To place the first call:
1.
Select the Address Book icon on the main screen and press the
SELECT button on the remote control. The main Address Book
screen appears.
2.
Highlight the first site name and select it with the remote control
SELECT button.
3.
If the Address Book entry for that site is not a OneDial number
(both IP and ISDN numbers displayed as a single entry), the
number is being dialed.
If the Address Book entry is a OneDial number, then the call is
dialed based on the Primary Call Type Choice option (Admin
Setup > LAN/H.323 > Global Address > Preferences >
Advanced Preferences). If the primary call type is IP, then the
IP number is dialed. If the primary call type is Manual, a dialog
box appears asking you to select either IP or ISDN. Highlight
the appropriate protocol and select it with the SELECT button
on the remote control. The site number is automatically dialed.
To add sites to your video call:
1.
Press the MENU button on the remote control to go back to the
main screen.
2.
To add subsequent sites, repeat steps 1 through 3 from the above
section describing how to place the first call until all sites are
connected.
Using the Manual Dialer and the Address Book
This method is a combination of Manual Dialer and Address Book
dialing. Refer to Using the Manual Dialer (Video Phone), on page
187 and to Using the Address Book, on page 191.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
191
ViewStation EX User Guide
Mixed Protocol Dialing
Mixed Protocol Dialing allows users with IP (H.323) and ISDN
(H.320) systems to participate in a multipoint videoconference at the
same time. With this feature, videoconferencing is not limited to
either H.320-only calls or H.323-only calls. All calls are connected at
the same speed. Currently, downspeeding is automatically
performed when necessary.
Mixed Protocol Dialing takes advantage of OneDial by allowing
endpoints to dial your system by name from the Global Address
Book without having to worry about which number to dial or which
dialing protocol to use. For more information about OneDial, refer
to the Integrators’ Reference Manual for ViewStation EX, ViewStation
FX, and VS4000.
Note
This feature is optional. In order to enable this feature and all
multipoint-related capabilities, you must upgrade your system to
support multipoint calls. For more information, refer to Upgrading
the System for Multipoint Calls in chapter 2.
Different Ways to Place a Mixed Protocol Call
A Mixed Protocol call can be placed in one of the following five
ways using the ViewStation user interface:
❑ Using the Manual Dialer (Video Phone screen). With this
method, the user establishes the first call, then adds a second,
and possibly a third call. The Manual Dialer allows the user to
select IP or ISDN. For more information about how to place this
type of call, refer to Using the Manual Dialer (Video Phone), on
page 187.
❑ Creating an Address Book meeting entry. This entry consists of
mixed ISDN and IP sub-entries. The user can decide what type
of call will be made when creating or editing the entry. For more
information about how to place this type of call, refer to Using
an Address Book Meeting Entry, on page 189.
192
www.polycom.com
Chapter 6 - Using Advanced System Features
❑ Using the Global Address Book. The user establishes the first
call, adds a second, and maybe a third call using the Global
Address Book. If the selected entry is a OneDial number, make
sure the Primary Call Type Choice option on the Advanced
Address Book Preferences screen (Admin Setup > LAN/H.323
> Global Address > Preferences > Advanced Preferences) is
configured to be Manual. Every time an additional call is
added, the user is prompted with the message “dialing IP or
ISDN”. If the selected entry is not a OneDial number, the
Primary Call Type does not affect how calls are made. For more
information about how to place this type of call, refer to Using
the Address Book, on page 191.
❑ Using a combination of Manual Dialer and Global Address
Book. Establish the first call, then add a second and a third call
using the Manual Dialer and the Global Address Book. For more
information about how to place this type of call, refer to Using
the Manual Dialer and the Address Book, on page 191.
❑ Through Dial-In Calling. A mixed protocol call can also be
created if the user is already in a point-to-point call (IP or ISDN)
and the user receives an incoming call that uses the other
protocol (IP or ISDN). For more information about the Dial-In
Calling feature, refer to the following section Dial-In Calling
(Optional), on page 205.
Additional Information
Supported ViewStation EX Functionality
❑ Dual streams functionality when using Visual Concert FX is
supported in mixed protocol calls.
❑ Downspeeding calls, either H.323 or H.320, to allow another
endpoint to be added is supported for mixed calls with systems
that are capable of downspeeding.
❑ PowerPoint presentations, snapshots, PolycomSnap, and
interoperability with Visual Concert PC are supported in mixed
protocol calls.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
193
ViewStation EX User Guide
❑ Far-end camera control is supported in presentation or
full-screen mode with Polycom endpoints in mixed protocol
calls.
❑ Audio (POTS) add-ins are supported in mixed protocol calls.
❑ All multipoint modes are supported in mixed protocol calls.
❑ Chair control is supported in mixed protocol conferences.
Current Limitations
❑ Once an H.323 endpoint is added to a bridge call, any open
T.120 sessions from H.320 calls will be terminated. T.120 is not
supported in mixed bridge calls.
❑ In a 336-Kbps multipoint call between an H.320 and an H.323
systems, the H.320 system transmits and receives 30 frames per
second. However, because of the flow control threshold, the
H.323 system can only transmit 15 frames, but it can still receive
30 frames.
Multipoint Viewing Modes
You can select four different viewing modes for the remote sites in a
multipoint call from the Multipoint Setup screen:
❑ Automatic Mode
❑ Discussion Mode
❑ Presentation Mode
❑ Full Screen Mode
Note
This feature is optional. In order to enable this feature and all
multipoint-related capabilities, you must upgrade your system to
support multipoint calls. For more information, refer to Upgrading
the System for Multipoint Calls.
194
www.polycom.com
Chapter 6 - Using Advanced System Features
To access the Multipoint Setup screen:
On a system with IP only, select System Info > Admin Setup >
Multipoint Setup or select System Info > User Setup > Multipoint
Mode.
On a system with an ISDN network interface, select System Info >
Admin Setup > Video Network > Multipoint Setup.
Mode Description
The default mode is Auto, which switches between Discussion and
Presentation modes automatically, depending on the
conversational style of your meeting.
Following is a description of the four multipoint modes and the
Auto Answer Multipoint setting:
❑ Auto—In Auto mode, the system determines the optimal
viewing mode based on the interaction between the sites. If
more than one site is talking at the same time, the system uses
Discussion mode.
If one site is talking uninterrupted, the system uses
Presentation mode. The system takes about 15 seconds to
decide whether there is a single presenter before switching to
Presentation mode. If one of the far sites interrupts the
presenter for several seconds during Presentation mode, the
system immediately switches to Discussion mode.
❑ Discussion—In Discussion mode, all of the sites can see
everyone in the meeting at the same time. This feature is
sometimes referred to as Continuous Presence mode. You see
yourself as one of the sites. Your picture might be slightly
delayed if you are in a multipoint call. This is normal. The far
sites hear your voice synchronized with your motion.
If you are using a single-monitor system, sites appear on screen
in as many windows as there are sites in the call. If you are using
a dual-monitor system in a four-way call, the near site (you)
appears in the second television monitor and the far sites appear
in windows on the first television monitor. If you are using a
dual-monitor system in a three-way call, each far site appears
full screen on each monitor and the near site appear in PIP
window on the main monitor.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
195
ViewStation EX User Guide
❑ Presentation—In Presentation mode (also called
voice-activated switching), the person who is speaking appears
full screen to the far sites. If you are using a single-monitor
system, the speaker or presenter appears full screen on your
monitor.
Your picture automatically appears in a PIP window when you
raise your remote control. If you are using a dual-monitor
system, the person speaking appears in the main monitor, and
the other parties appear in windows on the second monitor.
❑ Full Screen—In Full Screen mode, every site in the call sees the
speaker full screen.
❑ Auto Answer Multipoint—This setting is used to determine
how the system will handle an incoming call in a multipoint
videoconference. This setting only matters if the system is in a
call.
Select the appropriate option from the drop-down menu in the
Auto Answer Multipoint field. These options are No, Yes, and
Do Not Disturb and are described below.
196
•
No: If Auto Answer Multipoint is set to No and there is an
incoming call, the user will be prompted with a message
“You have a video call. Would you like to answer?" This
message can be followed by a far-site video number and a
far-site name if they are available. If the user selects Yes, the
call will be added into the ongoing conference. If the user
selects No, the call will be rejected. The factory default is set
to No.
•
Yes: If Auto Answer Multipoint is set to Yes, any incoming
call will be connected automatically. The screen will split
into a multipoint call progress screen as the incoming call is
answered.
•
Do Not Disturb: If Auto Answer Multipoint is set to Do
Not Disturb, the user is not notified of the incoming call.
The site which placed the call receives a Far Site Busy code
(H.320) or Call Rejected (H.323).
www.polycom.com
Chapter 6 - Using Advanced System Features
Switching Modes
To switch multipoint meeting modes:
1.
From the main calling screen, select System Info > User Setup.
Note
If you are switching modes during a multipoint call, press the
MENU button on the remote control to go to the main calling screen.
2.
Select the MP Mode field. The Multipoint Setup screen
appears.
3.
Select Auto, Discussion, Presentation, or Full Screen mode.
4.
Press the MENU button on the remote control until you return
to the main screen.
Multipoint Conference Password
A multipoint conference password is sometimes required for calls
dialed into your MCU or dialed out to a third-party MCU. Your
system can be configured to send or set the Meeting Password as
the multipoint conference password to the MCU.
Note
This feature is optional. In order to enable this feature and all
multipoint-related capabilities, you must upgrade your system to
support multipoint calls. For more information, refer to Upgrading
the System for Multipoint Calls.
The Meeting Password works with the ViewStation EX system’s
embedded MCU and other external bridges that support meeting
passwords.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
197
ViewStation EX User Guide
Setting Up the Meeting Password
To set the Meeting Password as your multipoint conference
password:
1.
From the main screen, select System Info > User Setup (or
System Info > Admin Setup > Security).
2.
In the User Setup screen, under Meeting Password, enter your
password.
Your configured Meeting Password is automatically and
transparently sent as the multipoint conference password to the
multipoint conference.
Using the Meeting Password
The Meeting Password can be used for the following purposes:
❑ To provide dial-in protection for the ViewStation EX MCU. If
dial-in password protection has been set on the MCU, all the
sites dialing into that MCU need to provide a password in order
to join the videoconference. Refer to MCU Meeting Password
Protection in Multipoint Dial-In Calls on page 199.
❑ To be able to dial into an MCU or a bridge that has a password
set (see above item). The site calling into the MCU needs to send
the established Meeting Password to the MCU.
❑ To view slides on the Web interface. Refer to Viewing a Slide
Presentation on page 238.
❑ To view a meeting/stream on the Web interface. Refer to
Viewing a Meeting on page 240.
❑ To access Closed Caption on the Web interface. Refer to
PolycomSnap on page 243.
198
www.polycom.com
Chapter 6 - Using Advanced System Features
MCU Meeting Password Protection in Multipoint Dial-In Calls
The following table describes how the ViewStation EX MCU
handles the Meeting Password as the multipoint conference
password when dial-in sites are calling into the ongoing conference,
based on the Auto Answer Multipoint and the Meeting Password
settings.
To access Auto Answer Multipoint:
Select System Info > User Setup or System Info > Admin Setup >
General Setup.
For information about Auto Answer Multipoint, see on page 207.
For information about dial-in calls in multipoint videoconferences,
refer to Dial-In Calling (Optional) on page 205.
Table 6-4. MCU Meeting Password Protection
Auto Answer Multipoint and MCU
Meeting Password Settings
Resulting MCU Handling of Meeting
Password
Auto Answer Multipoint mode is set to Do
Not Disturb.
The ViewStation EX MCU will not
acknowledge any incoming, dial-in calls. The
MCU behaves as if it does not have a Meeting
Password .
-andA Meeting Password is set on the MCU.
Auto Answer Multipoint mode is set to No.
-andA Meeting Password is set on the MCU.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
The ViewStation EX MCU behaves as if it
does not have a Meeting Password.
The MCU ViewStation EX should answer any
incoming, dial-in calls manually. This means
that the user will be prompted with the
message “You have a video call. Would you
like to answer?” and can answer Yes or No.
This message can be followed by a far-site
video number and a far-site name if they are
available.
199
ViewStation EX User Guide
Table 6-4. MCU Meeting Password Protection (Continued)
Auto Answer Multipoint and MCU
Meeting Password Settings
Resulting MCU Handling of Meeting
Password
Auto Answer Multipoint is set to Yes.
The general rule is that all the sites which dial
into the ViewStation EX MCU need to provide
a Meeting Password to that MCU.
However there are two exceptions:
Exception 1— If the first site has been in a
call with the MCU for over 30 seconds and the
second site calls into the MCU:
>> The first site will not be prompted for a
password. The second site will be prompted
for the MCU password if the Meeting
Password has been set on the MCU.
If the second site dials in within 30 seconds of
the original connection between the MCU
and the first site, both sites will be prompted
for the MCU password if the Meeting
Password on MCU has been set.
Before the password is validated, the MCU
sees video of the far site and the far site itself
is in a loopback mode. If the password
provided is valid, the far site should be able to
join the conference. If the password is invalid,
cancelled, or times out, the far site will be
hung up. Far sites are given one chance to
enter the correct password.
Exception 2— When sites that are not able
to send passwords dial into a ViewStation EX
MCU call which has a meeting password set:
>> A message appears on the MCU (“You
have a video call that is not providing a
password. Would you like to answer?” ). This
message might be followed by a far-site video
number and a far site name if they are
available. The thirty-second rule explained
under Exception 1 applies here too.
200
www.polycom.com
Chapter 6 - Using Advanced System Features
Multipoint Cascading Capabilities
ViewStation EX systems can be cascaded with other ViewStation EX,
ViewStation FX, or VS4000 systems to place a multipoint ISDN
(H.320) call, a H.323 (IP) call, or a mixed protocol (ISDN and IP) call
with up to ten sites.
Note
This feature is optional. In order to enable this feature and all
multipoint-related capabilities, you must upgrade your system to
support multipoint calls. For more information, refer to Upgrading
the System for Multipoint Calls.
The Cascading feature allows to add more video and audio
participants to a multipoint video call, without the need for a bridge.
Each of the second-level ViewStation EX systems in a four-site
multipoint call can call up to two more video and one audio site. The
called placed to the audio site is a POTS call. Up to ten total video
sites and four total audio sites can participate in the call using the
built-in MCU.
Figure 6-1. Cascading 10 Sites in a Multipoint Call
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
201
ViewStation EX User Guide
Chair Control
General Information
Chair Control is a feature that allows any ViewStation EX in a
multipoint call to do the following:
❑ Select which sites to view
❑ Select which site broadcasts its video to all other sites
❑ Disconnect sites from a multipoint call
Any site in the call can access the Chair Control screen. However,
only one site can have chair control at a time. That site must release
the chair control before another site can acquire it.
Chair Control is not supported in mixed protocol conferences. For
more information, refer to Mixed Protocol Dialing on page 192.
Note
This feature is optional. In order to enable this feature and all
multipoint-related capabilities, you must upgrade your system to
support multipoint calls. For more information, refer to Upgrading
the System for Multipoint Calls.
202
www.polycom.com
Chapter 6 - Using Advanced System Features
To access the Chair Control screen, you must be in a multipoint call.
Press the NEAR button on the remote control and select the Gavel
icon to access the following screen:
Figure 6-2. Chair Control Screen
The icons on the left of the screen are Chair Control Actions. The
bottom right-center icons are the sites in the call. Use the right and
left arrow keys on the remote control to select sites in the call.
If there are more than three sites in the call, you can scroll to the right
to see those sites. Use the up and down arrow keys to select actions
to perform on the highlighted site.
You can perform the following actions in chair control.
Actions Available to All Sites
Any site in the multipoint call can perform these actions:
❑ Acquire chair—Enables Chair Control for your site. Other sites
in the call cannot acquire the chair until you release it. If your
site has the chair, a small gavel appears in chair control mode. If
you attempt to acquire the chair while another site has it, a
message appears telling you that another site has the chair.
❑ View Site—Displays the selected site in the live window. View
Site overrides voice activated switching and any broadcaster
actions from the chair. It does not affect video at other sites.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
203
ViewStation EX User Guide
❑ Stop Viewing Site—Causes your system to go back to
voice-activated switching or broadcaster actions as set by the
chair.
❑ Make me the Broadcaster—Sends a request to the chair control
site to force all sites to view your site.
Actions Only Available to the Chair Controller
Only the site with the chair can perform these actions:
❑ Release Chair—Disables chair control for your site. Another
site in the call can now acquire the chair.
❑ Select Broadcaster—Forces all sites to view the selected site,
and disables voice-activated switching.
❑ Voice Switching—Enables voice-activated switching. The site
that is speaking appears in full-screen mode to all sites in the
call.
❑ Disconnect Site—Disconnects the selected site from the
multipoint call.
❑ End the Conference—Disconnects all sites in the multipoint
call.
204
www.polycom.com
Chapter 6 - Using Advanced System Features
Dial-In Calling (Optional)
The Dial-In Calling feature allows users who are already in a
videoconference to answer and add an incoming video call. Thus, an
established point-to-point call receiving and accepting an incoming
call becomes a multipoint videoconference.
Furthermore, if the incoming call is of a different type than the
already-established call or calls, the videoconference is now a mixed
protocol call. For example, the established call could be IP and the
incoming call could be ISDN. For more information about mixed
protocol calls, refer to Mixed Protocol Dialing, on page 192.
Downspeeding, the ability to reduce the data rate of the call
dynamically, is performed by the system when necessary. Incoming
calls (both IP and ISDN) dialed at speeds greater than the current
conference speed will be negotiated down to the current conference
speed and admitted into the conference (rate matching).
If a password has been set on the ViewStation EX system that acts as
the MCU, a Meeting Password will be required from each site
calling into the conference. For more information, refer to
Multipoint Conference Password on page 197.
Note
This feature is optional. In order to enable this feature and all
multipoint-related capabilities, you must upgrade your system to
support multipoint calls. For more information, refer to Upgrading
the System for Multipoint Calls.
Dial-In Calling Scenarios
With an Existing Point-to-Point Call
The following table assumes that there is already an established
point-to-point call (1 MCU and 1 site).
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
205
ViewStation EX User Guide
Note
The MCU is embedded in the ViewStation EX system.
The table describes the number of incoming calls that can be
separately or simultaneously received by the ViewStation EX
embedded MCU (1 site) already in a point-to-point call with another
site (1 site) and the resulting number of sites for that multipoint call.
For example, an incoming call (1 site) to an existing point-to-point
call (2 sites, one of which is the MCU) results in a 3-way multipoint
call.
Table 6-5. Dial-In Calling with an Existing Point-to-Point Call
Number of Incoming Calls to
MCU
Result
1
3-way multipoint call
2
4-way multipoint call
2 simultaneous
4-way multipoint call
With no Existing Point-to-Point Call
The table describes the number of calls that can be separately or
simultaneously placed to the ViewStation EX embedded MCU (1
site) and the resulting number of sites for that multipoint call. For
example, three incoming calls (3 sites) to the MCU (1 site) result in a
4-way multipoint call.
Table 6-6. Dial-In Calling with no Existing Point-to-Point Call
206
Number of Incoming Calls to
MCU
Result
1
1 point-to-point call (2-way call)
2
3-way multipoint call
3
4-way multipoint call
2 simultaneous
3-way multipoint call
3 simultaneous
4-way multipoint call
www.polycom.com
Chapter 6 - Using Advanced System Features
Auto Answer Multipoint Mode Configuration
It is necessary to set the Auto Answer Multipoint mode to determine
how the system will handle an incoming call.
Note
This feature is optional. In order to enable this feature and all
multipoint-related capabilities, you must upgrade your system to
support multipoint calls. For more information, refer to Upgrading
the System for Multipoint Calls.
Setting the Auto Answer Multipoint Mode
To set the Auto Answer Multipoint mode:
1.
Select System Info > User Setup or select System Info > Admin
Setup > General Setup.
2.
In the Admin Setup screen (or the General Setup screen), select
the appropriate option from the drop-down menu in the Auto
Answer Multipoint field. These options are No, Yes, and Do
Not Disturb and are described below.
Note
All the following information assumes that there is already an
ongoing call between two sites or possibly three sites.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
•
Yes—If the Auto Answer mode is set to Yes, any incoming
call will be connected automatically. The default Auto
Answer Multipoint mode is No.
•
No—If the Auto Answer mode is No and there is another
incoming call, the user will be prompted with a message
207
ViewStation EX User Guide
“You have a video call. Would you like to answer?” If the
user selects Yes, this call will be added into the ongoing
conference. If the user selects No, the call will be rejected.
•
208
Do Not Disturb—If the Auto Answer mode is Do Not
Disturb, the user is not notified when there is an incoming
call. The site which placed the call will receive either a “call
rejected” or “dialed site busy” message.
www.polycom.com
Chapter 6 - Using Advanced System Features
Conference on Demand (COD)
This feature allows you to bring multiple endpoints together in a
videoconference on an unscheduled basis. With Conference on
Demand, users can place multipoint video calls to remote
participants by only using their names and/or the numbers that
correspond to those remote locations. Users don’t need to save the
meeting name before making the meeting call.
Note
Release 5.0 of PathNavigator software, which supports ad-hoc
multipoint videoconferencing, is required for Conference on
Demand (COD) to work on your system.
Implementation of Conference on Demand
Users who want to use COD using sites from their Global Address
Book (GAB) that have both ISDN and IP numbers must decide
whether the number they are adding for that site is ISDN or IP.
Users who want to use COD using GAB sites that are ISDN numbers
must have their MGC located in the same country code and same
area code as their system. Otherwise, the numbers sent to the MGC
to dial the far endpoints in the conference may not be dialed
correctly. The Global Address Book normalizes global numbers to
the endpoints for that endpoints location.
The endpoint that placed the COD call cannot add a site that
dropped out of the call. All calls have to be dropped and the COD
needs to be initiated again. At this point, there is limited feedback
information available to the user who placed a COD call as to
whether the MGC has enough ports to complete the call.
There is limited feedback information available to the user who
places the COD call as to why any site in the conference failed to
connect to the MGC.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
209
ViewStation EX User Guide
COD User Interface Screens
The COD-related user interface screens include the Multipoint Call
screen, the Video Phone screen, and the Gateway and Gatekeeper
screens.
Multipoint Call Screen
The Multipoint Call screen allows you to create a new meeting
entry or edit an existing meeting entry. You can make calls directly
from this screen without the need of saving the meeting name.
When the calling speed is 2 x 56 or 2 x 64, the screen displays two
edit lines for manual entry. For any other speed, the screen displays
one edit line for manual entry.
On this screen, you can:
❑ Enter a number or name from the manual entry edit box.
❑ Select an address book entry by clicking the Address button.
The site can be added to the meeting participants list.
❑ Remove a currently selected item from the meeting participants
list by clicking the Delete button.
❑ Change the calling speed by selecting another speed from the
available call speed list.
❑ Make calls from this screen by pressing the CALL-HANG-UP
button on the remote control.
❑ Save the meeting name by clicking the Save button.
❑ Leave the screen using the Menu icon without saving the
meeting name.
Video Phone Screen
The MultiPoint field can be used to navigate to the Multipoint Call
screen.
210
www.polycom.com
Chapter 6 - Using Advanced System Features
Gatekeeper Screen
If PathNavigator is used, three options are displayed under Dial
Multipoint Calls from PathNavigator?:
❑
Never
❑
Always
❑
When calling 4 sites or more
Figure 6-3. Gatekeeper Screen
The default is When calling 4 sites or more. You can enable or
disable When calling 4 sites or more, if PathNavigator is available.
If this option is enabled, all the meeting calls are made through the
external MCU. If it is disabled, all the meeting calls with three sites
are made through the system’s internal MCU or the meeting calls
cannot be placed when the sites are over three.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
211
ViewStation EX User Guide
Streaming Video
Using the streaming feature on the ViewStation EX system allows
other videoconferencing participants to watch your presentations or
meetings live from a PC.
Enabling Streaming
To enable streaming on your system:
1.
To set your system to allow streaming, select System Info >
Admin Setup > LAN/H.323 > Streaming.
2.
Enable the Allow Streaming option.
Figure 6-4. Streaming Screen
Note
Once you have enabled streaming, a Call Type icon appears on your
main screen indicating that you are ready to start streaming.
212
www.polycom.com
Chapter 6 - Using Advanced System Features
Configuring Streaming Options
You can now configure the following options on the Streaming
screen.
❑ Speed—Press the SELECT button on the remote control and
select the speed at which you want to stream video.
❑ IP Multicast Address—A default address is entered for you
based on your serial number. This ensures that you do not have
the same multicast address as another system. You can change
this address.
❑ Number of Router Hops—Enter the number of routers you
want the streaming video to pass through. This allows you to
control who can see your streaming video.
❑ Audio Port—This is a fixed port. This may be changed by your
network manager if a user needs to go through the firewall.
❑ Video Port—This is a fixed port. This may be changed by your
network manager if a user needs to go through the firewall.
❑ Allow Streaming—When this option is enabled, the icon on the
main screen of the user interface changes from Telephone to
Call Type. Click Call Type to access the Streaming Call screen.
In the Streaming Call screen, you can set a Meeting Password.
Click the Start icon to start streaming.
❑ Enable Streaming Announcement—When this option is
enabled, the names of users logged on to your system are
displayed on screen.
❑ Restore Defaults—Selecting this option restores the Speed, IP
Multicast Address, Number of Router Hops, Audio Port, and
Video Port defaults.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
213
ViewStation EX User Guide
Configuring Streaming for Apple QuickTime
Enabling and Starting Streaming on the ViewStation EX
To enable streaming on your system:
1.
Go to the Streaming screen (System Info > Admin Setup >
LAN/H.323 > Streaming).
2.
Make sure that Enable Streaming Announcement is enabled. It
should be set by default.
3.
Enable Allow Streaming.
To start sending a stream:
1.
From the main screen, select Call Type.
2.
Select Streaming Call. Decide if you need a password.
3.
Click Start. A Streaming icon is now displayed on the upper left
corner of your television screen.
You can start streaming before or after you place a video call. If you
are streaming a presentation, you can go ahead and start the
presentation immediately.
Viewing Streaming with Apple QuickTime on the PC
To view the stream with Apple Quick Time on your PC:
1.
Make sure you have enabled and started streaming on your
ViewStation EX system as described in “Enabling and Starting
Streaming on the ViewStation EX.”
2.
To view streaming using Apple QuickTime:
a.
Open a Web browser.
b. Enter the IP address of your ViewStation EX system in the
browser address field.
214
www.polycom.com
Chapter 6 - Using Advanced System Features
c.
Click on the View a Meeting icon.
d. In the View a Meeting screen, click the View Streaming
Video icon.
e.
Enter your user name and password when prompted.
f.
Apple QuickTime will launch within your browser.
Note
If you do not have Apple QuickTime installed, you will be
prompted to install it from the Polycom/QuickTime Web page.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 after installation.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
215
ViewStation EX User Guide
Data Conferencing
The ViewStation EX system is T.120-compliant and supports data
conferencing when paired with either a ShowStation IP or Microsoft
NetMeeting.
Data conferencing features are available only on point-to-point
video calls or with external H.320 bridges/MCUs that support this
feature.
Data conferencing is only available during H.320 calls and must be
supported by far site systems.
To access the Data Conference screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > Data Conference. The Data
Conference screen appears.
Figure 6-5. Data Conference Screen
From this screen, you can enable data conferencing through
Microsoft NetMeeting or a ShowStation IP as described in the
following section.
Note
The Data Conference screen will display the IP address or name of
the data conferencing device. This would be the IP address of the
216
www.polycom.com
Chapter 6 - Using Advanced System Features
StreamStation, WebStation or ShowStation itself, or, the IP address
of the PC on which Netmeeting is running.
Enabling Data Conferencing on your System
The following explains how to enable the data conferencing
capabilities on the ViewStation EX system.
To enable data conferencing:
1.
Select System Info > Admin Setup > Data Conference. The
Data Conference screen appears.
2.
Enable either the NetMeeting or ShowStation IP option. The
ShowStation IP option appears only if a ShowStation is
connected to the ViewStation EX or the LAN.
Note
Data conferencing is only available during H.320 calls and must be
supported by far-site systems
Using a ShowStation IP
For more information on ShowStation IP, see ShowStation IP on
page 43.
Using Microsoft NetMeeting
For more information about data conferencing using NetMeeting,
refer to NetMeeting on page 245 in chapter 7.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
217
ViewStation EX User Guide
People+Content
The Polycom People+Content (P+C) standard, implemented on the
ViewStation EX, ViewStation FX, VS4000, MGC 5.0, iPower 5.0, and
PathNavigator products, allows live video and live graphics to be
transmitted and received with all the above-listed Polycom
products.
In a multipoint videoconference, all endpoints see the same content
video, and the people video can be displayed in either discussion or
voice-switched mode, depending on the MCU settings.
If all endpoints (ViewStation EX, ViewStation FX, VS4000, or
iPower) to which your system is connected support P+C, then the
systems automatically enable this feature. The MGC has to be
manually configured prior to the start of a conference to support this
new standard.
Compatibility
Radvision Onlan and ECS gatekeepers do not support
People+Content in routed mode. The People+Content format is not
supported through the Radvision Onlan 2.2 and the Radvision ECS
2.02 gatekeepers if the gatekeeper is set for routed mode. The
People+Content format functions in direct mode.
People+Content and PathNavigator compatibility. ViewStation EX
systems with version 5.0 can only send the previous version of dual
streams to another ViewStation EX, FX, or VS4000 system with
version 5.0 when registered with PathNavigator 1.10. ViewStation
EX systems 5.0 cannot send dual streams to an iPower version 5.0
when registered to PathNavigator version 1.10. ViewStation EX, FX,
and VS4000 systems send the new People+Content format to other
ViewStation EX, FX, VS4000, or iPower systems if they are registered
to PathNavigator 5.0.
218
www.polycom.com
7
Using the System with a PC
This chapter describes how to use your ViewStation EX system in
conjunction with a PC.
Topics in This Chapter
The following topics are included in this chapter.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
Topic
Description
Page
Before you
Begin
This section explains how to set up and
connect your PC to a ViewStation EX
system and how to configure your Web
browser as a prerequisite to be able to use
the system Web interface.
220
Accessing the
Web Interface
This section explains how to access your
system’s main Web screen.
228
Features of
the Web
Interface
This section explains how to place a call,
load and select a presentation, view a slide
presentation, and view a meeting, and use
Closed Caption.
229
PC-Resident
Applications
This section explains how to access and
PolycomSnap, NetMeeting, and the
Polycom Management Access Control
Wizard.
243
System Setup
and Remote
Management
This section covers information about the
Web interface system setup and remote
management tools.
253
Streaming
This sections provides instructions about
streaming from the Web interface.
261
219
ViewStation EX User Guide
Before you Begin
In order to access and use the ViewStation EX Web interface, you
need to:
❑ .Set up and connect your PC to a ViewStation EX system. See the
following sections:
•
PC Requirements
•
Connecting the PC and the ViewStation EX to the LAN
•
Connecting the PC Directly to a ViewStation EX not on the
LAN
❑ Configure your Web browser to work correctly with the
ViewStation EX Web interface. See Configuring your Web
Browser.
PC Requirements
You need the following items to connect the PC to the ViewStation
EX system:
❑ Microsoft Windows 98 or newer
❑ Desktop PC connected to a LAN or laptop with a 10 Mbps or 100
Mbps Ethernet LAN card
❑ Ethernet cable
❑ Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher (recommended) or
Netscape 6.0 or higher
Connecting the PC and the ViewStation EX to the LAN
1.
To connect the system to the LAN:
a.
220
Insert one end of the provided orange RJ-45 cable into the
orange LAN port on the back of the system.
www.polycom.com
Chapter 7 - Using the System with a PC
b. Insert the other end of the cable into a port on the LAN. This
connection is shown in the QuickStart.
2.
To connect the PC to the system:
a.
Insert one end of the provided blue RJ-45 cable into the blue
PC port on the back of the system.
b. Insert the other end of the cable into the Ethernet port on
your computer.
3.
Power on the system.
4.
Select System Info > Admin Setup > LAN/H.323 >
LAN/Intranet to configure the system’s LAN/H.323 settings.
The LAN & Intranet screen appears.
Figure 7-1. LAN & Intranet Screen
5.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
In the LAN & Intranet screen, configure the system DHCP
settings, as follows:
221
ViewStation EX User Guide
If your LAN uses DHCP:
a.
Select Client in the DHCP field to enable your system to
obtain an IP address from a server on your network.
b. After you have changed the DHCP settings, a message lets
you know that your system will have to be reset in order to
save the changes. Select Yes. Another message informs you
that your system is about to restart.
c.
Select the System Info icon to go to the System Information
screen. Your system's IP address should appear in the IP
Address field.
Note
If the IP address field displays “...waiting...,” your system did
not get an address from a server on your LAN. Check the LAN
connection on the back of your system and try again. When
your system is properly connected, the green light on the
connector is illuminated and the orange light is blinking.
If your LAN does not use DHCP:
a.
Select Off in the DHCP field and manually enter the IP
address, subnet mask, and gateway address provided by
your system administrator.
b. On the PC side: Once your PC is connected to the your
system, make sure it is properly configured. This can be a
rather complex process that should be best handled by your
network administrator.
c.
222
After you have changed the DHCP settings, a message lets
you know that your system will have to be reset in order to
save the changes. Select Yes. Another message informs you
that your system is about to restart. For instructions about
how to access your system’s Web interface, proceed to
Accessing the Web Interface on page 228.
www.polycom.com
Chapter 7 - Using the System with a PC
Connecting the PC Directly to a ViewStation EX not on the
LAN
Complete the following steps to connect your PC to a ViewStation
EX system that is not on the LAN:
1.
To connect your PC to your system:
a.
Insert one end of the provided blue RJ-45 cable into the blue
PC port on the back of your system.
b. Insert the other end of the cable into the Ethernet port on
your computer.
2.
Power on your system.
3.
To connect to your desktop or laptop computer, you need to set
your system as a DHCP server. This assumes that the option
Allow System to be a DHCP Server was enabled during
software upgrade of your system. Enable DHCP Server as
follows:
a.
Select System Info > Admin Setup > LAN/H.323 >
LAN/Intranet on the user interface.
b. Press the up arrow on the remote control to go to the DHCP
field and set it to Server. The following message will
appear: “The system will now issue IP addresses to other
PCs on the LAN. Continue?”
Caution
Do not use this setting if your system is on a LAN with other
computers. If you do, it will provide IP addresses to the other
computers even though the LAN already has a DHCP server.
Your IT personnel and system administrators will have to repair
any network problems this causes.
c.
Select Yes if you are absolutely certain you want to set your
system as a DHCP server.
d. Press Menu. The following message will appear: “Power
must be reset to save changes. Continue?” Select Yes.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
223
ViewStation EX User Guide
e.
Your system will automatically restart. It will now act as a
DHCP server and will provide IP addresses to one or more
PCs.
4.
Go to the System Information screen. You should see an IP
address of 1.1.1.2, which is the IP address of your system.
5.
Once you get an IP address, go to your PC and follow these
instructions:
For Windows 98:
a.
Right-click the Network Neighborhood icon, and then
right-click Properties.
b. When the Network box appears, select the Configuration
tab, then double-click TCP/IP.
c.
Select the IP Address tab. Make sure the Obtain an IP
Address Automatically button is selected. Then click OK.
For Windows NT 4.0:
a.
Right-click the Network Neighborhood icon, and then
right-click Properties.
b. When the Network screen appears, select the Protocols tab,
then double-click TCP/IP Protocol.
c.
Select the IP Address tab. Make sure the Obtain an IP
Address Automatically button is selected. Then click OK.
For Windows 2000:
a.
Right-click the My Network Places icon, and then
right-click Properties.
b. In the Network and Dial-up Connections window,
right-click Local Area Connection, and select Properties.
c.
224
In the Local Area Connection Properties window,
double-click Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
www.polycom.com
Chapter 7 - Using the System with a PC
d. In the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window, make
sure the Obtain an IP Address Automatically button is
selected. Then click OK.
6.
Restart your PC. For instructions about how to access your
system’s Web interface, proceed to the next section.
Configuring your Web Browser
In order for the ViewStation FX or VS4000 Web interface to work
properly, you must configure your Web browser (Internet Explorer
or Netscape) as described in this section.
Internet Explorer Configuration
Correct configuration of Internet Explorer requires that you allow
cookies and force pages to be reloaded every time. The following
instructions are for Internet Explorer 5.5 and higher.
To force pages to be reloaded:
1.
Launch Internet Explorer
2.
Select Tools from the menu.
3.
Select Internet Options.
4.
Select the General tab, and under Temporary Internet files,
click Settings.
5.
Under check for newer versions of stored pages, select every
visit to the page.
6.
Click OK twice.
To allow cookies:
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
1.
Launch Internet Explorer
2.
Select Tools from the menu.
3.
Select Internet Options.
225
ViewStation EX User Guide
4.
Select the Privacy tab, and under Settings, move the slider to
the medium high setting (or a lower setting).
5.
Click OK.
Netscape Configuration
Correct configuration of Netscape requires that you enable
JavaScript, allow cookies, and set the cache. The following
instructions are for Netscape 6.0 and higher.
To enable JavaScript:
1.
Launch your Web browser.
2.
Select Edit fromthe menu.
3.
Under the Advanced category, click Enable JavaScript.
To allow cookies:
1.
Launch your Web browser.
2.
Select Edit from the menu.
3.
In the Advanced tab, under Cookies, enable one of the two
following options:
•
Accept all cookies.
•
Accept all cookies that get sent back to the originating
server.
Note
For Netscape 6.x, the Cookies area is to be found in the Privacy
and Security tab.
4.
226
Click OK.
www.polycom.com
Chapter 7 - Using the System with a PC
To set the cache:
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
1.
Launch your Web browser.
2.
Select Edit from the menu.
3.
In the Advanced category, under Cache, select Compare the
page in the Cache to the page on the network every time.
227
ViewStation EX User Guide
Accessing the Web Interface
This section assumes that your PC is already connected to your
ViewStation system either directly or over the LAN and that you
have configured your Web browser, as described in the previous
section.
To access the Web interface:
1.
Launch Microsoft Internet Explorer on your PC.
2.
Enter the IP address of your system on the address line of your
browser. (Your system’s IP address is displayed on the System
Information screen.)
The system’s Web interface main page appears on your Internet
browser displaying the name of your sytem.
The main icons are displayed on the left panel of the Web page:
Place a Call, Set Up System, Select a Presentation, View a
Presentation, Show Closed Caption, and Configure
NetMeeting.
Note
The Streaming icon is only visible when streaming is already
enabled. Refer to Streaming for more information.
3.
Select Internet Options from the Tools menu of the browser
and make sure that security is set to Medium on the Security
tab. Click OK.
Note
Web Interface Resolution Display: The system’s Web interface
does not support the 800x600 resolution.
228
www.polycom.com
Chapter 7 - Using the System with a PC
Features of the Web Interface
This section explains how to use the following Web interface
features:
❑ Placing a Call
❑ Loading and Selecting a Slide Presentation
❑ Viewing a Slide Presentation
❑ Viewing a Meeting
❑ Closed Caption
Placing a Call
The Web interface can be used to place remote calls from a
ViewStation EX system. You can place a call in one of three different
ways:
From the Address Book. See Placing a Call from the Address Book.
From the Global Address Book. See Placing a Call from the Global
Address Book.
Using the Manual Dialer. See Placing a Call Using the Manual
Dialer.
To access the Placing a Video Call screen:
Click the Place a Call icon in the left panel of the main Web screen.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
229
ViewStation EX User Guide
Figure 7-2 shows the main Web dialing page (Placing a Video Call).
Figure 7-2. Placing a Video Call Web Screen
The Global Address Book call option is only available if a server IP
address has been entered in the Global Address screen on your
system and the option Display Global Addresses is enabled
(System Info > Admin Setup > LAN/H.323 > Global Address >
Server).
If the option Allow Remote Monitoring is enabled on your system
(System Info > User Setup), you can watch the call go through at
the bottom of the page where call status information and streaming
video snapshots from the call are displayed.
Several icons are displayed at the top and in the left panel on the
Web page. The icons in the left panel allow you to access statistical
tools, the virtual remote control, and streaming. The icons at the top
of the Web page give you quick access to all the Admin Setup and
Diagnostics screens, as well as to the most-often used features, such
as View a Presentation, Slide Presentation, and Place a Call.
230
www.polycom.com
Chapter 7 - Using the System with a PC
Placing a Call from the Address Book
To place a call from the Address Book:
1.
From the Web interface main page, select Place a Call. The
Placing a Video Call page appears.
2.
Select the Address Book tab.
3.
Select the site from the list.
4.
Click the Call this Site button.
Placing a Call from the Global Address Book
To place a call from the Global Address Book:
1.
From the Web interface main page, select Place a Call. The
Placing a Video Call page appears.
2.
Select the Global Address Book tab.
3.
Select the name to dial from the list on the left.
4.
Click Call this Site.
Placing a Call Using the Manual Dialer
To place a call using the Manual Dialer:
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
1.
From the Web interface main page, select Place a Call. The
Placing a Video Call page appears.
2.
Select the Manual Dial tab.
3.
Enter the video numbers or extension. If this is not a bonded call
(2 x 56 or 2 x 64 Kbps) with two different video numbers, enter
the first video number in the Video A field, and the second one
in the Video B field. If the video number is the same for both
channels, then enter it in the Video A field. Otherwise, enter the
number in the Video A field and leave the Video B field blank.
231
ViewStation EX User Guide
4.
Select the line speed.
5.
Select the call type (ISDN, IP, or AUTO).
Note
Note that if Auto H.323 Dialing is enabled on the system
(Admin Setup > LAN/H.323 > H.323 > Setup), the system will
be able to auto-detect the type of call you are placing (IP or
ISDN) based on the video number format. Consequently, the
ISDN and H.323 fields on this Web page are not visible.Auto
H.323 Dialing is enabled by default.
6.
Click the Call button.
To terminate your call:
Click the Hang Up button.
Loading and Selecting a Slide Presentation
The following explains how to load a slide presentation from the PC
to the ViewStation system using the Web interface and present those
slides in a video call.
The following lists key information about loading a presentation:
❑ The system is only compatible with Microsoft PowerPoint 97 or
higher.
❑ Because the system does not have a hard drive, the computer
that is used to upload the presentation must be left on during
the presentation and the pcPresent application window must be
active.
❑ You can load up to eight presentations on a system. Each
presentation must originate on a separate PC.
❑ The PC from which you are presenting cannot be running an
FTP service.
232
www.polycom.com
Chapter 7 - Using the System with a PC
Loading a Slide Presentation on the PC
To load a slide presentation on the ViewStation system:
1.
Launch Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher.
Note
Make sure your browser is configured to accept cookies.
2.
Enter the IP address or the LAN host name of the system on
which you want to display the slides.
Example:
IP address:
http://192.168.1.102
LAN host name: http://Main_System
3.
In the main Web page, click the Select a Presentation icon. The
Select a Presentation for Viewing Web page appears.
Note
For added security, you can specify a password for a presentation
started from a PC. Users must enter the specified password in order
to load the presentation. If you wish to view the presentation, you
must enter the meeting password.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
233
ViewStation EX User Guide
4.
Click the Press Here to Select a PowerPoint Presentation
button. The pcPresent dialog box appears.
Figure 7-3. pcPresent Screen
5.
In the pcPresent screen, configure the following options:
a.
Enter your name (your host name is here by default).
b. Enter a password...: Enter a presentation password, if you
wish to establish one for the presentation. You will be
prompted later for this password when you select the
presentation.
c.
Use NAT Address: Enable or disable the Use NAT Address
option as is appropriate as described below. Use NAT
Address is enabled by default. The Use NAT Address field
only appears if the system detects a NAT device.
–
If your PC or laptop is behind a NAT device but the
system is not, make sure that Use NAT Address is
enabled. In addition, you will have to open the
following ports in the NAT device so that the slides can
successfully load into the system:
80 (http port)
21 (ftp control port)
5004 and 65000 ports
–
234
If your PC or laptop and the system are both behind the
same NAT device, disable the option Use NAT
Address.
www.polycom.com
Chapter 7 - Using the System with a PC
Note
If the security level on your Internet browser is set too high, you
will not be able to bypass the password. If this occurs, change
the security level to low or medium.
6.
Click the Please press here to select a PowerPoint presentation
button. The File Open dialog box appears.
Figure 7-4. pcPresent: File Open Screen
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
7.
On your PC, navigate to the presentation file and select it.
8.
Click the pcPresent button. A window appears indicating that
your slides are being converted to thumbnail sketches. Once
this is complete, your thumbnails are loaded into the flash
memory of the system.
235
ViewStation EX User Guide
Selecting a Slide Presentation on the ViewStation EX
Complete the following steps on your system to select the
presentation:
1.
Press the SLIDES button on the remote control. The Available
Presentations screen appears on the monitor attached to the
system:
Figure 7-5. Available Presentations Screen
2.
Select your presentation and press the SELECT button on the
remote control to begin presenting. A presentation password
may be required to proceed (this is the password set previously
in the pcPresent screen).
Figure 7-6. Presentation Password Screen
3.
236
The Presentation Directory screen appears where you can
observe slides being loaded onto the system.
www.polycom.com
Chapter 7 - Using the System with a PC
4.
A thumbnail of each loaded slide appears on the Presentation
Directory screen so that you can see all of the slides at once. Use
the arrow buttons on the remote control to highlight a slide, and
then press the SELECT button on the remote control to view it.
Figure 7-7. Presentation Directory (showing Loaded Slides) Screen
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
5.
To get information about the slide you are viewing, press the
INFO button on the remote control. The names of the presenter
and the presentation appear, as well as the slide number, and
the viewing password. The viewing password is set in the
Security screen as the Meeting Password field (System Info >
Admin Setup > Security). You can change the password on a
presentation while you are viewing it by highlighting the
Viewing Password field on the Slide Presentation Information
screen and entering a new password.
6.
Use the remote control to move through a presentation, as
follows:
•
To move backward and forward through your
presentation, use the LEFT and RIGHT ARROW buttons.
•
To go to the beginning of the presentation, press the UP
ARROW button.
•
To go to the end, press the DOWN ARROW button.
•
If you want to go from viewing a slide to viewing its
thumbnail, press the MENU button on the remote control.
Press the SELECT button on the remote control to return to
237
ViewStation EX User Guide
live video. If you press the SLIDES button, you can select
another presentation.
Slide Display Information
1.
High-Resolution Slides. The ViewStation EX system is capable
of displaying high-resolution graphics on an attached monitor.
For more information, refer to Monitors on page 305.
Slide Presentation Function and Annex D Support. A graphics
slide or snapshot sent from one videoconferencing system to
another system may not be displayed properly if the receiving
system does not support the Annex D high-resolution graphics
standard.
Polycom supports this graphics standard. However, if a Polycom
system sends a slide or snapshot to another vendor’s system that
does not support Annex D, the graphic appears on the far site
monitor for a few seconds and then disappears. If this problem is
encountered, verify that the other side’s system supports the Annex
D high-resolution standard.
Note
All Polycom videoconferencing products, including the ViaVideo
desktop system, support the Annex D high-resolution graphics
standard.
Viewing a Slide Presentation
You can view slides (that are being presented with a ViewStation
system) on your PC using the ViewStation EX Web interface.
A maximum of 30 parties can simultaneously view the presentation
for each ViewStation EX system in a call. For example, in a call with
another system (2 systems), 60 parties can view your presentation
on 60 separate PCs (2 systems x 30 parties).
238
www.polycom.com
Chapter 7 - Using the System with a PC
Note
A user cannot view a slide presentation and select a slide
presentation from the same PC.
To view slides that are being presented:
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
1.
Launch Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher, or Netscape 6.0 or
higher.
2.
Enter the IP address of one of the ViewStation EX systems
participating in the videoconference. The Web interface main
page appears.
3.
Click the View a Presentation icon. The Enter Network
Password dialog box appears.
4.
Enter your name and a password, if one is required. The
password is the Meeting Password, which is set in the Security
screen (System Info > Admin Setup > Security) of the system,
or in the User Setup screen (System Info > User Setup).
5.
Click OK. The slides appear.
239
ViewStation EX User Guide
Viewing a Meeting
.If streaming is enabled on your ViewStation EX system, the Web
View a Presentation icon is replaced by the View a Meeting icon.
For more information about streaming, refer to the section
Streaming, on page 261.
When you select View a Meeting, two options are available: View
a Slide Presentation and View Streaming Video.
Figure 7-8. View a Meeting Web Screen
To view a streamed slide presentation:
Click View a Slide Presentation.
To view streamed video:
Click View Streaming Video.
Closed Caption
Closed Caption is a Polycom-proprietary software feature that lets
you display text on the main video screen of the local and far
ViewStation EX systems.This is done using the system’s Web
interface.
240
www.polycom.com
Chapter 7 - Using the System with a PC
Closed Caption is particularly well suited for people participating in
video communications who can only communicate through written
messages or who need to have the verbal exchange of other
participants transcribed or translated on the fly for them. Closed
caption is also a useful tool for the hearing impaired or foreign
speakers.
Accessing and Using Closed Caption
To access Closed Caption:
1.
Start Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher or Netscape 6.0 or higher.
2.
Place a call to the far site.
3.
To launch your system’s Web interface, enter your system’s IP
address in the Address field of your Web browser.
4.
On the main page of your system’s Web interface, select Show
Closed Caption.
5.
The Enter Network Password dialog box appears. Enter your
name and a password, if one is required. The password is the
Meeting Password, which is set in the Security screen (System
Info > Admin Setup > Security) of the system, or in the User
Setup screen (System Info > User Setup).
6.
You are now in the Closed Captioning screen.
To use Closed Caption:
1.
Enter your text in the Current field. You can enter up to 250
characters per line at a time.
2.
Press the Enter key on your PC keyboard to display your text in
the History field. This action will also send and display your
text to the near-site and the far-site system. The message is only
displayed for 15 seconds.
Additional Information About Closed Caption
❑ Closed Caption works in a call and out of a call.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
241
ViewStation EX User Guide
❑ Closed Caption works in IP (H.323) and ISDN (H.320) calls.
❑ Closed Caption is only supported when the call occurs between
two Polycom ViewStation SP, MP, V.35/RS-449/RS-530, or 512
systems running version 6.5 or greater, and FX or VS4000
systems running software version 2.5 or greater.
❑ Closed Caption is not supported in multipoint calls.
❑ The Closed Caption feature requires that you enter your name
(and Meeting Password if you have one) after a call is started or
after a call is hung up. You might have to refresh your browser
if you hang up the call and you use Closed Caption out of a call.
242
www.polycom.com
Chapter 7 - Using the System with a PC
PC-Resident Applications
This section explains how to use the following advanced Web
interface features:
❑ PolycomSnap
❑ NetMeeting
❑ Polycom Management Access Control Wizard (PMAC)
PolycomSnap
PolycomSnap is a PC-resident application that lets you capture
JPEG images of the entire PC screen or specific windows or areas of
the PC screen and display the snapshots on one or more Polycom
ViewStation EX systems. PolycomSnap can be used in a multipoint
videoconference to display snapshots of your PC to all of the
participating systems simultaneously.
To download and use PolycomSnap:
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
1.
Click PolycomSnap on the Web interface main page.
2.
A File Download window appears. Choose one of the options
(Run this program from its current location or Save it to disk)
and click OK.
243
ViewStation EX User Guide
3.
Follow the on-screen instructions to download the application.
When you launch the PolycomSnap application, the following
interface is displayed:
Figure 7-9. PolycomSnap Interface
4.
Click the Connect tab of the PolycomSnap interface. Enter the IP
address of the system in the Address field. This is the IP address
of the system to which the snapshots are to be sent.
A password may be required. The password is the Meeting
Password which is set in the Security screen (System Info >
Admin Setup > Security) of the system, or in the User Setup
screen (System Info > User Setup).
244
5.
Click the Connect button. Your system is now ready to receive
snapshots.
6.
Click the Area tab. Select the snapshot area you want to capture.
7.
Click the Snapshot tab. Select the snapshot capture mode.
8.
Then press the PolycomSnap Snap button, or press F9 on your
PC keyboard to send a snapshot of your PC desktop to the
system connected to your system.
9.
To disconnect, click the Disconnect button under the Connect
tab.
www.polycom.com
Chapter 7 - Using the System with a PC
NetMeeting
You can place data calls through Microsoft NetMeeting.
NetMeeting data is transmitted via the network and is displayed on
the PC at each site. Data conferencing is only available during ISDN
(H.320) calls and must be supported by far-site systems.
Note
For more information about data conferencing, refer to Data
Conference on page 301. This section also contains information
about how to use a ShowStation IP.
The following lists key information about data conferencing using
NetMeeting:
❑ To use the NetMeeting application sharing, file transfer, and
whiteboarding, your PC must be connected to your system via
your LAN.
❑ NetMeeting data is transmitted via the H.320 network. The
bandwidth used is dynamically allocated so that when
NetMeeting is not sending data, the bandwidth used returns to
the video data.
❑ System Compatibility and NetMeeting 3.0. T.120 application
sharing, file transfer, and whiteboarding are supported for
NetMeeting 3.0 when used with two systems. You must have
the same version of NetMeeting installed on both ends of the
conference. These functions are not supported for NetMeeting
3.0 when used with a ViewStation EX system and a
videoconferencing unit from another vendor. In these
situations, you must install NetMeeting 2.11.
❑ Security Restrictions. For security reasons, the firewall will not
allow application sharing, file transfer, and whiteboarding in an
IP (H.323) call (on your system). Use NetMeeting to perform
these functions between two PCs once a connection to the far
site has been established.
❑ During the NetMeeting call, the whiteboard, chat, application
sharing, and file-transfer capabilities are available. Audio and
video are provided via the system.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
245
ViewStation EX User Guide
❑ If additional participants want to join a NetMeeting conference,
they can place a NetMeeting call to the IP address of either PC
in the call.
Enabling NetMeeting on the ViewStation EX
The following describes how to enable your system’s data
conferencing capabilities.
To enable NetMeeting on your system:
1.
Select System Info > Admin Setup > Data Conference. The
Data Conference screen appears.
2.
Enable either the NetMeeting or the T.120 device option. The
ShowStation IP option appears only if a ShowStation IP is
connected to your system or the LAN.
Accessing NetMeeting
To access NetMeeting:
1.
Place a point-to-point ISDN (H.320) call to the remote site. Make
sure the remote site has also placed a call to the local site.
2.
Open Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher or Netscape 6.0 or higher
on your PC and enter the IP address of your system in the
Address field of your browser. your system’s Web interface
main page appears on your PC.
3.
Click the Configure NetMeeting icon.
If an admin password is required, the Enter Network Password
window appears. The following information is needed:
a.
Enter your name in the User Name field (use “admin” as
the user name).
b. Enter the admin password in the Password field. This
password is set in the Security screen (System Info >
Admin Setup > Security) of your system.
246
www.polycom.com
Chapter 7 - Using the System with a PC
c.
Click OK.
4.
You are now in the How to Start a NetMeeting Call Web screen.
You can either follow the on-screen instructions or proceed with
the present instructions.
5.
Enter the IP address of your PC.
Note
In Windows 98 and ME, you can find your PC’s IP address by
clicking the Start button on your PC desktop. Then, click Run,
and type winipcfg in the Open box.
In Windows NT and 2000, you can get your IP address by
typing ipconfig at the command prompt.
You can also obtain the IP address of your PC from the
NetMeeting application. Click Help and About NetMeeting.
6.
To open NetMeeting on your PC, double-click the NetMeeting
Application icon. Make sure the far site has also launched
NetMeeting.
7.
Select Call > New Call from the NetMeeting menu on the PC
connected to the system that initiated the videoconference. Or
you can also click the phone icon on the right of the menu. The
Place a Call window opens.
8.
In the To field, enter the IP address of the system that is
connected to your PC. For easy reference, the IP address of the
system is provided on the How to Start a NetMeeting Call Web
page.
Information About Placing an IP Video Calls with NetMeeting
You can make IP (H.323) video calls to and from a PC using
NetMeeting 2.11 or 3.0.
Line Speed. The line speed of a video call from NetMeeting to a
ViewStation EX system depends on the bandwidth setting in
NetMeeting:
❑ Cable, xDSL, or ISDN = 128 Kbps
❑ Local Area Network = 384 Kbps
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
247
ViewStation EX User Guide
Calls from a ViewStation EX system to NetMeeting must be at line
speeds higher than 64 Kbps.
Restrictions. You cannot use application sharing with NetMeeting
while in an IP (H.323) call with a ViewStation EX system.
Compatibility. NetMeeting 3.0 is compatible with ViewStation EX
systems version for H.323 video calls. For these calls, you must
disable the following two security options on the Security tab
(NetMeeting Tools > Options):
❑ I prefer to receive secure incoming calls
❑ I prefer to make secure outgoing calls
Polycom Management Access Control Wizard (PMAC)
This stand-alone application allows administrators to easily add
Help desk numbers, company logos, and a new high-level
management password that would be needed to access any or all
user interface screens that the user chooses to protect.
This application is available on your software CD and can also be
downloaded from the Polycom Website ( Go to
http://www.polycom.com/resource_center/. Then select Software
Downloads.)
All these PMAC features can be loaded to any ViewStation EX
systems on a per-unit basis.
❑ From the PMAC utility, the administrator can:
❑ Install system logos
❑ Create custom speed dial screen
❑ Create management password
❑ Password-protect individual screens
❑ Connect/disconnect to and from a system
248
www.polycom.com
Chapter 7 - Using the System with a PC
❑ Open and save profiles
Installing a Logo
You can add your own logo to the main menu through the PMAC
utility screen. The logo will appear in the top right corner of the
screen.
Note
Note: The logo must be a jpg image and smaller than 125 x 75 pixels.
To add your own logo:
1.
Launch the PMAC utility.
2.
Enter the IP Address and the Password of your system.
3.
Click the System Logo tab.
4.
Click the Browse button to navigate to the jpg file you wish to
install.
5.
Clicking the OK button will apply the changes, however it will
close the application.
6.
Click the Apply button to install the logo.
Creating Custom Speed Dial and Custom Video Numbers Screens
The normal Speed Dial screen contains the six most-recent calls. In
the Custom Speed Dial screen, you can create additional Speed Dial
buttons. The custom Speed Dial screen can only be created, edited,
and deleted from the PMAC utility.
To access the Custom Speed Dial and Custom Video Numbers
screens:
1.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
First, install a custom Logo on the system (see preceding
section).
249
ViewStation EX User Guide
2.
Select the appropriate custom Logo. Selecting a custom Logo
takes you automatically to the custom Speed Dial screen.
To install Custom Video Numbers:
1.
Launch the PMAC utility.
2.
Enter the IP address and the Password of the system.
3.
Click the Custom Video Numbers tab.
4.
Enter a Screen Title.
5.
Enter a Site Name.
6.
Enter the Site Number.
7.
From the drop-down menu, select a Call Speed.
8.
From the drop-down menu, select a Call Type (IP or ISDN).
9.
Select the Apply button to install the settings.
Note
To erase all settings, select the Clear All button.
Creating the Management Password
The Management Password is different from the Admin Password.
The Admin Password allows access to the Admin Setup screens.
The Management Password allows the administrator to
password-protect (lock) specific screens. In other words, the Admin
Password allows a user to access the admin section, but the
Management Password is needed to access a specific screen.
To create a Management Password:
250
1.
Launch the PMAC utility.
2.
Enter the IP address and the Password of the system.
3.
Select the Management Password tab.
www.polycom.com
Chapter 7 - Using the System with a PC
4.
Enter the Management Password. Re-enter the Management
Password.
5.
Clisk the Apply button to install the settings.
When you try to access a screen that is password protected, you are
prompted to enter the Management Password. If the wrong
password is entered, you are not allowed to access the screen.
The Management Password overrides the Admin Password. For example,
if you have both an Admin Password and a Management Password,
use the Management Password to log into the system from the
PMAC utility.
Table 7-1. Password Usage with PMAC
Admin Password
Management
Password
Password to Use When
Using PMAC
Yes
No
Admin
Yes
Yes
Management
No
Yes
Management
No
No
No password
Password-Protecting Individual Screens
In order to password-protect screens, a Management Password
must be created first (see preceding section). Then, from the Screen
Access tab, you can specify which screens to lock.
To password-protect (lock) an individual screen:
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
1.
Launch the PMAC utility.
2.
Enter the IP Address and Password of your system.
3.
Select the Screen Access tab.
4.
Double- click an item in the left column (Select Screens from).
While holding the Ctrl key on the keyboard, single-click as
many items in that column.
251
ViewStation EX User Guide
5.
Press the --> button to move items from the left to the right
column. Items in the right column (Do not Allow Access to
Screens) are password-protected screens.
6.
Select the Apply button to install the settings.
To remove password-protected screens:
1.
Double-click an item in the right column of the Screen Access
screen. While holding the Ctrl key on the keyboard, single-click
as many items in that column.
2.
Press the <-- button to move items from the right to the left
column.
3.
Select the Apply button to install the settings.
Connecting to and Disconnecting from your System
After you have updated your system using the PMAC utility, click
Disconnect.
When the PMAC utility is not connected to a system, the Connect
button appears at the top.
Open and Save Profiles
This Open/Save option can save Custom Video Numbers, the
Management Password, the password-protected screens, and the
system Logo settings. You can then log into another video system
and upload the Profile.
To save or open a Profile:
252
1.
Click Profile from the utility’s menu.
2.
Click Open to open a previously saved profile.
3.
Click Save to save all the settings.
www.polycom.com
Chapter 7 - Using the System with a PC
System Setup and Remote Management
The ViewStation EX Web interface lets you perform most of the
setup, configuration, and diagnostics tasks that are available on the
ViewStation EX user interface. These tools are grouped under two
icons:
❑ Admin Setup—Most of the setup, configuration, and message
screens can be accessed from this icon. See Admin
Setup/General Setup on page 254.
❑ Diagnostics—Most of the diagnostic screens and tools can be
accessed from this icon. See System Diagnostics on page 255.
To access screens grouped under the Admin Setup and
Diagnostics icons:
1.
Launch your Web browser and enter the IP address of the
system you want to manage in the Web browser’s Address
field. The system’s Web interface main page appears.
Note
Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher is recommended over Netscape
Navigator because the ViewStation EX system uses Microsoft’s
ActiveX controls to enable the PowerPoint presentation
capability.
2.
Click the Set Up System icon. The System Information Web
screen appears. This screen displays information about your
system, as well as the main management and features icons.
Note
You will be prompted to enter an Admin Password if one has
been set in the Security screen (System Info > Admin Setup >
Security). The user name is “admin.”
3.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
Select the appropriate icons to go to the corresponding
management screens. The icons are organized as follows:
253
ViewStation EX User Guide
•
Left panel on the Web page (vertically aligned icons):
The Admin Setup and Diagnostics icons allow you to
access most of the same setup, configuration, and
diagnostic tools that are available on your system. Home is
a shortcut back to the main Web page.
•
Top of the Web page (horizontally aligned icons):
These icons give you quick access to all the Set Up System
and Diagnostics screens, as well as to the most-often used
features, such as View a Presentation, Slide Presentation,
and Place a Call. These icons are available from any of the
screens from anywhere within the Admin Setup
environment.
Admin Setup/General Setup
The following information describes how to access the General
Setup screen, from where most of the setup and configuration tools
are available.
1.
To access the General Setup screen (shown below), select
Admin Setup from the left or top icon field of the Web screen.
Figure 7-10. General Setup Web Screen
254
www.polycom.com
Chapter 7 - Using the System with a PC
2.
Click the icon of the feature you want to change. This screen
contains the same setup and configuration tools that are
available in your system’s user interface.
3.
Click the Update button to update the system with the new
settings.
4.
Some options require a reboot of the system. If this is the case,
the system will reboot automatically.
Note
The Allow User Setup option found on the General Setup
screen (of the user interface) is used to enable or disable the User
Setup icon on the System Info screen of the user interface.
Administrators can use this option to prevent users from
changing the user setup functions.
System Diagnostics
This section provides information about the main Diagnostics
screen (see System Diagnostics), and the following tools accessible
from the System Diagnostics screen:
❑ Virtual Remote Control
❑ Send a Message
❑ Call Detail Report (CDR)
System Diagnostics
The System Diagnostics Web screen contains the same diagnostic
tests that you can perform from the ViewStation EX system. The
tests that you perform are in real time.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
255
ViewStation EX User Guide
1.
To access the System Diagnostics Web screen, select System
Setup > Diagnostics.
Figure 7-11. System Diagnostics Web Screen
2.
Select diagnostic tests of the system you are managing from the
left icon field of the Web screen.
Note
For more information about the types of diagnostic tests you can
perform, see Diagnostics Screen Reference on page 280 in
Appendix A.
Virtual Remote Control
The virtual remote control has the same functionality as the physical
remote. By clicking the on-screen buttons, you can control most of
the functions of your system. See Remote Control on page 144 for a
description of the buttons’ functionality.
You can also take snapshots from the Remote Control screen using
one of the three snapshot buttons.
256
www.polycom.com
Chapter 7 - Using the System with a PC
To access and use the virtual remote control:
From the System Diagnostics Web screen, click the Remote Control
icon to use the Web interface remote control.
Note
To use the virtual remote control, you must use Internet Explorer 4.0
or higher as your Web browser.
To use the snapshot feature:
Click the appropriate button to select your source (Snapshot from
Camera 1, Snapshot from Camera 2, or Snapshot from VCR).
The Start Streaming Snapshots feature lets you stream snapshots of
the room where the system is located at regular intervals. Each
snapshot is displayed for a few seconds. You can set the display time
in the Snap Interval field.
Send a Message
This utility lets you send a message to the system that you are
managing. Only the near site can see your message.
To send a message using the web interface:
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
1.
From the System Diagnostics Web screen, click the Send
Message icon to send a message to a ViewStation EX system.
The text message can be up to 100 characters in length.
2.
When the Send a Message Web page appears, type in your
message and click the Send Message button. Your message
appears on screen for 15 seconds on the system that you are
managing.
257
ViewStation EX User Guide
Call Detail Report (CDR)
Call Detail Report enables billing and tracking of calls via the Global
Management System. It provides the ability to retrieve or delete
saved records from the system, and also the ability to properly track
IP and multipoint calls.
Call Detail Report can be accessed through your system’s Web
interface by selecting Set Up System > Diagnostics > Call Log.
Figure 7-12. Web Interface Call Detail Report screen (partial view)
The columns are displayed in the following order:
258
1.
Row ID—This is a number that indicates the actual order in
which call events occurred. The first record in the CDR has a
Row ID of 1. Subsequent Row IDs are incremented by 1. This
provides a sequentially numbered list of events as they
occurred in the CDR. Row ID is also helpful as a line reference
number if you need to comment on a specific call while viewing
the csv file. Row IDs continue to be incremented in this manner
until the maximum CDR file size of 100 K has been reached. At
this point, the CDR is archived, and a new CDR file is created.
Row ID is then reset to 1 and the process begins again.
2.
Start Time—This is the call start time. The time is displayed in
the 24-hour format of HH:mm:ss (for example: 18:09:45).
3.
End Time—This is the call end time. The time is displayed in the
24-hour format of HH:mm:ss (for example: 18:09:45).
www.polycom.com
Chapter 7 - Using the System with a PC
4.
Call Duration—This is the time difference between Start Time
and End Time.
5.
Account Code— If the option Require Account Number to Dial
is enabled on the system, then thevalue entered by a user is
displayed in this field. If the option Require Account Number to
Dial is enabled and the option Validate Account Number is also
enabled, then the value entered by a user is displayed in this
field and is sent to the GMS server for validation.
6.
System Name—This is the name given to the system by the user
or administrator.
7.
Call Number 1—For outgoing calls, this is what was actually
dialed from the first call field; note that this is not necessarily the
transport address. For incoming calls, this is the caller ID
information from the first number received from a remote site.
8.
Call Number 2 (if applicable for call)—For outgoing calls, this
is what was actually dialed from the second call field; this is not
necessarily the transport address. For incoming calls, this is the
caller ID information for the second number received from a
remote site.
9.
Transport Type—This is the type of transport used for the call
(H.320 or H.323).
10. Call Rate—This is the rate the call settled on after rate
negotiation with the remote site.
11. System Manufacturer—This is the remote system brand (for
example: Polycom, Tandberg, Sony, etc.).
12. Call Direction (In or Out)—Indicates in or out.
13. Conference ID—This is a unique number given to each
conference. The first conference listed in the CDR are given a
value of ë1.í Subsequent Conference IDs are incremented by 1.
The Conference IDs continue to be incremented in this manner
until the maximum CDR file size of 100 K has been reached. At
this point, the CDR is archived, and a new CDR file is created.
The Conference ID is then reset to 1 and the process begins
again.
14. Call ID—Identifies individual calls within the same conference.
15. Endpoint Type—For example, Terminal, Gateway, or MCU.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
259
ViewStation EX User Guide
16. Audio Protocol (Tx)—This is the audio protocol settled on after
call negotiation with the remote site (for example: G.728, G.722,
etc.).
17. Audio Protocol (Rx)—This is the audio protocol settled on after
call negotiation that the far end is sending.
18. Video Protocol (Tx)—This is the video protocol settled on after
call negotiation with the remote site (for example: H.261, H.263,
etc.).
19. Video Protocol (Rx)—This is the video protocol that the far end
is sending.
20. Video Format (Tx)—This is the video format settled on after call
negotiation with the remote site (for example: CIF, QCIF, etc.).
21. Video Format (Rx)—This is the video format settled on after call
negotiation that the remote site is sending (for example: CIF,
QCIF, etc.).
22. Disconnect Reason—This is the Q.850 cause code description
associated with the Q.850 numerical cause code.
23. Cause Code—This is the Q.850 numerical cause code that
occurs in an H.320/H.323 call after a connection failure or call
termination. Note: Reference Q.850 documentation for cause
code number and description.
260
www.polycom.com
Chapter 7 - Using the System with a PC
Streaming
The Web interface gives you the ability to start streaming remotely.
To start a stream:
1.
Select Set Up System > Admin Setup > LAN, H.323 and Global
Services > Streaming.
Figure 7-13. Streaming Web Screen
2.
3.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
You are now in the Streaming page. From the current
Streaming page, there are three different ways to access the
Start Stream page:
•
Click the text Click here to go to Start Streaming page at
the bottom of the page.
•
Click the Place a Call icon. Click the Start/Stop icon.
•
Click the Home icon on the left field of the Web page. Click
the Streaming icon now visible on the Web interface main
page.
Click Start Stream.
261
ViewStation EX User Guide
262
www.polycom.com
8
Troubleshooting
This chapter provides detailed troubleshooting information.
For basic troubleshooting information refer to Troubleshooting in
chapter 1.
You may also want to refer to theDiagnostics Screen Reference
section in Appendix A to find out how to perform various
diagnostic tests that can help you troubleshoot any issues.
Topics in This Chapter
The following troubleshooting categories are included in this
chapter.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
Category
Page
General
264
Audio
265
Video
267
Network and Communications
269
IMUX
271
LAN/Intranet
272
Presentations
273
Remote Control
275
263
ViewStation EX User Guide
General
Symptom
Cause
Solution
Slow blinking green light
appears on the front of the
system.
The system is sleeping.
System is in power save sleep mode.
This is normal. The system wakes up on
any action from the remote control or on
an incoming call.
Amber light appears on the
front of the system.
The system is in a call.
This is normal.
Green light appears on the
front on the system.
The system is not in a call.
This is normal.
Cannot enter the Admin
Setup menus.
System is password protected.
Password has been forgotten.
Go to the Diagnostics screen and
perform a system reset. This erases all
your system settings except for your
Address Book. You may then enter a
new password in the Security screen.
System starts in the
Software Update screen.
System software is corrupt or not
loaded properly.
Load system software on the system
from your PC.
264
www.polycom.com
Chapter 8 - Troubleshooting
Audio
Symptom
Cause
Solution
Not enough volume during
a call.
The volume is set too low on the
system.
Turn up the system volume using the
remote control.
The volume is set too low on the
monitor.
Turn up the volume on your monitor or
external amplifier.
The microphone pod is too far from
the people speaking.
Move the microphone pod closer to the
meeting participants.
The system startup music
plays through the built-in
system speaker but not
through monitor speakers.
The monitor speakers or audio
amplifier are not properly connected.
Check audio connections and volume
level on your monitor.
Incoming call ring and other
sound effects too loud or
too soft.
The sound effects volume is not set at
desired level.
Adjust the sound effects volume on the
Phone/Audio screen. If you do not want
to hear sound effects, set the volume to
0.
No audio in a call.
The monitor audio inputs are not
connected properly.
Check audio output on the Generate
Tone screen under Diagnostics. You
should hear a 400 Hz tone emitting from
the speaker.
The system is connected to the wrong
audio input on the monitor.
Make sure the system audio output
lead(s) are connected to the same input
connector(s) that have been selected on
the monitor.
The far site is muted.
Look for the far site Mute icon. Ask the
far site to unmute its microphone pod.
Too many network line errors.
Disconnect call and reconnect later.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
265
ViewStation EX User Guide
The microphone pod is not positioned
correctly.
Make sure that the microphone pod is
positioned correctly for the meeting
configuration. If the microphone pod is
behind the meeting participants, you
may not be able to hear them speak. For
the best audio, always position the
microphone pod between the monitor
and the person closest to the monitor.
As most people face the monitor during
a call, following this rule ensures that the
meeting participants are also facing the
microphone pod.
You can also daisy-chain microphone
pods along the conference table. Follow
the same rule for multiple microphone
pods and do not position the pods
behind the meeting participants.
Audio clipping at far site
when using an external
wireless microphone.
The audio input is overdriven on the
system.
Turn down output of wireless
microphone. Put the system in local loop
and adjust microphone output until you
hear audio coming back clear and crisp
with no clipping.
Local audio can be heard
when speaking in the
microphone.
The monitor or audio amplifier is
connected to the VCR audio output.
Connect the monitor or audio amplifier to
the monitor audio out of the system.
An echo is heard at the
near site when speaking.
The far site microphone pod is too
close to the audio speaker.
At the far site, make sure the
microphone pod is placed away from the
audio speaker.
The far site audio volume may be too
loud.
Turn down the audio volume at the far
site.
The VCR input is not selected.
Turn on the VCR input by selecting the
NEAR key twice and selecting the VCR
icon.
Near site or far site cannot
hear or see the VCR audio.
266
www.polycom.com
Chapter 8 - Troubleshooting
Video
Symptom
Cause
Solution
Picture is blank on the
main monitor.
The system goes to “sleep” mode
after 3 minutes of inactivity.
Pick up the remote control to wake
up the system.
Same picture is seen on
the first and second
monitor.
Only one monitor is enabled.
Enable the system for two monitors
on the Monitor Setup screen.
The monitors are connected to the
same output. The monitor has a
composite as well as an S-Video
output.
Connect Monitor 2 to the Monitor 2
connection on the rear panel of the
system.
The network line transmission
errors or IP LAN traffic is too high.
Check the error count under the
Diagnostics screen or try a lower
speed IP call.
Check your system using the Near
End Loop test under the
Diagnostics screen. If the picture
does not freeze, tell the far site to
perform the same test. If the picture
freezes, there are line errors on your
ISDN lines.
Picture freezes
frequently during a call.
You can also test this by placing a
video call to an ISDN loopback
number provided by your service
provider.
Picture is slow or jerky.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
Only one 64 Kbps channel is
connecting in your call.
Check the ISDN number of the far
site. Ask the far site to call your site.
Lots of motion in the picture you
are receiving.
A background with less motion
provides a better, smoother video
picture.
267
ViewStation EX User Guide
Camera voice tracking
does not work properly.
The camera tracking was turned
off by near or far site.
Camera tracking is turned off when
the near or far site moves your
camera. Press the AUTO button on
the remote control to restore
tracking.
Environmental factors, such as hard
surfaces, large windows, hard floors,
and the way the unit is mounted on a
wall or alcove can fool voice tracking.
Blue screen in the PIP
window.
In a multipoint call, the
system MCU displays a
picture of a telephone
instead of video for a
particular endpoint.
268
The far site is speaking.
The camera stops tracking when the
far site speaks to prevent the camera
from pointing to your monitor
speaker.
The far site is very noisy.
The camera stops tracking when the
far site has a loud noise. Try setting
the system to track to camera
presets.
The near site is on mute.
The near site camera does not track
when the near site is on mute. Toggle
mute function with the MUTE button
on the remote control.
Near-site is noisy or too many
people talking at once.
Reduce the noise in the room.
No video input.
Check that there is a video source
present on the selected input.
The camera selection is incorrect
Check camera selection on the
Camera screen.
The VCR input is selected and the
VCR is idle or not running. Most
VCRs generate a blue screen
when the tape is not playing.
Select a different input on the system
or play a tape on the VCR.
To indicate that a particular
endpoint which cannot
downspeed at the correct data
rate is admitted to the multipoint
call as an audio call only, the
system MCU displays a picture of
a telephone in the screen area
corresponding to that endpoint
call.
This is normal.
www.polycom.com
Chapter 8 - Troubleshooting
Network and Communications
Symptom
Cause
Solution
Error message occurs
when dialing a video
call.
If this is an H.320 call, the first line
did not connect. It cannot make a
call if the first line does not
connect.
Check that all network cables are
properly connected. Restart the
system.
If this is an H.323 call, the IP
Gateway/Gatekeeper is not
operating or is not configured
correctly.
Contact your network administrator.
The ISDN line is not present.
Check the ISDN line connections.
The system has an S/T interface and
requires an NT-1 to be connected
between the the system and your
ISDN line, unless the system is
connected to a PBX. See below.
The ISDN number is entered
incorrectly.
Check the ISDN numbers with your
service provider.
The SPID numbers are entered
incorrectly. Note: The AT&T
point-to-point protocol does not
require SPIDs.
Select the Clear icon on the Auto
Detect SPIDs page, and then select
the Start icon to automatically detect
the new SPIDs. Make sure your
ISDN numbers are entered correctly.
The system is directly connected
to a U interface.
Install an NT-1 between your ISDN
line and the ViewStation ISDN
connection.
The ViewStation is connected to
an NT-1 then directly to a PBX.
The PBX connection is an S/T
interface.
You do not need an NT-1 when
connecting to a PBX. Connect the
system directly to the PBX S/T
connection. You may need to use an
ISDN terminating resistor on the
ISDN line between your ViewStation
and the PBX.
ISDN: Line Status icons
do not go away so video
calls cannot be made.
ISDN: The Line Status
icons do not go away so
video calls cannot be
made.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
Try to call alternate sites.
269
ViewStation EX User Guide
Your ISDN line is provisioned
incorrectly by your service
provider.
Check that your ISDN line is
provisioned for Voice/Data,
Voice/Data.
The system will auto-detect SPIDs
for about 85% of all United States
and Canadian switches. The
ViewStation was not able to detect
your SPIDs.
Check with your ISDN service
provider and enter the SPIDs and
switch protocol manually. Note: The
AT&T point-to-point protocol does
not require SPIDs.
Check that your ISDN line is
provisioned for Voice/Data, Voice
Data.
You may want to contact your ISDN
provider and ask him to switch your
line to the NI 1 protocol standard.
ISDN: Error message
when dialing a video
call.
An ISDN error code is received
from the ISDN line.
Refer to the Integrators’ Reference
Manual for ViewStation EX,
ViewStation FX, and VS4000.
ISDN: When placing a
call, progress icons do
not turn green.
The call progress icons indicate
that the video call did not
complete.
The call progress icons indicate the
call state when placing or receiving a
video call on each ISDN channel:
Blue: call initiated
Yellow: call arrived at the far end
ISDN switch
Orange: remote system answered
call
Green: video sync OK
System is waiting for an
IP address. The
System Info screen
shows “waiting” in IP
address field.
270
The LAN is not working.
Check the connections to the hub.
Contact your network administrator.
www.polycom.com
Chapter 8 - Troubleshooting
IMUX
Symptom
Cause
Solution
Cannot dial remote
system in BONDING 384
K calls
The call progress circles only
show blue or yellow.
Start by calling the far-site at 1x64 or 2x64K.
This will verify if the primary number is
correct. If these calls complete, try 256K then
384K.
Switch protocol issue.
Being able to dial non-bonded but unable to
dial bonded to all locations is usually a switch
protocol issue. Verify your ISDN provisioning
with the Telco.
Go to the call status screen. Highlight each of
the circles for each of the channels dialed.
The number dialed for each channel will be
displayed as you highlight the corresponding
circle. Make sure that the far site has entered
the number for each of its ISDN lines
correctly. The numbers for Line 1 - Line 4
should correspond with connections 1 - 4 on
the IMUX.
Defective cable between the IMUX and the
system. Check that the green lights on each
ISDN card are on and that the green light on
the top of the IMUX is on (red on older units).
The cable from the IMUX to the system is a
straight RJ-45 x RJ-45 cable. Bad power
supply.
Add line speeds by going to IMUX Dialing
Speeds screen.
Dialing a remote site in
calls above 128 K does
not work.
The Call Progress circles do
not turn green, or remain
blue after the first channel
connects.
System will not start.
The system restarts over and
over again.
Cannot select 112 or 128
speeds for BONDING
calls from the speed
selection icon on the
Video Phone.
Speeds do not show when
selecting the speed icon.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
271
ViewStation EX User Guide
LAN/Intranet
Symptom
Cause
Solution
Cannot access the
system from the PC
browser.
DHCP Client is ON and no DHCP
server is available.
Contact your network administrator.
The LAN cable is connected to the
PC port.
Connect the LAN cable to the LAN
port on the rear of the system.
Bad LAN cable.
Check the light on the back of the
system. You should have a steady
green light to indicate a connection to
the LAN and a flashing orange light
to indicate LAN traffic.
There is a firewall between your
PC and your system.
Consult your network administrator.
Your PC is on a different subnet
and there is a router between you
and your system.
Change your PC or system subnet
mask and IP address so that they are
both on the same LAN or subnet.
Wrong password.
Enter the correct password. Note:
The default password is “admin.”
Too many managers are logged
into the system.
Only two system managers are
allowed at any one time. To log
everyone out, restart your system.
System does not allow
management via the
Web.
272
www.polycom.com
Chapter 8 - Troubleshooting
Presentations
Symptom
Web browser does not
allow showing
PowerPoint
presentations from the
PC to the system.
Cause
Wrong version of Web browser.
Solution
Presenting PowerPoint slides works
with Internet Explorer 5.5 on
Windows 98, ME, and 2000. You may
need to load service packs to your
browser. This function does not work
with Netscape.
Internet Explorer must have Active-X
enabled. It is a requirement of PC
Present.
Wrong version of Microsoft Office.
Use Microsoft Office 97 or 2000.
Insufficient disk space.
Slides are converted to JPEG files
and are stored in the Windows/Temp
directory on your PC. Create more
room on your PC.
There are too many presentations
on the system. Only eight
presentations are allowed.
Delete some presentations from the
system and restart the system.
Presentation is too large.
Separate large presentations into
two smaller presentations.
Cannot connect to the
PC from the system for
presentation. The PC
name is there but the
PC presentation cannot
be accessed when the
slide button is pressed.
Incorrect password.
Enter the correct password that was
entered on the PC.
Firewall between the system and
the PC.
Consult your IT manager.
Too many presenters. The system
allows a maximum of eight
presenters or PCs to be logged on
at one time.
Have extra presenters disconnect.
Snapshots and
presentations cannot be
viewed, though the PC
has access to the main
Web page of the
system.
Too many viewers logged in. The
system supports up to 30 viewers
via the Web browser in a call.
Have extra viewers disconnect.
PowerPoint
presentation does not
export.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
Change the slide-viewing password
on the Security screen to allow only
authorized viewers.
273
ViewStation EX User Guide
Cannot view
presentation or
snapshots from the
Web.
274
The security level set to “High” on
the Web browser.
Lower the security level on the
browser to “Medium” or “None.”
Wrong version of Web browser.
For viewing snapshots or slides from
the Web, the system supports
Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher. The
system supports Netscape 6.0 or
higher.
Incorrect viewing password.
To check the slide and snapshot
viewing password and other
information about your presentation,
press the INFO button on the remote
control during a presentation. The
viewing password may be changed
on the Security setup screen.
www.polycom.com
Chapter 8 - Troubleshooting
Remote Control
Symptom
Cause
Solution
System does not
respond to the
hand-held remote
control.
No batteries in the remote control.
The green light at the front of the
system should blink with each button
pressed on the remote. control.
Batteries installed incorrectly.
Insert batteries with correct +/position.
The room lights operate in the 38
khz range and interfere with the
remote control lights.
Try turning off the lights in the room
and try the remote control again.
Low battery in the remote control.
Replace the batteries in the remote
control with 3 AAA batteries.
Low battery icon on the
screen.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
275
ViewStation EX User Guide
276
www.polycom.com
A
Screen Reference
This appendix contains ViewStation EX screen reference
information.
Topics in This Chapter
The following topics are included in this chapter.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
Topic
Description
Page
System
Information
Reference
This section describes the System
Information screen, which provides vital
information about your system.
278
Diagnostics
Screen
Reference
This section describes the various
diagnostic screens and how to use them.
280
User Setup
Screen
Reference
This section discusses the User Setup
options.
287
Admin Setup
Screen
Reference
This section describes and lists the Admin
Setup screens.
291
277
ViewStation EX User Guide
System Information Reference
The System Information screen provides easy access to important
information about your ViewStation system.
You can also access the various Diagnostics, Admin Setup, and
User Setup screens from the System Information screen by
selecting their respective icons.
The System Information screen displays information that cannot be
modified on this screen. The following system information is
provided:
❑ System Name—The system name is the name assigned to the
ViewStation EX system by your network administrator.
❑ Video Numbers—Video numbers are the ISDN numbers
assigned to the system.
❑ Gateway Number—This field displays the Gateway number
(followed by the Extension) that has already been configured in
the Gateway Number screen. This field is not visible if there is
no configured Gateway. For more information about the
Gateway, see Configuring the Gateway and Gatekeeper on
page 96.
❑ LAN Host Name—This is the name assigned to the system for
TCP/IP configuration. To set the LAN host name, go to System
Info > Admin Setup > LAN/H.323 > LAN/Intranet.
Note
A LAN host name must be entered. It cannot be deleted or left
blank. When the LAN host name is changed, the system
prompts the user for a reboot.
❑ LAN IP Address—The IP address is assigned automatically
through a DHCP server or is set manually (static). To manually
set the IP address, go to System Info > Admin Setup >
LAN/H.323 > LAN/Intranet.
❑ Software Version—The software version and the date of the
software release are displayed in this field. Additional
278
www.polycom.com
Appendix A - Screen Reference
information about the system software version is located in
System Info > Admin Setup > Software/Hardware > Software.
❑ Serial Number—The serial number is unique to each system.
This number is also located on a bar code sticker on the bottom
of the unit. This number cannot be modified.
❑ Model—The system model type is displayed.
The Diagnostics, User Setup, and Admin Setup icons are displayed
at the bottom of the screen. These icons link to screens where you
can perform various setup and diagnostic tasks.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
279
ViewStation EX User Guide
Diagnostics Screen Reference
You can view network statistics and perform various diagnostic
tests on your ViewStation EX system from the following diagnostics
screens:
❑ Network Statistics
❑ Advanced Network Statistics
❑ Call Status
❑ Color Bars
❑ Audio
❑ Near End Loop
❑ Reset System
These screens are described in the following sections.
Note
You can also view statistics and run these diagnostic tests from the
system’s Web interface. For information on how to do this, refer to
System Diagnostics in chapter 7.
Network Statistics
The Network Statistics screen displays the network protocols and
data speeds at which your call will travel over the network to the far
site.
To access the Network Statistics screen:
Select System Info > Diagnostics > Network Stats.
This screen displays information about:
280
www.polycom.com
Appendix A - Screen Reference
❑ Tx (transmitting) and Rx (receiving) Clock Rates and Errors.
❑ Sync—The - or + sign shows that the system is synchronized
with another T.120 device, such as a Polycom ShowStation.
❑ Video Protocol—ITU video algorithm and annexes being used.
❑ Video Format—CIF, Wide screen, etc.
❑ Audio Protocol—G.711, G.722, or G.728.
❑ Comm Protocol—ISDN (H.320) or IP (H.323).
Advanced Network Statistics
The Advanced Network Statistics screen displays detailed
information about the status of your call. Transmit and receive
speeds are displayed for both audio and video during a call.
To access the Advanced Network Statistics screen:
Select System Info > Diagnostics > Advanced Stats.
This screen displays information about:
❑ Audio Rate—Amount of bandwidth dedicated to audio
(regulated by the audio algorithm in use).
❑ Video Rate—Total bandwidth of call minus audio bandwidth.
❑ Video Rate Used—Actual bandwidth being used for video at
that moment. It will fluctuate and even peak above the Video
Rate number.
❑ Video Frame Rate—Usually near 15, 30, or 60 fps. It will
fluctuate based upon lighting and movement of camera or
people.
❑ Video FEC Errors—Number of received video FEC frames
containing at least one error since the beginning of the call. FEC
(Forward Error Correction) is used to detect and correct errors.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
281
ViewStation EX User Guide
❑ LSD Protocol and Rate—Rate allocated for the transmit and
receive LSD channels (Low Speed Data), and the protocols that
are used on the channels.The LSD data channels can support the
H.224 protocol, which is used for far-end camera control
(FECC).
❑ MLP Protocol and Rate—Rate allocated for the transmit and
receive MLP channels, and the protocols that are used on the
channels. The MLP (Multi-Layer Protocol) data channels can
support both H.224 and T.120, which is used for NetMeeting.
❑ Data Conference—The + or - sign indicates whether or not the
system is configured for data conferencing.
❑ Remote System ID—Type of unit and software version of the
far site.
About Polycom Video Error Concealment™ (PVEC)
If packet loss is indicated in the % Packet Loss field, then the Video
Protocol field displays PVEC in the Tx and/or the Rx data columns
as the active video protocol.
PVEC is a Polycom proprietary video coding algorithm based on the
H.263 video coding standard. Its purpose is to transparently remedy
video degradation caused by packet loss in an H.323 call. PVEC uses
a sophisticated video compensation algorithm to estimate the
content of lost video data and seamlessly repair the video. PVEC has
proven to be very effective at preserving video quality in the
presence of high levels of packet loss. Video quality degradation
with the PVEC feature active may indicate that your IP network is
not functioning properly.
Without PVEC, packet loss, even minimal, usually causes blurred or
frozen frame video. When the system detects packet loss, PVEC is
activated automatically. Similarly, it is automatically turned off
when packet loss becomes negligible.
This feature works in regular video calls, snapshot and 4CIF mode.
At this time, it is not operational in dual stream mode and standards
based 60 fields video.
282
www.polycom.com
Appendix A - Screen Reference
Call Status
The Call Status screen displays call status indicators for each
channel used in a call. On this screen, you can determine if any
channels are failing in a call. If you highlight one of the call progress
indicators, the corresponding call number for that channel appears.
You can compare this number with the number you dialed, or you
can check for a malfunctioning channel.
To access the Call Status screen:
Select System Info > Diagnostics > Call Status.
A single channel will appear for IP calls regardless of the speed of
the call.
Color Bars
The Color Bars diagnostic screen allows you to set the monitor
controls for the optimum picture quality. If the color bars that are
generated do not look clear, or the colors do not look correct, the
monitor needs to be adjusted.
To access the Color Bars screen:
Select System Info > Diagnostics > Color Bar.
To test the color setting on your television monitor:
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
1.
Highlight the View Color Bars icon.
2.
Press the SELECT button on the remote control. Color bars
appear full screen.
3.
Use the controls on the television monitor to adjust the color
settings.
4.
Press any button on the remote control to return to the Color
Bars screen.
283
ViewStation EX User Guide
Audio
The Generate Tone and Audio Meter diagnostic screens allow you
to test your audio connections. They are accessed from the Audio
screen.
To access the Audio screen:
Select System Info > Diagnostics > Audio. From the Audio screen,
you can access the Generate Tone and the Audio Meter screens.
Generate Tone
The Generate Tone diagnostic screen is used to test if the audio
connections to the monitor are correct. A 400 MHz audible tone
should be heard from the monitor speakers indicating the local
audio connections are correct.
There is an animated speaker icon that indicates a tone is being
emitted, whether or not a tone is heard. If no tone is heard, the audio
connections to the monitor are incorrect.
To generate a tone:
1.
Highlight the Generate Tone icon and press the SELECT button
on the remote control.
2.
The Generate Tone screen appears with instructions on how to
perform this test.
3.
Highlight the Generate Tone icon again press the SELECT
button on the remote control.
4.
When you hear the tone, adjust the volume controls on your
system and television monitor to comfortable levels.
5.
Press any button to stop the tone.
Note
If the system is in a call the far site also hears the tone.
284
www.polycom.com
Appendix A - Screen Reference
Audio Meter
The Audio Meter screen is used to test external audio input in
custom installations. If, at normal speaking levels, the audio meter
does not register between 0 and 15, try positioning yourself closer to
the microphones or adjusting the settings on your line device or
mixing board.
To test audio levels:
1.
Highlight the Audio Meter icon and press the SELECT button
on the remote control. The Audio Meter screen indicates the
audio level of all audio inputs connected to the system.
2.
Speak into the microphone to test the audio level.
Near End Loop
The Near End Loop screen allows you to see how a far site would
see and hear you. This can help you diagnose a problem with an
H.320 video call.
To access the Near End Loop screen:
Select System Info > Diagnostics > Near End Loop.
The Near End Loop screen allows you to test the encoder/decoder
on your ViewStation FX or VS4000 system. If you perform a
near-end loop test during a call, the far site sees a loop of itself. Press
any button on the remote control to stop the loop.
Note
This diagnostic tool is only available out of a call or in a H.320 call.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
285
ViewStation EX User Guide
Far End Loop
The Far End Loop screen allows you to find out whether or not your
audio and video is going out across the network and coming back
properly. This diagnostic tool is only available in an H.320 call.
To access the Far End Loop screen:
Select System Info > Diagnostics > Far End Loop.
Reset System
The Reset System screen clears existing system configurations. You
can erase your system settings, your admin password, and/or your
Address Book entries. Once you have reset the system, your system
walks you through the system configuration screens as it did when
you powered it on for the first time.
To access the Reset System screen:
Select System Info > Diagnostics > Reset System.
To reset the system:
1.
Enter the system’s serial number.
2.
Make sure the Delete System Settings option is selected.
3.
Select the Reset button.
Note
Be sure to copy system information before resetting a system. All
settings are lost when you reset the system. Passwords are set on
your system’s user interface. If you forget the admin password, this
screen will allow you to reconfigure the system with a new
password.
286
www.polycom.com
Appendix A - Screen Reference
User Setup Screen Reference
The User Setup screen is used to set user preferences that can be
made every time the system is used. None of these items require a
system reboot to take effect.
Note
This screen is not password protected, however, access to this screen
may be eliminated by disabling the Allow User Setup option in the
General Setup screen.
To access the User Setup screen:
Select System Info > User Setup:
Figure A-1. User Setup Screen
You can use the User Setup screen to set the following options:
❑ Auto Answer Point to Point—This option lets you set the Auto
Answer mode for a point-to-point call.
To set the mode, select the appropriate option from the
drop-down menu in the Auto Answer Point to Point field.
These options are No, Yes, and Do Not Disturb; they are
described below:
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
287
ViewStation EX User Guide
•
Yes—If Auto Answer Point to Point is set to Yes, any
incoming call will be connected automatically. In a
point-to-point call, the default is Yes.
•
No—If Auto Answer Point to Point is set to No, the user
will be prompted with a message "You have a video call.
Would you like answer?" if there is an incoming call. This is
generally followed by a video number and a far-site name if
they are available. If the user selects Yes, the call will be
connected. If the user selects No, the call will be rejected.
•
Do Not Disturb—If Auto Answer Point to Point is set to
Do Not Disturb, the user is not notified when there is an
incoming call. The site which placed the call will receive
either a “call rejected” or “dialed site busy” message.
❑ Auto Answer Multipoint—This setting is used to determine
how the system will handle an incoming call in a multipoint
video conference. This setting only matters if the system is in a
call.
Select the appropriate option from the drop-down menu in the
Auto Answer Multipoint field. These options are No, Yes, and
Do Not Disturb and are described below:
288
•
No—If Auto Answer Multipoint is set to No and there is an
incoming call, the user will be prompted with a message
"You have a video call. Would you like answer?" if there is
an incoming call. This is generally followed by a video
number and a far-site name if they are available. If the user
selects Yes, the call will be added into the ongoing
conference. If the user selects No, the call will be rejected.
The factory default is set to No.
•
Yes—If Auto Answer Multipoint is set to Yes, any
incoming call will be connected automatically. The screen
will split into a multipoint call progress screen as the
incoming call is answered.
•
Do Not Disturb—If Auto Answer Multipoint is set to Do
Not Disturb, the user is not notified of the incoming call.
The site which placed the call receives a Far Site Busy code
(H.320) or Call Rejected (H.323)
www.polycom.com
Appendix A - Screen Reference
Note
This multipoint option is not available unless you update your
ViewStation EX system to support multipoint capabilities. For more
information, refer to Updating System Software From a PC on a
LAN.
❑ Mute Auto Answer Calls—When this option is selected, the
microphone pod is turned off to prevent the far site from
hearing the near site when the system is in Auto Answer mode.
Both sites are notified that the system is muted with a
microphone image located in the lower left side of the main
screen. A red light illuminates on the microphone pod when the
near site is muted.
Note
If the system is already in a call, the Mute Auto Answer Calls
option does not automatically mute the near site.
❑ PIP—The PIP (Picture in Picture) feature allows the near site to
adjust near-camera views while in a videoconference. When PIP
is enabled, the Camera icon in the top right corner of the screen
disappears when the remote control is placed on a flat
surface.The following options are available in PIP mode:
•
Auto—The system shows a PIP window when the call is
first connected and when the remote control is not resting
on a flat surface.
•
On—The system shows a PIP window which remains in the
lower right corner until the video call is completed.
•
Off—The system does not show a PIP window.
❑ Far Control of Near Camera—This option allows users on the
far site to control the camera at the near end. When this option
is enabled, a far-site user may control the framing and angle of
the camera of the near site by pressing the FAR button on the
remote control.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
289
ViewStation EX User Guide
❑ Backlight Compensation—Backlight compensation is used in
conference rooms where the subject appears darker than the
background. When enabled, the camera automatically adjusts
for a light background.
❑ Allow Remote Monitoring—Remote monitoring allows a user
to remotely view a conference room prior to a scheduled
meeting using the system’s Web interface.
❑ Meeting Password—The meeting password is used:
•
As the system’s password when it it is used as an MCU.
•
For dialing into an MCU with a password already set.
•
As the password for viewing slides on the Web interface.
•
As the password for viewing streams on the Web interface.
•
For accessing Closed Caption.
❑ Far Site Name Display Time—This option displays the name of
the far site for a defined number of seconds.
•
15 seconds—The far site name is displayed by default for 15
seconds.
•
Blank—The far site name is displayed until the call is
ended.
❑ Multipoint Mode—To change Multipoint Mode, highlight the
Multipoint Mode field and press the SELECT button on your
remote control. The Multipoint Setup screen appears. In the
Multipoint Setup screen, you can set the Multipoint Mode to
Auto, Discussion, Presentation, or Full Screen. By default, it is
set to Auto. For more information about multipoint modes, refer
to Multipoint Viewing Modes in chapter 6.
You can also set the Auto Answer Multipoint mode in the
Multipoint Setup screen. For more information, refer to Auto
Answer Multipoint at the beginning of this section on page 288.
Note
This multipoint option is not available unless you update your
ViewStation EX system to support multipoint capabilities. For more
290
www.polycom.com
Appendix A - Screen Reference
information, refer to Updating System Software From a PC on a
LAN.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
291
ViewStation EX User Guide
Admin Setup Screen Reference
You can access all the system screens from their respective icons on
the Admin Setup screen. These screens are used to view or modify
the setup of your ViewStation EX system.
To access the Admin Setup screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup.
Figure A-2. Admin Setup Screen
Select the icon of the setup screen where you want to view or change
options and press the SELECT button on the remote control.
You can also view and change the setup of your system from its Web
interface. For more information, see Admin Setup/General Setup
on page 254 in chapter 7.
Tip
At any time, you can return to the previous screen by pressing the
MENU button on the remote control. Press the CALL•HANG-UP
button to return to the main screen.
The following sections describe the screens grouped under the
Admin Setup icon screen.
292
www.polycom.com
Appendix A - Screen Reference
General Setup
This screen contains basic information about your system. It also
allows you to change some of the system settings.
To access the General Setup screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup.
On this screen, you can change the following General Setup
options:
❑ Language—Select the language field to access the Welcome
screen where the language flags are displayed. Select the
appropriate flag associated with the language you wish to use
in the system’s user interface.
❑ Country—Click the Country field to access the Country Setup
screen.
The fields in the Country Setup screen allow you to select the
country where the system is located. It also allows you to
specify country-specific calling parameters for your location.
❑ System Name—Enter a name for the system using the
on-screen keyboard. The first character has to be a numeric (a
digit) or alphabetic (a letter) character including foreign
language characters. The name can be any combination of
alphanumeric characters up to 34 characters in length.
❑ Auto Answer Point to Point—This option allows you to set the
Auto Answer mode for a point-to-point videoconference. It lets
you determine how the system will handle an inbound call. For
more detailed information about this option, refer to User Setup
Screen Reference, on page 287.
❑ Auto Answer Multipoint—This option allows you to set the
Auto Answer mode for a multipoint videoconference. It lets you
determine how the system will handle an inbound call. For
more detailed information about the Auto Answer Multipoint
mode and the Dial-In Calling feature, refer to Dial-In Calling
(Optional).
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
293
ViewStation EX User Guide
❑ Allow Dialing—Enable this option to allow users to place calls
from the system. If this option is disabled, the system can only
receive calls. You can still place calls from the Web interface.
❑ Display IP and ISDN Information—Select this option if you
want your system’s IP address and ISDN numbers displayed on
the main user interface for ease of use. If your system is IP only,
registered with a Gatekeeper, and has a Gateway number, this
number is displayed as your ISDN number on the main screen.
This option is enabled by default.
❑ Maximum Time in Call—Enter the maximum number of
minutes allowed for call length. When that time has expired in
a call, you see a message asking you if you want to hang up or
stay in the call. If you do not answer within one minute, the call
automatically disconnects. If you want your call to stay up
indefinitely, delete the time setting in the Maximum Time in
Call field. Make sure to do the same on all videoconferencing
endpoints in that call so that the call never times out.
❑ Allow User Setup—This option is used to enable or disable the
User Setup icon on the System Info screen. Administrators can
use this option to prevent users from changing the User Setup
functions.
❑ Allow Address Book Changes—If this option is enabled, then
the user has access to the New, Edit, and Delete icons in the
Address Book screen.
❑ Keypad Audio Confirmation—This option enables an audio
response (English language) when a numeric key is depressed
on the remote control.
❑ Display Speed Dial—This option allows you to disable the
Speed Dial screen. When it is disabled, you access the Address
Book directly.
❑ Screen Saver Wait Time—This option allows users to set the
system screen saver sleeping time. The default is 15 minutes.
294
www.polycom.com
Appendix A - Screen Reference
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 Video Network Screens
From the main Video Network icon, you can access screens that are
specific to the V.35/RS-449/RS-530 network interface, as listed
below.
To access the main Video Network screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > Video Network.
Multipoint Setup
See Multipoint Viewing Modes on page 194.
Note
This multipoint screen is not available unless you update your
ViewStation EX system to support multipoint capabilities. For more
information, refer to Updating System Software From a PC on a
LAN.
Call Preferences
See Setting your Call Preferences on page 62.
Note
When you enable the LAN/Internet Calls (H.323) option in the Call
Preferences screen, your system resets itself automatically and
takes you through the initial configuration screens (see Initial Setup
for IP (H.323) Calls on page 64). Existing system information is not
erased during this process.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
295
ViewStation EX User Guide
Video Network
See Setting Video Network Options on page 69. From the Video
Network screen, you can also access the Dialing Speeds, Broadcast
Mode, and Advanced Dialing configuration screens.
Dialing Speeds
See Selecting Dialing Speeds on page 106.
Broadcast Mode
See Setting up Satellite (H.331) Broadcast Mode on page 105.
Advanced Dialing
See Setting the Calling Profile on page 108.
Video Numbers
See Entering V.35/RS-449/RS-530 Video Numbers on page 73.
Advanced V.35
See Configuring the V.35/RS-449/RS-530 Serial Interface Control
Signals on page 104.
BRI Video Network Screens
From the main Video Network icon, you can access screens that are
specific to the BRI network interface.
296
www.polycom.com
Appendix A - Screen Reference
To access the main Video Network screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > Video Network.
IMUX (Inverse Multiplexer)
The IMUX screen lets you access the ISDN Video Numbers screen,
the Auto Detect SPIDs screen, the Audio Quality screen, the
Advanced Dialing screen, and the Dialing Speeds screen.
ISDN Video Numbers
See Entering ISDN Video Numbers on page 112.
Auto Detect SPIDs
See Entering or Detecting Service Profile Ids on page 113.
Audio Quality
See Setting Audio Quality Preference on page 114.
Advanced Dialing
See Setting Channel Dialing Preferences on page 115.
Dialing Speeds
See Selecting Dialing Speeds on page 116.
Call Preferences
See Setting your Call Preferences on page 62.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
297
ViewStation EX User Guide
Multipoint Setup
See Multipoint Viewing Modes on page 194.
ISDN Video Network
See Modifying ISDN Video Network Information on page 117.
LAN Setup Screens
From the main LAN/H.323 icon, you can access groups of screens
that are used for the LAN and H.323 (IP) setup.
To access the LAN/H.323 screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup >LAN/H.323.
LAN & Intranet (main)
The main LAN & Intranet screen lets you access the LAN &
Intranet configuration screen, the Advanced LAN Settings screen,
the Firewall & LAN Connection screen.
LAN & Intranet (Configuration)
See Configuring LAN and Intranet Settings on page 85.
Advanced LAN Settings
See Selecting Advanced LAN Settings on page 89.
Firewall & LAN Connection
See Configuring Firewall and LAN Connection Settings on page 91.
298
www.polycom.com
Appendix A - Screen Reference
H.323 Setup (main)
The main H.323 Setup screen lets you access the H.323 Setup
configuration screen, the Dialing Speeds screen, the Gateway and
Gatekeeper screen, the Gateway Number screen, and the Gateway
Setup screen.
H.323 Setup (configuration)
See Configuring H.323 Name and Extension on page 94.
Dialing Speeds
See Selecting Dialing Speeds on page 95.
Gateway & Gatekeeper
See Configuring the Gateway and Gatekeeper on page 96.
Gateway Number
See Configuring the Gateway Number on page 100.
Gateway Setup
See Selecting your Gateway Prefix and Suffix on page 101.
Streaming
See Configuring Streaming Preferences on page 136.
SNMP Setup
See Configuring SNMP Preferences on page 138.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
299
ViewStation EX User Guide
Global Address (Main)
The main Global Address screen lets you access the Global
Address (Server) configuration screen, the Global Address Book
Preferences screen, the Private Network ISDN (PRI) Number
screen, the Dialing Rules 1 screen, and the Dialing Rules 2 screen.
Global Address (Server)
See Configuring Settings for the Global Address Book Server on
page 120.
Global Address Book Preferences
See Setting the Global Address Book Preferences on page 121.
Preferred Alias
See Selecting your Preferred Alias on page 123.
Advanced Address Book Preferences
See Selecting the Call Type Order for OneDial Address Book Entries
on page 124.
Private Network ISDN Number
See Entering the Private Network Number on page 125.
Dialing Rules 1
See Dialing Rules 1 on page 125.
300
www.polycom.com
Appendix A - Screen Reference
Dialing Rules 2
See Dialing Rules 2 on page 128.
Global Management (Main)
The main Global Management screen lets you access the Global
Management configuration screen, the Global Management URLs
screen, and the Global Management Info screen.
Global Management (Configuration)
See Setting Global Management Preferences on page 132.
Global Management URLs
See Accessing Global Management Server URLs on page 133.
Global Management Info
See Adding Global Management Technical Support Contact
Information on page 134.
Quality of Service
See Configuring Quality of Service on page 140.
Data Conference
The ViewStation EX system is T.120-compliant and supports data
conferencing when paired with either a ShowStation IP system or
Microsoft NetMeeting.
Data conferencing features are available only on point-to-point
video calls or with external H.320 bridges/MCUs that support this
feature.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
301
ViewStation EX User Guide
Data conferencing is only available during ISDN (H.320) calls and
must be supported by far-site systems.
Note
For more information about ShowStation IP, see ShowStation IP in
chapter 2. For more information about data conferencing using
NetMeeting, refer to NetMeeting in chapter 7.
To access the Data Conference screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > Data Conference. The Data
Conference screen appears.
Figure A-3. Data Conference Screen
If you want to use the system’s data conferencing capabilities, you
must first enable them. Following is a description of the data
conference options available on this screen:
❑ First icon—Enable the first icon if you want the system to
perform data collaboration: sharing applications on your PC
through the system while in an ISDN (H.320) call. Enter the IP
address of your PC into the field next to this icon. This icon will
only appear if you have a BRI or V.35/RS-449/RS-530 network
connection on your system. This icon will not appear if your
system only supports IP (H.323). For more information about
application sharing and using NetMeeting during a video call,
refer to NetMeeting in chapter 7 and to the Visual Concert FX
User Guide.
302
www.polycom.com
Appendix A - Screen Reference
❑ Second icon—You can configure your system to work in
conjunction with other Polycom products, such as
ShowStation® IP, WebStation™, or StreamStation™. Enter the
IP address of the ShowStation IP, WebStation, or StreamStation
into the field next to this icon. Your system will reboot. To see
which features are supported, refer to your ShowStation IP,
WebStation, or StreamStation user documentation.
❑ Third icon—Select this icon to disable data collaboration. Off is
the default setting on this screen.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
303
ViewStation EX User Guide
Telephone & Audio
The Telephone & Audio screen is used to configure the ViewStation
EX system telephone information and audio properties.
To access the Telephone & Audio screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > Phone/Audio.
Figure A-4. Telephone & Audio Screen
The following options are displayed on the screen:
❑ System Telephone Number—Enter the Country Code, Area
Code, and Number associated with the system telephone
number.
❑ Room Telephone Number— You can also enter the telephone
number that is assigned to the room where the system is
located.
❑ Echo Canceller—This option is enabled by default. It prevents
users from hearing their voice loop back from the remote site.
Disable this option if another device is providing echo
cancellation.
❑ Mute Auto Answer Calls—You can mute or un-mute incoming
calls. Incoming calls are muted by default until you press the
button on top of the microphone pod or press the mute button
on the remote control.
304
www.polycom.com
Appendix A - Screen Reference
❑ Sound Effects Volume—The level of the system sound effects
can be set by highlighting this setting and using the volume
keys (VOL) on your remote control.
❑ Audio Quality—Select this field to access the Audio Quality
Preference screen. This screen can also be accessed from the
Audio Quality screen (System Info > Admin Setup > Video
Network > IMUX > Audio Quality). In this screen, you can set
the call speed threshold that determines which audio protocol is
used. For more information about this option and audio error
concealment, refer to Setting Audio Quality Preference.
Note
Changing the audio quality preferences in a call can only be
done in an H.320 (ISDN) call. No changes can be made while in
an H.323 (IP) call.
Video and Cameras Screens
From the main Video and Cameras screen, you can access the
Monitors screens, the Cameras screen, the VCR Setup screen, and
the VGA Input screen (only if a Visual Concert FX is connected to
your system).
To access the Video and Cameras screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > Video/Camera.
Monitors
The Monitors screen lets you access the TV Monitors screen and the
Graphics Monitor screen.
To access the Monitors screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > Video/Camera > Monitors.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
305
ViewStation EX User Guide
TV Monitors
To access the TV Monitors screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > Video/Camera > Monitors >
TV Monitors. The following options can be enabled on this screen:
❑ Display Icons in a Call—This option is enabled by default. If
you wish to turn off all on-screen graphics (including icons and
informational text) in a live video call, deselect this option.
❑ Snapshot Timeout—By default, all slides and snapshots are
displayed for a period of 4 minutes. When the display times out
after four minutes, the system automatically returns to live
video. However, when this option is disabled, the snapshot or
slide stays on screen indefinitely until the user presses the
snapshot button on the remote control to return to live video.
Note
If the Snapshot Timeout option is not disabled on both sides,
the system reverts to its default timeout of four minutes.
Note
Number of Monitors—This option lets you select the number
of monitors connected to your system. the Integrators’ Reference
Manual for ViewStation EX, ViewStation FX, and VS4000
❑ PIP—This option lets you select a Picture-in-Picture (PIP) mode:
•
Auto: If you select Auto, the PIP appears and disappears
automatically depending on the position of the remote
control.
•
On: If you select On, the PIP is displayed continuously.
•
Off: If you select Off, the PIP is never displayed.
❑ 60 fields/sec (ITU) at > = 512Kbps (Wide Screen Video)
Enable this option to have the monitor display in wide screen
video format in IP and ISDN calls at 512 Kbps and above.
306
www.polycom.com
Appendix A - Screen Reference
Graphics Monitor
This screen lets you select the appropriate VGA monitor
configuration for your VGA monitor.
To access the Graphics Monitor screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > Video/Camera > Monitors >
Graphics Monitor. The following screen appears:
Figure A-5. Graphics Monitor Screen
The following options are available:
❑ TV Monitor—When this option is selected, no VGA monitor is
available, and the graphics and video are displayed on the TV
monitor.
❑ EX VGA—Enable this option if you have a high-resolution
VGA monitor or projector connected to the rear panel of the
system. To set up the resolution of your VGA monitor, select
Setup.
❑ Visual Concert VGA—Enable this option if a Visual Concert FX
unit is connected to your system and the graphics monitor is
directly connected to the Visual Concert FX unit. By selecting
this option, you enable your system to display your computer
desktop on your system’s VGA monitor.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
307
ViewStation EX User Guide
Note
Stop and restart Visual Concert FX when changing graphics
monitors: When changes are made to your system to enable
different graphics monitors, you need to stop and start the Visual
Concert FX unit. If a stream is being played and you choose to
enable a different graphics monitor, the stream will not be displayed
on the local side unless you stop and start the stream over.
EX VGA Monitor
To access the VGA Monitor screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > Video/Camera > Monitors >
Graphics Monitor > Setup.
The following two options are available:
❑ VGA Output with No Graphics—Select Black, if you want the
screen to turn black when there is no graphics or video. If you
select No Signal, the VGA monitor will behave as if the VGA
monitor is not connected.
❑ VGA Resolution—Select the VGA Resolution field to access
the drop-down selection menu. Select the maximum resolution
that your monitor or projector can support. Consult the user
manual provided with the VGA monitor or projector for
performance.
Cameras
To access the Cameras screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > Video/Camera > Cameras.The
following options are available:
❑ Far Control of Near Camera—When you enable this option, the
far site, while in a call can control your camera.
308
www.polycom.com
Appendix A - Screen Reference
❑ Backlight Compensation—Enable this option if your
background is too bright.
❑ Snapshot Camera—This option lets you select the default
camera from which you want to send snapshots.
❑ Camera Direction—This option lets you set the camera to move
in the same direction as the arrows on the remote control or in
opposite directions.
❑ Primary Camera—This option lets you select the camera that is
used when you power on the system. You cannot disconnect the
main camera, but you do not have to set it as the primary
camera.
❑ High Resolution Cameras—In the High Resolution Cameras
field, you can set each of the following graphics input devices to
4CIF (a video resolution standard) by selecting its
corresponding number where:
2 = Document Camera
3 = VCR
This option is not available for the primary camera because the
higher resolution of 4CIF affects the frame rate quality.
About 4CIF
The ViewStation EXsystem supports 4CIF, a video resolution
standard defined by 704 pixels per line and 576 lines per video
image. 4CIF resolution is four times higher than CIF (352 pixels per
line and 288 lines per video image), a standard commonly
supported on video communications systems. With 4CIF, more data
is transmitted and processed, resulting in crisper images. 4CIF
should only be implemented on document cameras or VGA scan
converters and is not suggested nor supported for use in live video
mode. 4CIF only works between video communications systems
supporting this standard. If the receiving system does not support
4CIF, then the transmitting system does not send 4CIF data.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
309
ViewStation EX User Guide
VCR Setup
To access the VCR Setup screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > Video/Camera > VCR. The
following screen appears:
Figure A-6. VCR Setup Screen
The VCR Setup screen lets you enable the following options:
❑ VCR Record Source—You can set the VCR Record Source to the
following settings:
•
Auto: When set to Auto, the VCR automatically records the
current speaker in a point-to-point call.
•
Near: When Near is selected, the VCR records the near-site
presentation.
•
Far: When Far is selected, the far-site is recorded. Audio
from the near and far sites is always recorded.
❑ VCR Audio Out Always On—When this option is enabled, the
system can operate with two VCRs, one for recording and one
for play. This also allows the use of the VCR audio out for room
audio applications where the near-site and the far-site audio are
required with any video input selected.
Notes
1. If you connect the same device to both the VCR input and
VCR output, then you may need to disable this feature to
prevent an audio feedback loop.
310
www.polycom.com
Appendix A - Screen Reference
2. VCR recording is not supported in 3 and 4 monitor
configurations: to record a videoconference, users need to set
their systems for 2 monitors. VCR recording of images that
appear on the third or fourth monitor is not supported.
VGA Input Calibration
This screen is only visible if a Visual Concert FX unit is connected to
the ViewStation EX system.
To access the VGA Input Calibration screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > Video/Camera > VGA Input.
The VGA Input Calibration screen appears:
Figure A-7. VGA Input Calibration Screen
Usually, Visual Concert FX can automatically synchronize with the
PC or laptop. However, there are a few instances when it is
necessary to calibrate Visual Concert FX to the PC using the tools on
this screen.
❑ Phase—This option lets you can calibrate the VGA input by
increasing or decreasing the phase.
❑ Horizontal Position—This option lets you calibrate the VGA
input in the horizontal position by setting the calibration frame
to the left or right.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
311
ViewStation EX User Guide
❑ Vertical Position—With this option you can calibrate the VGA
input in the vertical position by moving the calibration frame up
or down.
Security
The Security screen lets you set the passwords used to access your
ViewStation EX system remotely. You are not required to set
passwords on your system.
To access the Security screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > Security.
❑ Admin Password—This password is used to protect nearly all
setup screens in the user interface. When using the system Web
interface, you are required to enter the admin password, if one
has already been set in the Security screen.
❑ Meeting Password—This password is used:
•
As the password for the system when it it is used as an MCU
in a multipoint conference.
•
For dialing into an MCU with a password already set.
•
As the password for viewing slides on the Web interface.
•
As the password for viewing streams on the Web interface.
•
For accessing Closed Caption on the Web interface.
If no password is set, the user is not prompted for or does not
need to enter the Meeting Password.
❑ Software Update Password—This password is used for ISDN
software upgrades of your system. The system can be upgraded
from a remote endpoint while in an ISDN call. This password
also protects your system from any unwanted updates.
❑ Enable Remote Access—This option gives administrator the
the capability to lock out access to FTP, Web, Telnet, and SNMP.
The FTP, Web, Telnet, and SNMP options are enabled by
default.
312
www.polycom.com
Appendix A - Screen Reference
❑ Enable Remote Access—This option gives administrator the
the capability to lock out access to FTP, Web, Telnet, and SNMP.
The FTP, Web, Telnet, and SNMP options are enabled by
default.
❑ Crypto Resync—This option is only available if a
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 network interface is attached to your
system.
Crypto Resync Pulse
This screen is specific to a ViewStation EX system with a
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 network interface.
To access the Crypto Resync Pulse screen:
1.
Select System Info>Admin Setup>Security.
2.
In the Security screen, select the Crypto Resync option.
Note
For more configuration information, refer to Enabling Crypto
Resync on page 110.
Software and Hardware Screens
To access the Software, RS-232, Hardware Information, Send
Address Book, and Far Site Software Update, and System
Options screens:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > Software/Hardware.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
313
ViewStation EX User Guide
Software
The Software screen displays the system’s serial number, BOOTUI
number, software version, network interface type, ISDN version,
and ISDN switch protocols information.
To access the Software screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > Software/Hardware >
Software.
RS-232
The RS-232 interface allows users to access the system’s ARENA
(Application Real-Time-Enabled Network Architecture)
Application Programming Interface (API). This API is a set of
commands implemented within the shell. The commands are
available for advanced users who want to automate some of the
control features of the system.
On the RS-232 screen, you can configure the Baud Rate, the RS-232
Mode and the Flow Control options.
To access the RS-232 screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > Software/Hardware > RS-232.
Note
For details about the RS-232 options, refer to the Integrators’
Reference Manual for ViewStation EX, ViewStation FX, and VS4000 or
to the ViewStation EX, ViewStation FX, and VS4000 ARENA API
Programmer’s Guide.
Hardware Information
The Hardware Information screen contains information about the
hardware components that make up your system.
314
www.polycom.com
Appendix A - Screen Reference
To access the Hardware Information screen:
Select System Info > Admin Setup > Software/Hardware >
Hardware.
If you have a Visual Concert FX connected to your system,
information about Visual Concert Software, VCFX In Resolution,
and VCFX Out Resolution is displayed on this screen.
Send Address Book
If you are in an ISDN (H.320) call, you also have access to the Send
Address Book screen. For more information about the Send
Address Book screen, refer to Transferring the Address Book on
page 164.
Far Site Software Update
If you are in an ISDN (H.320) call, you also have access to the Far
Site Software Update screen. For information about the Far Site
Software Update screen, refer to Upgrading Software over ISDN
(H.320) on page 47.
System Options
The System Options screen contains information that enables
multipoint features on your ViewStation EX system and indicates
that the feature has been enabled.
To upgrade your ViewStation EX system, you must get the
multipoint upgrade software from your reseller. See the Upgrading
Software section of this manual for more information.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
315
ViewStation EX User Guide
316
www.polycom.com
B
Interoperability Information
H.320 Endpoint Interoperability
Table B-1. H.320 Endpoint Interoperability
Manufacturer
Model
Version
iPower
600 Series
5.0 and 4.0.8
iPower
900 Series
5.0 and 4.0.8
iPower
9000 Series
5.0
Sony
PCS6000
4.1
Tandberg
1000
B5.1
Tandberg
2000
B5.1
Tandberg
6000
B5.1
Tandberg
800
B5.1
Tandberg
500
B5.1
VCON
Cruiser
4.6
VCON
Media Connect
8000
4.6
VTEL
Galaxy
2.2.0.070
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
317
ViewStation EX User Guide
H.323 Endpoint Interoperability
Table B-2 H.323 Endpoint Interoperability
318
Manufacturer
Model
Version
Microsoft
NetMeeting
2.1
Microsoft
NetMeeting
3.0 (no application
sharing, file transfer, or
whiteboarding)
Microsoft
NetMeeting
3.01 (no application
sharing, file transfer, or
whiteboarding)
iPower
600 Series
5.0 and 4.0.8
iPower
900 Series
5.0 and 4.0.8
iPower
9000 Series
5.0
Sony
PCS6000
2.6
Tandberg
1000
B5.1
Tandberg
2500
B5.1
Tandberg
6000
B5.1
Tandberg
800
B5.1
Tandberg
500
B5.1
VCON
Cruiser
4.6
VCON
Escort
4.6
VCON
Media Connect
8000
4.6
VCON
Falcon
3.0
VCON
Vigo
5.1
VTEL
Galaxy
2.2.0.70
www.polycom.com
Appendix B - Interoperability Information
MCU H.320 Interoperability
Table B-3. MCU H.320 Interoperability
Manufacturer
Model
Interoperability
Polycom
MGC-100
chair control, far-end camera control,
T.120, Conference on Demand,
People+Content
Lucent
Multi-Point
Conferencing Unit
chair control
far-end camera control, and T.120 do not
work in cascaded calls
MCU H.323 Interoperability
Table B-4. MCU H.323 Interoperability
Manufacturer
Model
Version
Polycom
MGC-25
5.5
Polycom
MGC-50
4.6, 5.0
Polycom
MGC-100
4.6, 5.0
Whitepine
Meeting Point
5.0
Ezenia
MCS
1.2.2
Radvision
MCU
2.2.0.9d
Radvision
ViaIP 400 MCU
2.2.2651.0
Ezenia
Encounter 3000 ECMS
1.01
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
319
ViewStation EX User Guide
Gateway/Gatekeeper/T120 Server
Interoperability
Table B-5. Gateway/Gatekeeper/T120 Server Interoperability
320
Manufacturer
Model
Version
Polycom
MGC-100/gateway
4.5, 5.0
Polycom
PathNavigator
1.1, 5.0
Cisco
MCM Gatekeeper on the 3640
router
12.1 build 7
Cisco
2515 Gatekeeper
Whitepine
Meeting Point Gatekeeper
5.0
Ezenia
Gatekeeper
1.2.2
Radvision
L2W-323BRI
Gateway/Gatekeeper
2.2.3.2.5
Radvision
L2W-323PRI
Gateway/Gatekeeper
2.2.3.2.5
Radvision
MCU Gatekeeper
2.2.1.0.9d
Radvision
NGK 200 Gatekeeper
1.0
Radvision
T120 Data Collaborator Server
1.07
Radvision
ECS/viaIP Gatekeeper
2.0.2.2
Ezenia
Encounter 3000
Netgate/Gatekeeper
1.0
Ezenia
Encounter 3000 ECMS
Gatekeeper
1.01
www.polycom.com
Appendix B - Interoperability Information
Firewall/NAT Interoperability
Table B-6. Firewall/NAT Interoperability
Manufacturer/Model
Version
Cisco router
12.2 build 7
Linksys
1.40.2
NetGear
3.25
SMC 7004BR
1.93s
SMC 7004BR
1.20
Siemens
1.1
Cisco PIX
6.1.2
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
321
ViewStation EX User Guide
322
www.polycom.com
C
ViewStation EX Technical
Specifications
ViewStation EX Technical Specifications
Table C-1. ViewStation EX Technical Specifications
Certifications and
Compliance
The Polycom Office
Experience
ITU H.323 and H.320 compliant
Cisco AAVID Certified
People+Content™ allows dual display of video and PC graphics
Conference on Demand™ initiates unscheduled MGC calls from the endpoint
Call Detail Records enables billing of calls and tracking with Global Management
System
Polycom Video Error Concealment (PVEC)™ for improved video quality on networks
with packet loss
Global Management System™ for centralized management
Global Directory Server for live global address book
PathNavigator™ for easier call placement and network cost optimization
MGC Click and View™ integration for individual screen layouts
User Interface
User-friendly graphical user interface that is easy to read from a distance
Hand-held, ergonomic remote control
Custom logo on home screen with speed dial numbers
Web Interface (Internet Explorer 5.5 & 6.0; Netscape Navigator 6.0 & 6.1)
Bandwidth
Max Data Rate H.320: up to 512 Kbps
Max Data Rate H.323: up to 768 Kbps
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
323
ViewStation EX User Guide
Video Standards
H.261, Annex D
H.263+ Annexes: L, F, T, I, J, U, u
H.263++ Annex D
ITU 60 fields per second letterbox
Video Features
2-monitor support to simultaneously display full screen video from up to 4 endpoints
plus PC content on a separate XGA projector
Automatic VCR recording of all endpoints based on the person who is talking
Automatic Picture in Picture (PIP)
Video Inputs (2
Inputs + camera)
Integrated main camera
1 x MiniDin S-Video (document camera)
1 x RCA/Phono, composite (VCR)
Video Formats
NTSC, PAL, XGA, SVGA, VGA
Video Outputs (5
Outputs)
2 x MiniDin S-Video (Support for 2 independent monitors)
1 x RCA/Phono, composite (monitor)
1 x RCA/Phono, composite (VCR)
1 x XGA (projector)
Integrated Main
Camera
Ultra-quiet, ultra-fast pan, tilt, zoom (PTZ)
65° Field of View
Tilt Range: +/- 25° (up/down)
Pan Range: +/- 100° (left/right)
Total Field of View: 265°
12x Zoom; f-4.2 to 42mm
F=1.85 to 2.9 mm
Auto Focus
Automatic White Balance
20 camera presets (10 local and 10 far end)
Voice tracking to presets
Far end camera control
People+Content™
Dual images (transmits people and high resolution content simultaneously)
Dual audio (transmits audio from room microphones and PC simultaneously)
Available on IP and ISDN
Works from any endpoint with embedded MCU (not just host site)
324
www.polycom.com
Appendix C - ViewStation EX Technical Specifications
Live People Video
Resolution
4CIF (704 x 576)
CIF (352 x 288)
QCIF (176 x 144)
Live PC Content
XGA (1024 x 768)
Resolution
SVGA (800 x 600)
VGA (640 x 480)
4CIF or CIF for S-Video and composite inputs
Still Image Transfer
CIF, 4CIF (H.261 Annex D), 16 CIF High resolution (H.263)
Optional Visual
Concert FX
Tabletop device (for audio and video input from PC or Macintosh)
Input: up to 1280x1024, 60 Hz
Output: up to 1024x768, 60 Hz
1 x audio input for PC
1 x video input for PC up to 1280x1024, 60 Hz
1 x video out for projector up to 1024x768, 60 Hz
3 x 10/100 Ethernet hub
Other Content Input
Options
pcPresent™ for Microsoft® PowerPoint® presentations from your PC
Audio Standards
7 kHz G.722, G.722.1
Polycom SNAP for high resolution graphics capture of PC content
3.4 kHz with G.711, G.728
Audio Features
Instant Adaptation Echo Cancellation
Automatic Gain Control (AGC)- voice activated
Automatic Noise Suppression (ANS)
Built-in tonal speaker test
Audio level meter
Audio mixer
Telephone POTS support
Ability to talk over VCR audio
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
325
ViewStation EX User Guide
Digital Tabletop
Microphone
360° voice pick-up, unidirectional performance
Automatic room noise reduction
Gated mixer built into microphone
3 Hyper-cardiod microphones in each microphone pod
Mute button on each microphone pod
Includes 1 microphone pod
Can be mounted to ceiling or walls
Audio Inputs (4
Inputs)
RJ-9 to microphone (daisy chain up to 2 microphone pods)
2 x RCA / Phono line level (VCR)
1 x RCA / Phono line level (Mixer/Auxiliary)
Audio Outputs (4
Outputs)
2 x RCA / Phono line level (main audio)
Frame Rates
15 fps - 30 fps
(point-to-point)
Intelligently selects frame rate for best video performance
2 x RCA / Phono line level (VCR)
TV-quality letterbox 60/50 fields video for NTSC/PAL at 512 kbps and above
Optional Embedded
MPPlus
Supports mixed combinations of IP, ISDN, and analog telephone calls
Supports IP telephones
Supports normal analog telephones
Automatic IP and ISDN downspeeding
Dial-in and dial-out during multipoint calls
Continuous presence or voice switched
Automatic multipoint presentation modes to automatically switch between presenter
and continuous presence modes
Chair control from endpoints or host system on IP
Chair control from endpoints or host system on ISDN
Embedded multipoint for 5 sites (4 IP/ISDN sites + 1 POTS audio)
Cascade up to 14 sites (10 IP/ISDN sites + 4 POTS audio)
Mixed network cascading
Password protection for incoming calls
Supports People+Content dual streams from any endpoint (not just host site)
326
www.polycom.com
Appendix C - ViewStation EX Technical Specifications
Network Features
Automatic H.320/H.323 calling
Downspeeding over IP and ISDN
OneDial intelligent call management attempts call on preferred network (IP or ISDN)
and automatically rolls over to secondary network if needed
Maximum call length timer
Auto-SPID detection and configuration
NATO standard KG-194/KIV-7 encryptor support with on-screen and address book
dialing
Software upgradable Inverse Multiplexer (IMUX)
Dial ISDN lines separately or simultaneously
Quality of Service
and Experience iPriority
Polycom Video Error Concealment (PVEC) for concealing packet loss
IP Precedence (ToS)
DiffServ DHCP (CoS)
Dynamic bandwidth allocation
Proactive network monitoring
Packet and jitter control
Network Address Translation (NAT) support
Automatic NAT discovery
Asymmetric speed control
Fixed TCP/UDP port firewall support
Lip synchronization
Echo cancellation
Echo suppression
Auto gatekeeper discovery
Automatic gateway dialing profiles
Specify outbound call routing for gateway/ISDN
Closed captioning and text chat support both in and out of calls
Keypad audio confirmation makes dialing easy
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
327
ViewStation EX User Guide
Security Features
Independently tested for endpoint security
Enhanced integration for independently certified corporate and classified encryption
devices
Secure password authentication
Unique factory default passwords
Administrator password
Dial-in meeting password
Do not disturb meeting feature for point to point
Do not disturb meeting feature for multipoint calls
Select which menu screens to password protect
SNMP security alerts for failed and successful password authentication attempts
Option to disable remote interfaces (FTP, SNMP, Telnet, HTTP, streaming)
Option to disable mixed protocol multipoint calls
Network Interfaces
Supported
2 independent 10/100 Ethernet ports for IP (LAN, DSL, cable modem)
Integrated Ethernet switch
1 x POTS for voice
Optional Quad BRI (Basic Rate Interface)
Optional 2 port Serial Module (V.35/RS-530/RS-449 with RS-366 dialing)
Optional wireless LAN support via Ethernet port
Ethernet
Connectivity
TCP/IP, HTTP, DNS, WINS, SNMP, DHCP, ARP, FTP, Telnet
T.120 interface for Microsoft® NetMeeting
Internal live video unicast or multicast stream to Apple® Quicktime, Cisco IP/TV
Directory Services
1000+ number local directory
10,000+ number global directory
Unlimited multipoint entries
Live address book with Polycom Global Address Book automatically and quickly
updates directory with address changes or new endpoints
Live address book with Polycom Global Address Book automatically and quickly
removes endpoints from directory if they are turned off
Polycom Global Address Book integrates with Active Directory / LDAP
Automatic ISDN localization of calls
328
www.polycom.com
Appendix C - ViewStation EX Technical Specifications
System
Management
SNMP management
Software upgrades via PC, IP, or in a ISDN video call
Integrated Web server for remote management and Microsoft® PowerPoint
presentations
Remote administrator video-only monitoring of room or calls from integrated Web
server (enabled/disabled from endpoint for security)
Built-in extensive Call Detail Records (CDR) that do not require separate external
management system
Account number validation at call initiation integrated with Polycom Global
Management System for billing purposes
Administrator configurable dialing speeds
Complete support for The Polycom Office including:
- Polycom Global Management System™
- Polycom Global Address Book
- Polycom OneDial™
- Polycom PathNavigator™
Other ITU Supported
Standards
H.221 communications
Bonding, Mode 1
H.281 far-end camera control
H.225, H.245
Annex Q standard for FECC in H.323 calls
Data Port
RS-232 control port/data communications port (1200 baud to 115k baud
asynchronous)
API for custom integration with remote devices such as Crestron™ and AMX™ control
systems
Electrical
Auto-sensing power supply
Operating voltage/power 90-260 VAC, 47-63 Hz/40 watts
Environmental
Specifications
Operating Temperature: 0 to 40° C
Operating Humidity: 10 to 85% R.H. non-condensing
Non-Operating Temperature: -40 to 70° C
Non-Operating Humidity (non-condensing): 10 to 90%
Physical
Characteristics
Dimensions (W/H/D): 43.8 cm x 8.8 cm x 46.7 cm
Language Support
Chinese, English, French, German, Italian, Japanese, Norwegian, Portuguese,
Spanish
Warranty
One year parts and labor
Table Inc.
C-2.2003
© Polycom,
Base unit weight: 4.7 kg / 10 lbs
329
ViewStation EX User Guide
330
www.polycom.com
D
Security Features
This appendix contains ViewStation EX reference information on
security-related screens and features.
Topics in This Chapter
The following topics are included in this chapter.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
Topic
Description
Page
Security
Screens
This section describes the Admin and
Meeting Password and the Security
screens.
332
PMAC Security
Features
The Polycom Management Access
Control Wizard (PMAC) lets you password
protect on screens on a menu-by-menu
basis with a special access password.
333
Security
Features and
Enhancements
This section describes the various security
features and enhancements such as
Digest and Adtran 512.
336
331
ViewStation EX User Guide
Security Screens
This section provides information about the Admin and Meeting
Password screen and the Security screen.
Admin and Meeting Password Screen
The Admin and Meeting Password screen is part of the out-of-box
configuration sequence. It features unique factory default
passwords: it contains an initial administrator password, which is
your system’s serial number, and a meeting password that is
randomly generated. For additional information, refer to Setting the
Administrator and Meeting Passwords in chapter 3.
Security Screen
The Security screen lets you set the passwords used to access your
ViewStation EX system remotely. You are not required to set
passwords on your system.
To access the Security screen:
>> Select System Info > Admin Setup > Security.
❑ Admin Password—This password is used to protect nearly all
setup screens in the user interface. When using the system Web
interface, you are required to enter the admin password, if one
has already been set in the Security screen.
❑ Meeting Password—This password is used:
332
•
As the password for the system when it is used as an MCU
in a multipoint conference.
•
For dialing into an MCU with a password already set.
•
As the password for viewing slides on the Web interface.
•
As the password for viewing streams on the Web interface.
www.polycom.com
Appendix D - Security Features
•
For accessing Closed Caption on the Web interface.
If no password is set, the user is not prompted for or does not
need to enter the Meeting Password.
❑ Software Update Password—This password is used for ISDN
software upgrades of your system. The system can be upgraded
from a remote endpoint while in an ISDN call. This password
also protects your system from any unwanted updates.
❑ Enable Remote Access—This option gives administrator the
the capability to lock out access to FTP, Web, Telnet, and SNMP.
The FTP, Web, Telnet, and SNMP options are enabled by default.
❑ Crypto Resync—This option is only available if a
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 network interface is attached to your
system.
PMAC Security Features
The Polycom Management Access Control Wizard (PMAC) allows
you to select which menu screens to password protect on a
menu-by-menu basis with a special access password. PMAC offers
other features which are not covered in this section. They are
described in chapter 7.
This application is available on your software CD and can also be
downloaded from the Polycom Website ( Go to
http://www.polycom.com/resource_center/. Then select Software
Downloads.)
This section contains information about:
Creating the Management Password (special-access password)
Password-Protecting Individual Screens
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
333
ViewStation EX User Guide
Creating the Management Password
The Management Password is different from the Admin Password.
The Admin Password allows access to the Admin Setup screens. The
Management Password allows the administrator to
password-protect (lock) specific screens. In other words, the Admin
Password allows a user to access the admin section, but the
Management Password is needed to access a specific screen.
To create a Management Password:
1.
Launch the PMAC utility.
2.
Enter the IP address and the Password of the system.
3.
Select the Management Password tab.
4.
Enter the Management Password. Re-enter the Management
Password.
5.
Clisk the Apply button to install the settings.
When you try to access a screen that is password protected, you are
prompted to enter the Management Password. If the wrong
password is entered, you are not allowed to access the screen.
The Management Password overrides the Admin Password. For example,
if you have both an Admin Password and a Management Password,
use the Management Password to log into the system from the
PMAC utility.
Table D-1. Password Usage with PMAC
Admin Password
334
Management
Password
Password to Use When
Using PMAC
Yes
No
Admin
Yes
Yes
Management
No
Yes
Management
No
No
No password
www.polycom.com
Appendix D - Security Features
Password-Protecting Individual Screens
In order to password-protect screens, a Management Password
must be created first (see preceding section). Then, from the Screen
Access tab, you can specify which screens to lock.
To password-protect (lock) an individual screen:
1.
Launch the PMAC utility.
2.
Enter the IP Address and Password of your system.
3.
Select the Screen Access tab.
4.
Double- click an item in the left column (Select Screens from).
While holding the Ctrl key on the keyboard, single-click as
many items in that column.
5.
Press the --> button to move items from the left to the right
column. Items in the right column (Do not Allow Access to
Screens) are password-protected screens.
6.
Select the Apply button to install the settings.
To remove password-protected screens:
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
1.
Double-click an item in the right column of the Screen Access
screen. While holding the Ctrl key on the keyboard, single-click
as many items in that column.
2.
Press the <-- button to move items from the right to the left
column.
3.
Select the Apply button to install the settings.
335
ViewStation EX User Guide
Security Features and Enhancements
Password for pcPresent (PowerPoint slides)
When you are presenting launching a presentation from a PC, you
can specify a password for that presentation. Users must enter the
specified password in order to load the presentation. If you wish to
view the presentation, you must enter the meeting password.
Digest Implementation
Digest authentication is used for sending passwords to the Web
server for enhanced security.
Basic authentication, which is the current form of authentication,
uses a very simple algorithm to encode the user name and
password. For example, people "snooping" on the packets sent to
your system can capture these packets and decode the admin
password in five minutes. Digest authentication is a much more
complicated algorithm than basic authentication. Even if people
manage to capture one of the packets that contain Digest
authentication, they cannot decipher the admin password .
Adtran 512
Polycom has enabled enhanced integration with the Adtran 512 ISU
IMUX including RS-366 dialing from the system’s user interface
(V.35). This allows end-users to dial calls from the system’s address
book or dialing screen instead of having to manually enter in the
number on the Adtran keypad. This is especially useful when used
with KIV or KG encryption devices that require an external IMUX
such as the Adtran 512 ISU to dial calls.
336
www.polycom.com
Appendix D - Security Features
Disabling Mixed Protocols
The option Allow H.320 and H.323 Mixed Calls (Admin
Setup>Video Network>Call Preferences) allows the administrator
to disable the ability to place or received mixed multipoint calls for
security reasons.
This option is only accessible if the V.35 Video Calls or ISDN Video
Calls and LAN/Internet Calls options are both enabled on the Call
Preferences screen.
Telnet and FTP Timeout
There is a 30-second timeout when logging into FTP and Telnet. This
is intended to make the connection time out to free it in case the
login is unsuccessful.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
337
ViewStation EX User Guide
338
www.polycom.com
Safety and Legal Notices
Important Safeguards
Read and understand the following instructions before using the system:
• Close supervision is necessary when the system is used by or near children. Do not leave
unattended while in use.
• Only use electrical extension cords with a current rating at least equal to that of the system.
• Always disconnect the system from power before cleaning and servicing and when not in use.
• Do not spray liquids directly onto the system when cleaning. Always apply the liquid first to a
static free cloth.
• Do not immerse the system in any liquid or place any liquids on it.
• Do not disassemble this system (except as instructed in the manufacturer's instructions). To
reduce the risk of shock and to maintain the warranty on the system, a qualified technician
must perform service or repair work.
• Connect this appliance to a grounded outlet.
• In case of lightning storms, disconnect the telephone line cord from the system, and only
connect the system to surge protected power outlets.
• The socket outlet to which this apparatus is connected must be installed near the equipment
and must always be readily accessible.
• Keep ventilation openings free of any obstructions.
• SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
License Restrictions
THE SOFTWARE PROGRAMS CONTAINED OR DESCRIBED HEREIN ARE CONFIDENTIAL
INFORMATION AND PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS OF POLYCOM OR ITS LICENSORS.
Buyer shall not sublicense or otherwise distribute any of the Subject Programs except to End
Users and/or resellers who have entered into a Sublicense Agreement. For purposes of this
Agreement a “Sublicense Agreement” shall mean a written license agreement between the
Buyer and its purchaser, or, in the case of any sale by Buyer to a reseller, between such reseller
and the End User, that is either 1) signed by the End User or 2) included with the Documentation,
in such a manner that the End User reasonably indicates its acceptance of the Sublicense
Agreement by turning on and using the Computer Equipment. Polycom shall include so-called
“break the seal software licenses” with the Documentation, and Buyer shall not remove or alter
any such Sublicense Agreements or any notifications or warning stickers relating thereto. Buyer
shall not waive, amend, or otherwise modify any Sublicense Agreement without Polycom’s prior
consent.
Title to all Subject Programs shall at all times remain and vest solely with Polycom and its
licensors. Buyer acknowledges Polycom, Inc.’s claim that the Subject Programs are its trade
secret and confidential property, and shall treat them as such. Buyer will not attempt to
disassemble, decompile, reverse-engineer or otherwise endeavor to discover or disclose the
methods and concepts embodied in the Subject Programs. Except as expressly allowed under
this Agreement, the Buyer shall not copy, modify, transcribe, store, translate, sell, lease, or
otherwise transfer or distribute any of the Subject Programs in whole or in part, without prior
authorization, in writing, from Polycom. Buyer shall not remove or destroy any copyright, patent,
trademark or other proprietary mark or notice on Computer Equipment, and shall reproduce any
such marks on any copies of Subject Programs that it makes hereunder.
You shall not and shall not allow any third party to 1) decompile, disassemble, or otherwise
reverse-engineer or attempt to reconstruct or discover any source code or underlying ideas or
algorithms of the software by any means whatsoever or 2) remove any product.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
339
ViewStation EX User Guide
Warranty
Polycom, Inc. warrants its products to be free of defects in materials and factory workmanship
for a period of twelve (12) months from date of purchase. This warranty does not apply to damage
to products resulting from accident, misuse, service or modification by anyone other than a
Polycom, Inc. authorized service facility/dealer. The warranty is limited to the original purchaser
and is not transferable. Any liability of Polycom, Inc. or its suppliers with respect to the product
or the performance thereof under any warranty, negligence, strict liability or other theory will be
limited exclusively to product repair or replacement as provided above. Except for the foregoing,
the product is provided “as is” without warranty of any kind including without limitation, any
warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. The entire risk of the quality and
performance of the software programs contained in the system is with you.
Limitation of Remedies and Damages
Polycom, Inc., its agents, employees, suppliers, dealers and other authorized representatives
shall not be responsible or liable with respect to the product or any other subject matter related
thereto under any contract, negligence, strict liability or other theory for any indirect, incidental,
or consequential damages, including, but not limited to loss of information, business, or profits.
The law of certain states or nations does not permit limitation or exclusion of implied warranties
and consequential damages, so the above limitations, disclaimers, or exclusion may not apply to
you. This warranty gives you special legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary by
state and nation.
Warning
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference
in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
USA and Canadian Regulatory Notices
FCC Notice
Part 15 FCC Rules
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Class A Digital Device
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used
in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own
expense.
In accordance with Part 15 of the FCC rules, the user is cautioned that any changes or
modifications not expressly approved by Polycom Inc. could void the user's authority to operate
this equipment.
340
www.polycom.com
Safety and Legal Notices
Part 68 FCC Rules
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the label of this equipment is a label
that contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence
number (REN) for this equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the
telephone company.
This equipment may not be used on a coin service or party line.
If you experience trouble with your ViewStation EX/FX/VS4000, disconnect it from the telephone
line to determine if the registered equipment is malfunctioning. For repair or warranty information,
please contact Polycom Inc. at 1-888-248-4143 or 4750 Willow Road, Pleasanton, CA
94588-2708, USA. Contact information may also be found at http://www.polycom.com/. If the
system is causing harm to the network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect
it until the problem is corrected.
If your ViewStation EX/FX/VS4000 causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone
company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required.
However, if advance notice is not practical, you will be notified as soon as possible. You will be
advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
Your telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or
procedures that could affect the operation of your equipment. If they do, you will be given
advance notice so that you may make any changes necessary to maintain uninterrupted service.
The REN is useful to determine the quantity of devices that may be connected to the telephone
line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to
an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of RENs of all devices that may be connected
to a line, is determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company.
FCC compliant telephone cords and modular plugs are provided with this equipment. This
equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises’ wiring using a
compatible modular jack, which is Part 68 compliant. See installation instructions for details.
WHEN PROGRAMMING EMERGENCY NUMBERS AND/OR MAKING TEST CALLS TO
EMERGENCY NUMBERS:
1) Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call.
2) Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning or late evening.
Industry Canada (IC)
This class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numerique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the
equipment meets telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements
as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The
Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user's satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the
facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using
an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the
above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified
equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier. Any repairs or
alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the
telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power
utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together.
This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact
the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
341
ViewStation EX User Guide
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each relevant terminal device provides an
indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface.
The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the
requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed 5.
The REN of this equipment is either marked on the unit or included in the new style USA FCC
registration number. In the case that the REN is included in the FCC number, the user should
use the following key to determine the value:
• The FCC number is formatted as US:AAAEQ#TXXX.
• # is the Ringer Equivalence Number without a decimal point (e.g. REN of 1.0 will be shown
as 10, REN of 0.3 will be shown as 03). In the case of a Z ringer, ZZ shall appear. In the case
of approved equipment without a network interface or equipment not to be connected to
circuits with analog ringing supplied, NA shall appear.
EEA Regulatory Notices
CE Mark
This ViewStation EX/FX/VS4000 has been marked with the CE mark. This mark indicates
compliance with EEC Directives 1999/5/EC. A full copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be
obtained from Polycom Ltd., 270 Bath Road, Slough UK SL1 4DX.
Declaration of Conformity:
Hereby, Polycom Ltd. declares that this ViewStation EX/FX/VS4000 is in compliance with the
essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Konformitetserklæring:
Hermed erklærer Polycom Ltd., at indestående ViewStation EX/FX/VS4000 er i
overensstemmelse med de grundlæggende krav og de relevante punkter i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Konformitätserklärung:
Hiermit erklärt Polycom Ltd., dass der ViewStation EX/FX/VS4000 die grundlegenden
Anforderungen und sonstige maßgebliche Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG erfüllt.
Vaatimustenmukaisuusvakuutus:
Polycom Ltd. vakuuttaa täten, että ViewStation EX/FX/VS4000 on direktiivin 1999/5/EC
keskeisten vaatimusten ja sen muiden tätä koskevien säännösten mukainen.
Déclaration de conformité:
Par la présente, Polycom Ltd. déclare que ce ViewStation EX/FX/VS4000 est conforme aux
conditions essentielles et à toute autre modalité pertinente de la Directive 1999/5/CE.
342
www.polycom.com
Safety and Legal Notices
Dichiarazione di conformità:
Con la presente Polycom Ltd. dichiara che il ViewStation EX/FX/VS4000 soddisfa i requisiti
essenziali e le altre disposizioni pertinenti della direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Verklaring van overeenstemming:
Hierbij verklaart Polycom Ltd. dat diens ViewStation EX/FX/VS4000 voldoet aan de
basisvereisten en andere relevante voorwaarden van EG-richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Declaração de Conformidade:
Através da presente, a Polycom Ltd. declara que este ViewStation EX/FX/VS4000 se encontra
em conformidade com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições relevantes da Directiva
1999/5/CE.
Declaración de conformidad:
Por la presente declaración, Polycom Ltd. declara que este ViewStation EX/FX/VS4000 cumple
los requisitos esenciales y otras cláusulas importantes de la directiva 1999/5/CE.
Överensstämmelseförklaring:
Polycom Ltd. förklarar härmed att denna ViewStation EX/FX/VS4000 överensstämmer med de
väsentliga kraven och övriga relevanta stadganden i direktiv 1999/5/EG.
WARNING
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference
in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Australia
Mains Powered POTS Voice Telephony Without Emergency 000 Dialing
Warning: This equipment will be inoperable when mains power fails.
Japan
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
343
ViewStation EX User Guide
Underwriters Laboratories Statement
The system is intended to be powered only by the supplied power supply unit.
Special Safety Instructions
Follow existing safety instructions and observe all safeguards as directed.
Installation Instructions
Installation must be performed in accordance with all relevant national wiring rules.
344
www.polycom.com
Index
Numerics
4CIF resolution, 309
60 fields/sec at>=512Kbps, 306
A
Address Book
access, 161
adding an entry, 162
creating a meeting entry, 189
deleting an entry, 164
editing an existing entry, 163
erasing entries, 286
multipoint entries, 166
placing a call from, 153
placing a call, 153
send, 315
Admin Password, 312, 332
Admin Setup screen reference, 292
Admin Setup Web icons, 253
Administrator Password, 78
Advanced configuration
BRI, 111
Gateway and Gatekeeper, 98
IP, 93
V.35/RS-449/RS-530, 103
Advanced Dialing
BRI, 115
V.35/RS-449/RS-530, 71, 109
Advanced Network Statistics, 281
Allow Address Book Changes, 294
Allow Remote Monitoring, 132, 290
Allow System to be a DHCP Server, 46
Allow User Setup, 255, 294
Analog call
adding a video call to, 160
adding to a video call, 159
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
disconnecting, 159
placing, 158
Annex D information, 238
Answering a call
manually, 155, 156
Audio
advanced troubleshooting, 265
audio error concealment, 305
basic troubleshooting, 26
diagnostics, 281
protocols, 305
test levels, 285
Audio Meter, 285
Audio Quality Preference (BRI), 114
Auto Answer Multipoint, 199, 207, 288
Auto Answer Point to Point, 287, 293
Auto H.323 Dialing, 65, 94
Auto-Detect SPIDs (BRI), 75, 113
B
Backlight Compensation, 290
BRI
advanced configuration, 111
Advanced Dialing, 116
Audio Quality Preference configuration, 114
Auto-Detect SPIDs, 75
configuration screen reference, 296
Dialing Speeds, 116
IMUX configuration, 297
IMUX, 40
initial configuration, 74
ISDN Video Numbers, 74, 112
network interface installation, 38
SPIDs, 113
Video Network configuration, 117
Broadcast Mode (V.35/RS-449/RS-530), 70,
345
ViewStation EX User Guide
105
C
Cables
Ascend
HD-44M
to
HD-44M
(V.35/RS-449/RS-530), 31, 37
HD-44M to DB-25M/RS-366 and M34
Winchester (V.35/RS-449), 31,
37
HD-44M
to
RS-449/S-422
Y
(V.35/RS-449/RS-530), 31, 37
supplied for ViewStation EX, 20
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 cable adapter kit,
38
Call Detail Report 258
Call Hangup Choices, 152
Call Preference
initial configuration, 62
Call progress indicators, 188, 283
Call Status, 283
Call Type (GAB), 124
Calling profile (V.35/RS-449/RS-530), 109
Cameras
4CIF resolution, 309
automatic tracking of cam. presets, 172
backlight compensation, 309
configuration, 305
control keys on remote control, 168
control, 308
controlling the far-site camera, 169
direction setting, 309
high-resolution setting, 309
preset settings, 170
primary camera, 309
primary, 309
selecting a far-site camera, 168
selecting a near-site camera, 167
settings, 170
snapshots, 309
Sony EVI-10, 32
tilt, pan, zoom, 168
Cascading, 19, 201
346
Chair control
available actions, 204
general information, 202
screen actions, 203
Closed Caption, 240
Color Bar, 283
Conference on Demand 209
Configuration
clearing, 286
DHCP, 222
dialing rules, 126
Gateway and Gatekeeper, 98
H.320, 103
H.323, 93
initial screens, 59, 77
Internet Explorer, 225
Intranet, 85
IP, 93
ISDN, 103
LAN, 85, 298
monitors, 305
Netscape, 226
RS-232, 314
SNMP, 138
telephone and audio, 304
video and cameras, 305
Connecting
PC and system to the LAN, 220
Country selection, 62
Crypto Resync (V.35/RS-449/RS-530), 110,
313
Custom Speed Dial (PMAC), 249
Custom Video Numbers (PMAC), 250
D
Data collaboration, 302
Data conferencing
configuration, 216
enable, 302
ShowStation IP, 43
using NetMeeting, 217, 245, 302
using ShowStation IP, 217
www.polycom.com
Index
Default Gateway, 88
DHCP
configuration, 87, 222
server information, 87
setting the server in Softupdate, 46
Diagnostic tests, 280
Diagnostics
Advanced Network Statistics, 281
Audio Meter, 285
Audio, 284
Call Status, 283
Color Bars, 283
Far End Loop, 286
generate tone, 284
Near End Loop, 285
Network Statistics, 280
Reset System, 286
Web icons, 254
Dial-In Calling, 199, 205
Dialing extension, 127
Dialing prefixes, 72, 108
Dialing rules
configuration, 126
Dialing Speeds
BRI, 116
IP, 95
V.35/RS-449/RS-530, 70, 107
Dialing suffixes, 72, 108
Direct Connect, 105
Direct Inward Dial (DID), 100
Display Graphics in a Call, 306
Display IP and ISDN Information, 294
Display IP Dialing Extension, 63, 65
DNS servers, 88
Document camera (optional), 42
Downspeeding, 184
downspeeding, compatibility 185
Dual stream compatibility, 43
dual streams, 218
Duplex mode configuration, 90
Dynamic bandwidth, 141
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
E
E.164 extension, 94
Echo Canceller, 304
Encoder/decoder testing, 285
Erasing system settings, 286
Error messages and codes, 150
F
Far Control of Near Camera, 289
Far Site Name Display Time, 290
Far Site Software Update, 315
Firewall & LAN Connection, 91
Firewall configuration, 79, 91
FX VGA, 307
G
G.722 audio protocol, 114
G.728 audio protocol, 114
GAB server information, 121
Gatekeeper
initial configuration, 65
status icons, 82
Gateway
prefix and suffix configuration, 101
Gateway and Gatekeeper
configuration, 98
overview, 96
Gateway Number
configuration, 100, 101
type, 100
General Setup, 293
Global Address Book
how to use, 165
overview, 120
Preferred Alias, 123
setting preferences, 121
status icons, 165
Web option, 230
347
ViewStation EX User Guide
Global Management
Allow Remote Monitoring, 132
contact info, 135
Daylight Savings Time, 132
Require Account Number to Dial, 132
servers, 133
setup, 132
Time Difference from GMT, 132
URLs, 134
Global Management System
configuration, 130
overview, 130
Graphics cursor, 178
H
H.262 video protocol, 106
H.320 configuration, 103
H.323
Dialing Speeds, 95
Extension (E.164), 64, 65, 94, 98
initial configuration, 64
name configuration, 94
name initialization, 64
H.331 Broadcast Mode, 105
Hardware information, 315
Help (Topics), 24
High Resolution Cameras, 309
I
IMUX
advanced troubleshooting, 271
Quad BRI, 40
Indicators
call progress, 149, 188, 283
ISDN line, 82
LAN/WAN network problems, 25
Installation
BRI network interface, 38
required information checklist, 33
system, 34
348
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 network interface,
35
International dialing prefix, 127
Internet Explorer configuration (Web interface), 225
Intranet
advanced troubleshooting, 272
configuration, 85
IP
configuration, 93
IP and ISDN Number Display, 294
ISDN
configuration, 103
lines check indicator, 81
switch protocol (BRI), 76
ISDN Video Network
BRI, 117, 298
K
Keypad Audio Confirmation, 294
L
LAN
advanced troubleshooting, 272
configuration, 85, 298
host name, 86
port configuration, 90
setup screens, 298
speed configuration, 90
Language setup, 293
Lightning bold indicator information, 25
lock screens, 251
logo (PMAC), 249
LSD protocol, 282
M
Management Password (PMAC), 250
management password, 333
www.polycom.com
Index
Manual Dialer, 187
Maximum Time in Call, 294
MCU
Dial-In Calling, 206
Meeting Password usage, 199
system as, 197
Meeting Password
as multipoint conference password, 197
usage, 198, 290, 312, 332
Menu selection, 60
Microphone pods
general information, 21
mute button, 173
Mixed Protocol Dialing
description, 192
how to place a call, 192
MLP protocol, 282
Monitors
configuration, 305
second 41
Multipoint calls
Address Book meeting entry, 189
Address Book, 191
Auto Answer mode, 207
Auto Answer Multipoint mode, 196
conference password, 197
dialing speed table, 183
firewall UDP/TCP ports configuration,
186
Manual Dialer and Address Book, 191
Meeting Password, 198
Mixed Protocol Dialing speed information, 183
multiple entries in Address Book, 166
speed information, 183
upgrade, 55
using Manual Dialer, 187
Multipoint Mode, 290
Multipoint viewing modes
Auto, 195
Discussion, 195
Full Screen, 196
Mode Switching, 197
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
Presentation, 196
Multi-Site Meeting, 189
Mute Auto Answer Calls, 289, 304
mute icon and indicator, 174
Mute incoming calls, 304
N
NAT
configuration for pcPresent, 234
configuration options, 91
NetMeeting
access, 246
overview 245
Netscape configuration (Web interface), 226
Network access dialing rules, 127
Network Address Translation
configuration, 91
pcPresent, 234
network and communications troubleshooting, 269
Network interfaces
BRI, 38
initial configuration, 68
installation, 35
V.35/RS-449/RS-530, 35
Network Setup screens
BRI, 296
Network Statistics, 281
Network status indicators, 81
NT-1, 32, 40, 269
Number of Monitors (TV), 306
O
OneDial 163
On-screen keyboard
access, 61
shift key settings, 163, 188
Optional equipment
document camera, 42
349
ViewStation EX User Guide
second monitor, 41
ShowStation IP, 43
VCR, 41
Visual Concert FX, 42
Outbound Call Route, 99
Outside line configuration, 77
P
packet loss, 282
Passwords
admin, 312, 332
Administrator Password, 78
GAB server, 121
general information, 312, 332
Meeting Password, 312, 332
multipoint conference password, 197
Software Update Password, 312, 333
passwords
management, 333
protect screens, 251
passwords,
Management
Password
(PMAC) 250
PBX and Private Network Number, 125
PC
configuration, 220, 222
enable DHCP, 224
finding IP address, 247
how to connect to the LAN, 220
requirements, 220
snapshot application (PolycomSnap),
243
pcPresent, 234
People+Content 218
Picture-in-picture, 177
PIP, 150, 289, 306
Placing a call
Address Book, 153
Manual Dialer, 148
multipoint, 187
PMAC 248, 331, 333
Polycom OneDial overview, 97
350
Polycom Video Error Concealment, 282
PolycomSnap, 243
Power supply
system, 31
power supply
EX, 22
Preferred Alias (GAB), 123
Presentations
advanced troubleshooting, 273
loading, 233
selecting, 236
viewing, 238
Primary Camera, 309
Private Network
access, 127
Dialing Prefix, 128
profiles (PMAC), 252
Public network, 127
Q
QCIF video format, 106
Quality of Service configuration, 140
R
Register system with GAB, 121
Remote control
camera control keys, 168
description of functions, 21
menu selection, 60
mute button, 174
not working, 24
troubleshooting, 275
virtual/Web based, 256
Remote management
sending a message, 257
virtual remote control, 257
Require Account Number to Dial, 132
Reset system, 286
Resynchronization (V.35/RS-449/RS-530),
110
www.polycom.com
Index
resynchronization, downspeeding 185
Router hops, 137
RS-232
configuration, 314
interface, 314
RS-366 Dialing (V.35/RS-449/RS-530), 69,
107
RS-449--See V.35, 103
RS-530--See V.35, 103
S
Security, 312, 332
Selecting a far-site camera, 168
Selecting a near-site camera, 167
Send a Message (Web interface), 257
Send Address Book, 315
Sending snapshots, 175
Serial number, 314
Shift key on on-screen keyboard, 163, 188
ShowStation IP, 43
Slide display and Annex D, 238
Slide presentation
loading, 232
password, 236
Snapshot Timeout, 306
Snapshots
from Web Interface, 257
select camera, 309
sending, 175
timeout, 175, 306
using PolycomSnap, 243
SNMP configuration, 138
Softupdate
Allow System to be a DHCP Server, 46
software upgrade over IP, 45
Software
information, 314
Software Update Password, 312, 333
update far site, 315
upgrade over IP, 45
upgrade over ISDN, 47
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
version, 279
Sounds effects
setting volume, 305
SPIDs
auto-detect, 114
entering manually, 75, 114
number troubleshooting, 269
Statistics
advanced (network), 281
network, 280
Streaming
Apple QuickTime, 214
configuration, 136
from Web interface, 261
options 212
Subnet mask, 88
Switch protocols
BRI, 76
System information, 278
System Name
format, 293
initialization, 61
T
Technical Support contact, 27
Telephone
adding an analog number, 78
placing analog call, 158
Telephone & Audio, 304
Timeout of snapshots, 306
tracking call billing 258
Troubleshooting
audio, 26, 264
basic, 24
general problems, 275
IMUX, 271
LAN/Intranet, 272
network and communications, 269
presentations, 273
remote control, 275
video, 27, 267
351
ViewStation EX User Guide
TV Monitor, 307
U
Upgrading software
over IP, 45
over ISDN, 47
to support multipoint, 55
User Setup, 287
V
V.35/RS-449/RS-530
advanced configuration, 103
advanced dialing, 108
audio and video preferences, 106
Broadcast Mode, 105
cable adapter kit, 38
cable information, 37
Calling Profile, 72, 109
configuration 295
Crypto Resync configuration, 110, 313,
333
DCE, 36
Dialing Speeds, 70, 106
Direct Connect, 105
initial configuration, 68
network interface installation, 35
serial interface control signals, 104
Video Network screens, 295
Video Numbers, 73
Validate Account Number, 133
VCR
optional, 41
VCR Audio Out Always On, 310
VCR Record Source, 310
VCR Setup, 310
VGA
input calibration, 311
monitor configuration, 307
output, 308
resolution, 308
VGA monitor, 30
352
Video
advanced troubleshooting, 267
basic troubleshooting, 27
configuration, 305
diagnostics, 281
error concealment, 282
wide screen, 306
Video call
adding a telephone call to, 159
answering automatically, 156
answering manually, 155, 156
disconnect, 157
manual dial (one number), 148
manual dial (two numbers) 151
multipoint, 182, 183
rejecting automatically, 156
Video Network initial configuration
(V.35/RS-449/RS-530), 69
Video Numbers (V.35/RS-449/RS-530), 73
Video Phone, 148
View a Meeting (Web), 240
Virtual remote control, 256
Visual Concert DC, 42
Visual Concert FX, 42, 315
Visual Concert VGA, 307
W
Web browser configuration, 225
Web interface
access, 228
Address Book, 231
Admin Setup, 253
configure NetMeeting, 245
diagnostics, 255
Global Address Book, 231
Internet Explorer configuration, 225
load and select a presentation, 232
main icons, 230
Manual Dialer, 231
Netscape configuration, 226
remote management, 253
running diagnostics, 256
www.polycom.com
Index
Send a Message, 257
snapshot utility, 257
streaming, 261
system setup, 253
View a Meeting, 240
View a Presentation, 238
virtual remote control, 257
Wide Screen Video, 306
WINS resolution, 87
WINS server, 89
© Polycom, Inc. 2003
353
ViewStation EX User Guide
354
www.polycom.com
Download PDF
Similar pages